Rx 2000
User Manual
Software Release 9.09

Revision: 12

Preface
About this ManualThis User Manual is a guide to the functions provided by your Rx Series instrument.
For further information on PHABRIX products, please refer to the PHABRIX web page:https://www.phabrix.com/products

Notice
The information in this document has been produced by PHABRIX Ltd with care and is believed to beaccurate. PHABRIX Ltd does not assume responsibility for loss or damage resulting from errors,omissions or inaccuracies herein. This document is subject to change, and revisions may be madeand issued to include such changes.
No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any formor by any means, electronic, mechanical, recorded or otherwise without the prior written consent of
PHABRIX Ltd.
Copyright © PHABRIX Ltd. All rights reserved. Software products licensed are owned by PHABRIX
Ltd and are protected by international treaty provisions and national copyright laws.
HDMI ® is the registered trademark of HDMI Licensing and is used within the document for
identification purposes only.
PHABRIX® Limited
Omega HouseEnterprise Way,
Thatcham, Berkshire
RG19 4AE
United Kingdom

Page ii

Phone: +44 (0)1635 873030
Email: support@phabrix.com
Web: https://www.phabrix.com

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Revision
This guide is a revision controlled document. Any changes to any page content will be reflected in theoverall revision status of the whole manual.

ReleaseDate

SoftwareVersionUpdates Include:

1

October2013

0.08.0018

Release of Version 8

2April 2014

0.09.0024

Dolby Decoder & High res Waveforms

3

July 2014

9.01.12565

Dolby Generator

4

October2014

9.02.13137

5

March 2015

9.02.13417

Frame Grab

6

July 2015

9.03.13798

AV Delay

7

June
2017

9.05

2K over HD-SDI, left-hand TFT Instrument View & Closed Caption Error Logging

8

July 2017

9.05

Loudness enhancements

9

February
2019

9.05

Vertical Ancillary Data display in Picture & Waveform using cursors

10

January
2020

9.07

GPIO Loudness Control; Increased Range of Rx Generators’ Master Control.

11

March
2023

9.08

Vectorscope addition of x2 Gain for CbCr signals; 16:9 mode support for 525-line signals in Picture
scaler; additional bug fixes.

12

October2023

9.09

Added Gamut instrument with setup dialog and gamut logging. Ability to save custom gamut settings to preset using Custom mode. Removed existing Gamut checking from the Picture side menu;
added a Mono (monochrome) checkbox.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page iii

Getting Started
Package Contents
The shipping box should include the following:
One black carrying bag containing:l

PHABRIX Rx 2000 unitlPower Supply Unitl

Mains leadl

Allen keylUser Manual and Firmware on USB key.

Note: Both the latest versions of the user manual and firmware are available from the Software
Downloads section of the PHABRIX website:
https://www.phabrix.com/support/product-software-downloads/
The title page of this manual displays the supported version of the Rx 2000 software.

General Safety

Avoiding Personal Injury
Warning: This instrument is designed for use by qualified personnel only.
No internal user-serviceable parts are provided. Units should be returned to your local PHABRIX
agent for servicing.
The Operator must NOT remove the case from the unit as this will invalidate the warranty.
Do not spill any liquid onto the unit or its power adapter.
Warning: Do not look directly into the fiber optic connections of cable as this may cause
permanent damage to the eyes.

Power Supply
Make sure that the unit is connected to the correct power supply voltage. A power supply adapter is
supplied with the unit which may be connected to any AC power supply between 100 and 240 V AC
at 50-60 Hz. Only the supplied power adapter should be used with the unit. Do not use a damaged
AC cable with the unit as it may cause a shock or fire hazard. Replacement AC cables are available
from your local PHABRIX agent.

Page iv

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualInstallation Environment

Operating Temperature
Warning: The unit should only be operated between 0 and 40°Celsius. If the unit is operated at ahigher temperature, there is a possibility of a fire hazard. If the temperature is changed rapidly
from a cold environment to a hot environment, moisture can be created internally which cancause malfunction or damage the unit. Allow the unit to sit for 30 minutes without power applied
to reduce any possibility of condensation. If the temperature rises above 60°Celsius a warning
dialog will be given. If the temperature rises above 65°Celsius the unit will be turned OFF. Underboth conditions, an event will be added to the event log to show what happened.

Input/Output Terminals
Do not connect the input or output BNC connectors to external power as this can damage the internal
circuitry and cause the unit to work incorrectly.
The BNC connectors fitted on this unit are 75 ohm type which are not compatible with 50 ohm plugs.
Warning: The use of 50 ohm plugs will permanently damage the connectors on the unit. The useof 50 ohm plugs is considered to be misuse of the equipment and will therefore invalidate theunit’s warranty.

SFP Cage
Warning: When the SFP cage is fitted, either an SFP or a bung must be fitted in the SFP cage at
all times to prevent the Sx TAG overheating.

When Not in Use
Disconnect the unit from the power supply and AC power source when not in use.

Maintenance
Wipe the case, and knobs gently with a soft cloth, lightly dampened with a neutral cleaning agent. A
screen cleaning cloth may be used to clean the LCD. Do not apply force to the LCD when cleaning or
it may be damaged.
Warning: Remove the power supply from the unit and turn OFF before cleaning. Do not allow
any water or other liquid to enter the unit while cleaning.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page v

RoHS 2 Compliance
PHABRIX products are designed and manufactured using only Restriction of Hazardous Substances(RoHS) compliant components and materials. Based on information provided by our suppliers,
therefore, PHABRIX certifies that ALL products that it manufactures are RoHS-5 compliant and thatthey do not exceed the designated levels of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium,polybrominated biphenyl (PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl ether flame retardants (PBDE) legislated
under the provisions of the “European Parliament and Council Directive” on the “Restriction of the
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (2011/65/EC)” andassociated regulations collectively known as the RoHS Regulations.

Disposal of Equipment

This product is subject to the European WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) directive
and should be disposed of according to the regulations of each country.

Page vi

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualTrademarks
l

l

l

l

l

PHABRIX and Rx are registered trademarks of PHABRIX Ltd.
Dolby, Dolby E, Dolby Digital (Dolby AC-3), and Dolby Digital Plus (Dolby E-AC-3) are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks orregistered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are of their respective holders. In this user
manual, ™ and ® marks are not specified.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page vii

Table of Contents
Prefaceii

About this Manualii

Noticeii

Revision

iii

Getting Started

iv

Package Contentsiv

General Safetyiv

Installation Environmentv

RoHS 2 Compliancevi

Disposal of Equipmentvi

Trademarksvii

Description
1

1-1

Rx Platform

1-1

1-1

Overview

1-1

Rx 2000

1-3

Description

1-3

Front Panel

1-3

Rear Panel

1-3

Specifications

1-4

Rx Modules

1-5

Overview

1-5

CPU Module

1-5Single Analyzer, Dual Input Module

1-6Single Analyzer, Dual Input, Physical Layer Measurement Module

1-6Single Analyzer, Single Generator Module

1-7

AES Digital Audio Input / Output Module

1-7Single Analyzer, Single Generator, Physical Layer Measurement Module

1-7

Dual Output Generator Module

1-8

Rx Software Options

1-9

Overview

1-9

3G-SDI, Advanced formats and 2K Support

1-9

SDI Data Display and Ancillary Packet Analysis

1-10Advanced Physical Layer Analysis

1-11

Enhanced Remote Control (Now Included as Standard)

1-12

Dolby Metadata Generator

1-13

Dolby Analysis

1-13

Four Channel Loudness (Now Included as Standard)

1-14

Four Channel Closed Caption (Now Included as Standard)

1-14

Front Panel Controls
2

2-1
2-1

Overview

2-1

Switching On and Off the Instrument

2-1

Dual Instrument Display

2-1

Front Panel Versus HDMI® Monitor Output Control

2-2

Confidence Display

2-2

Main Menu

2-3

Instrument Status

Page viii

2-3

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Using the Menus

2-3

Multiple Analyzers

2-5

Generator Menus

2-6Video Out

2-6

Genlock Menu

2-16

Audio Group Menu

2-18

Dolby (Dolby Metadata Generator Option)

2-20

Analyzer Menus

2-26

Overview

2-26

Picture2-27

Analyzer Gamut Monitor

2-33

Gamut Setup

2-38

Data View

2-41

Waveform Monitor

2-43Vectorscope

2-46

Eye and Jitter

2-47

Jitter Analysis

2-52

Signal Information Menus

2-53

Overview

2-53

Video Status

2-54

MISC Status

2-56

Video Input Timing

2-57

ANC Status

2-58

ANC Inspector (SDI Analysis Option)

2-62

SFP Info

2-65

Audio Menus

2-66

Audio Meters

2-66

Audio Status

2-69

Dolby Status (Dolby Analyzer Option)

2-70

Loudness Meters

2-76

Dolby Decoder Setup (option)

2-81

System Menus

2-82

Presets

2-82

Network

2-86

Info

2-88

Utils

2-90

Engineer

2-92

HDMI/SDI Output

2-94

Logging Menus

2-96

Overview

2-96

Event Log

2-97

Log Setup

2-98

Log Eye Jitter

2-101

Log ANC Status

2-102

Speaker Menu

2-103

Speaker

2-103

Speaker / Headphone

2-103

Admin Menus

2-105

USB Disk Connected Window

2-105

HDMI Monitor Output
3

3-1
3-1

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page ix

Overview

3-1

Display Area

3-2

Locking Reference VITC and LTC

3-2

Managing the Monitor Output

3-3

Context Menus

3-5

Instrument Panel Resizing

3-5

Generator Panels

3-7

Overview

3-7

Generator Video

3-8

Output On

3-8Standard

3-8

Color Format

3-8

Pattern

3-9

Frame Grab Playout

3-17

Generator Reference

3-19

Source

3-19

Delay

3-19

Generator Output Audio Menu

3-20

Inv

3-21

Link

3-21

Master

3-21

4AES Module

3-21

Analyzer Panels

3-23

Overview

3-23

Picture3-24

Timecode Display

3-25

Safe Area Generator

3-25

Sample, Line and Field Selection

3-25

Picture Cursors and Zoom

3-26

Closed Caption / Subtitle Display

3-26

A/V Delay Analysis (Option: PHRXO-AVD)

3-28

Native Resolution Picture Display

3-29

AFD/WSS and V-Chip Monitoring

3-29

Frame Grab

3-29

Analyzer Gamut Monitor

3-33

Gamut Error (Err) Mode

3-34

Zebra Bars Mode

3-35

Gamut Errors Display

3-37

Gamut Setup

3-38

Gamut Check Configuration

3-39

Gamut Custom Mode

3-40

Gamut Logging

3-40

Data View

3-41

Type

3-41

Waveform Monitor

3-43

Waveform Type

3-43

Waveform Scale

3-44

Cursors

3-44

All, Line and Sample

3-45

Waveform Setup Button Dialog

3-45

Vectorscope

Page x3-47

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Eye

3-48
Overview

3-48

Causes of Jitter

3-48

Jitter Filters

3-50

Jitter Meter Ranges

3-51

Advanced Jitter Analysis

3-51

Jitter

3-53

Video Status

3-54

EDH/CRC Errors

3-54

Cable Length

3-55

Active Picture CRC

3-55

Misc Status

3-56

Payload ID – SMPTE 352

3-56

Video Format

3-56Video Timing

3-57

ANC Status

3-58

ANC Inspector (SDI Analysis Option)

3-62

ANC Inspector Setup

3-63

SFP Info

3-65

Audio Metering

3-66

Audio Phase Meters

3-66

Metering Setup

3-67

Audio Mix Mode

3-68

4AES Module

3-68

Dolby Metadata Analysis

3-68

SDI Audio Status

3-69

Lissajous

3-70

Loudness Meters

3-71

Loudness Logging

3-71

Loudness Modes

3-72

Input and Source

3-72

Loudness Options

3-73

GPIO Loudness Control

3-73

Confidence Check

3-76

Dolby Metadata (Dolby Analyzer Option)

3-77

Overview

3-77

Dolby E

3-77

Dolby Digital

3-78

Dolby Digital Plus

3-78

Analyzer Reference

3-78

Source Selection

3-79

Dolby E Framing Values

3-79

Dolby E Timing source

3-79

Dolby E Program Configuration

3-80

Dolby Digital Program Configuration

3-80

Dolby Digital Plus Program configuration

3-81

Program Metadata

3-81

System Panels

3-84

Overview

3-84

Network Setup

3-85

Engineer Setup

3-87

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page xiHDMI/CPU SDI Setup / HDMI/SDI Output

3-89

System Info

3-91

Board Status

3-93

Date and Time Setup

3-95

Audio Monitoring Setup

3-97

Dolby Decoder Setup

3-99

Surround Channel Setup

3-100

Time Code Displays

3-100

Default Window Size

3-102

Dolby Generator Setup (Dolby Generator Option)

3-103

Logging Panels

3-109

Overview

3-109

Event Log

3-109

Event Log Setup - General

3-110

Event Log Setup - Eye / Jitter

3-113

Event Log Setup - ANC Packets

3-114

Preset Memories

3-115

Overview

3-115

Defining Preset Content

3-115

Saving Presets

3-116

Recalling Presets

3-117

Renaming Presets

3-117

Adding Additional Presets

3-117

Clearing Presets

3-117

Exporting Presets

3-118Transferring Presets to a Different Rx

3-118

Disk Space Considerations

3-119

System Reference Source

3-120

Selecting the System Reference

3-120

Admin Menus

3-122

USB Disk Connected Window

3-122

Browser Control
4

4-1
4-1

Browser Control Overview

4-1

Using the Menus

4-1

Log Link

4-2

Status Link

4-2

Downloads Link

4-2

HDMI Link

4-3

Glossary of Terms
A
Specifications
B

A-1
A-1
B-1
B-1

Rx Platform Overview

B-1

Rx 2000

B-3

Description

Page xii

B-3

Environmental Requirements

B-4

Dimensions

B-5

Front Panel Dimensions

B-5

Back Panel Dimensions

B-5

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualTop Panel Dimensions

B-5

Side Panel Dimensions

B-6

Front Panel

B-7

Front Panel Display

B-7

Loudspeakers

B-7

Headphone Output

B-7

Rx 2000 Rear Panel

B-8

Power Connection

B-8

External Locking Reference

B-8

AES Input

B-8

SDI Out

B-9

HDMI

B-9

Local Control

B-9

Networking

B-10

GPIO

B-10

Rx Modules

B-13

Single Analyzer, Dual Input

B-13

Single Analyzer, Dual Input, Physical Layer Measurement

B-15

Single Analyzer, Single Generator

B-18

Single Analyzer, Single Generator, Physical Layer Measurement

B-22

Dual Output Generator Module

B-26

AES Digital Audio Input / Output

B-28

Supported Video Formats

B-29

SD 270 Mb/s

B-29

HD 1.485 Gb/s (SMPTE 292M)

B-29

Dual Link 1.485 Gb/s (SMPTE 327M)

B-29

3G Level-A 2.97 Gb/s (SMPTE 425M-A)

B-30

3G Level-B 2.97 Gb/s (SMPTE 425-B)

B-32

Built-in Generator Formats (CPU Module)

B-33

MaintenanceC

C-1

Warranty

C-1

C-1

Overview

C-1

Warranty Exceptions

C-1

Product Registration

C-2

Maintenance

C-2

General Maintenance

C-2

Preventative Maintenance

C-2

Software Maintenance

C-3

Installing New Software

C-3

Rx File Structure

C-5

Applications
D

D-1
D-1

Audio Configuration

D-1

Overview

D-1

Audio Channel Selection for Measurement and Analysis

D-2

Embedded Audio Input

D-2

AES Audio Input

D-2

Decoded Dolby Audio (Dolby Decoder Module)
Audio Monitoring

D-3
D-5

Speaker / Headphone Audio monitoring

D-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page xiii

Rear Panel Monitoring

D-6

HDMI Output Monitoring

D-6

HDMI Over SDI monitoring

D-7

Audio Routing

Page xiv

D-8

AES Audio Output

D-8

Generator SDI Audio Output

D-9

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

1

Description
Rx Platform
Overview

The Rx platform has been designed to serve the varied test and measurement needs of thebroadcast industry. PHABRIX has developed a modular system from which specific broadcast client
requirements can be satisfied.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-1

The Rx platform allows a flexible approach to test and measurement on a new technological platform
designed for longevity. The system has been created to allow broadcast engineers to specify
features according to the complexity of the required test and measurement application by simply
adding additional modules and software licenses to their chosen core chassis.
Adding modules is like adding independent new instruments, each module providing a dedicated setof instruments for the task required.
The Rx Platform is available in a choice of chassis types:lllPage 1-2

Rx 2000 – a unique audio video monitoring solution combining front panel instrumentation,using dual TFT LCD screens, and integrated full range stereo speakers. Unique 2U tapered tiltin-bay engineering with four Rx module bays.
Rx 1000 Rasterizer – a compact 1U 19 inch rack-mount chassis with OLED display interface
with four Rx module bays.
Rx 500 Rasterizer – a compact 1U half-rack width chassis with OLED display interface with two
Rx module bays.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualRx 2000
Description
The Rx 2000 is a 2U rack-mounted instrument that provides the following:
l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Two front panel TFT screens, one with a full range of generator, analyzer and system control
menus, and selected analyzer instrument panels such as Waveform monitor, Vectorscope and
Eye Pattern display; and the other to display the selected input image and other instruments,
along with Input, Preset, and System Reference buttons.
Both TFT screens can be used to display instruments at the same time.
Rasterized HDMI/SDI outputs to allow up to 16 individual instrument panels (windows) to be displayed on a single DVI 1920 x 1080 resolution monitor. Ideal for outside broadcast facilities andengineering bays where space is at a premium.
Individual input selection, for instant confidence and monitoring of feeds, using dedicatedsource selection buttons.
Control through front panel controls, for in-bay use and remotely via a network connection
using a web browser.
Front panel audio monitoring, provided by high quality speakers and/or a head phone socket,
to allow the monitoring of the selected Audio channel.
Four Module slots allowing the installation of Analyzer and Generator modules.

Front Panel

The front panel provides access to the Video Confidence Display, the Instrument Display and menu
system.

Rear Panel

The rear panel provides the Rx instrument’s connections via the CPU module and the installed
Analyzer or Generator modules. See the section Rx Modules for details of the different module types.
The power for the Rx instrument is provided by a separate PSU unit that connects to the 4-pin male
XLR connector at the left of the instrument.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-3

Specifications
See the appendix Specifications for specification details.

Page 1-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Rx Modules
Overview
The Rx range can be configured with a range of plug-in modules (printed circuit boards withdedicated hardware for specific functions) that enable functionality in the software and allow various
menus to be selected on the front panel allowing different Instrument panels (windows) to be createdon the Monitor output.
Note: The Monitor Output → System Status menu can be used to inspect which Modules havebeen installed in the Rx instrument. See the chapter HDMI Monitor Output for details.

CPU Module
At the heart of every Rx product is the CPU module. Here signals from each installed instrument
module are processed to provide a variety of instrument displays. Unhindered by stacked processing
restraints, the CPU board creates an output display at an industry leading 1920 x 1080 pixels withperfect scaling through simultaneous HDMI and/or SDI outputs. In practice the Rx acts like a Test and
Measurement multi-viewer providing scaled instruments from any selected video/audio input.

The CPU board also provides AES input, Bi- / Tri-level looping reference, eight channel GPI, LTC input
and stereo analog audio output. Dual USB ports are provided for mouse and keyboard control.
Ethernet provides remote access by way of a web browser and is also the method for updating
firmware and software from the PHABRIX dedicated server.
REF:
Bi- / Tri-level looping reference that allows the Rx instrument to be locked to a studio reference.
AES IN:An AES audio input
SDI OUT:An SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal generator output that provides test signals generated by the
on-board Generator module on the CPU board. This output can also be used to provide an
SDI monitor output tied to the HDMI® monitor output.
HDMI:
A DVI 1920 x 1080 resolution monitor output that allows up to 16 individual instrument panels (or windows) to be displayed. Note that on some HDMI® monitors this output may
appear too sharp causing ringing on the edges of text and menus. This can be resolved by
reducing the monitor’s image sharpness setting.
USB:
Are standard USB 2 connections provided for connection of a keyboard and mouse to control the HDMI® monitor output.
LAN:
10 / 100-base-T connection allowing the Rx instrument to be connected into a network andaccessed over TCP/IP so that it can be controlled remotely.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-5

GPIO:
Provides a GPI (general purpose input), LTC control and analog audio connections.

Single Analyzer, Dual Input Module

The PHRXM-A module allows two connected SDI or Optical video signals to be present continuously
and switched for analysis or display by the single analyzer channel as required.
IN1 - LP1:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal, high impedance loop through that allows the Rx instrument toanalyze the connected input.
IN2 - LP2:
A second SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal, high impedance loop through that allows the Rx instrument to analyze the connected input.
OPTICAL:
Allows a Video Transceiver (SFP Optical) module to be installed.
Note: Note that for Dual Link analysis the Link 1 signal must be connected to the IN1 BNC
connector and the Link 2 signal must be connected to the IN2 BNC connector on the same
Analyzer module. Likewise if Fiber is being used, Link 1 should connect to OPTICAL A and Link 2
should connect to OPTICAL B.

Single Analyzer, Dual Input, Physical Layer Measurement Module

The PHRXM-AE module allows two connected SDI or Optical video signals to be present
continuously and selected for analysis or display as required.
IN1 - LP1:
Is an SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal, high impedance loop through that allows the Rx instrument
to analyze the connected input. Connector IN1 (red or black nut) provides physical layer
measurements.
IN2 - LP2:
Is a second SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal, high impedance loop through that allows the Rx
instrument to analyze the connected input.
OPTICAL:
Allows a Video Transceiver (SFP Optical) module to be installed.
Note: For Dual Link analysis the Link 1 signal must be connected to IN1 BNC connector and the
Link 2 signal must be connected to IN2 BNC connector on the same Analyzer module. Likewise
if Fiber is being used Link 1 should connect to OPTICAL A and Link 2 should connect to
OPTICAL B .

Page 1-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSingle Analyzer, Single Generator Module

The PHRXM-AG module allows a single connected SDI or Optical video signal to be monitoredcontinuously and allows the generation of a single SDI or Optical video test signal.
SDI ANA IN:
Is an SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal, high impedance loop through to SDI ANA OUT that allows
the Rx instrument to analyze the input.
SDI GEN OUT:
Are two identical SD-SDI or HD-SDI generator output that provide a test signal generated
by the PHRXM-AG module.
OPTICAL:
Allows a Video Transceiver (SFP Optical) module to be installed.
GEN:
Provides a test signal generated by the PHRXM-AG module.
ANA:
Allows the Rx instrument to analyze the connected input.

AES Digital Audio Input / Output Module

The PHRXM-4AES module allows four AES digital audio pairs to be routed to the Audio Meter andLoudness instruments. It also allows AES audio to be used by Generator modules and allows
Embedded SDI audio channels to be output as AES audio.
l

AES IO_A: An AES digital audio pair input/output.

l

AES IO_B: An AES digital audio pair input/output.

l

AES IO_C: An AES digital audio pair input/output.

l

AES IO_D: An AES digital audio pair input/output.

Single Analyzer, Single Generator, Physical Layer Measurement Module

The PHRXM-AGE module allows a single connected SDI or Optical video signal to be monitoredcontinuously and allows the generation of a single SDI or Optical video test signal.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-7

SDI ANA IN:
An SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal, high impedance loop through to SDI ANA OUT that allows
the Rx instrument to analyze the input, and provides physical layer measurements (red nut).
SDI GEN OUT:
Two identical SD-SDI or HD-SDI generator outputs that provide a test signal generated by
the PHRXM-AG module.
OPTICAL:
Allows a Video Transceiver (SFP Optical) module to be installed.
GEN:
Provides a test signal generated by the PHRXM-AG module.
ANA:
Allows the Rx instrument to analyze the connected input.

Dual Output Generator Module

The PHRXM-GDL module allows the generation of a two independent SDI or Optical video test
signals with the same video format, color-space and frame rate for Dual link use.
SDI GEN-A OUT:
Ttwo identical SD-SDI or HD-SDI generator outputs that provide a test signal generated by
the PHRXM-GDL module.
SDI GEN-B OUT:
Two identical SD-SDI or HD-SDI generator outputs that provide a test signal generated by
the PHRXM-GDL module.
OPTICAL:
Allows a Video Transceiver (SFP Optical) module to be installed.
GEN-A:
Provides a test signal generated by the PHRXM-GDL module.
GEN-B:
Provides a test signal generated by the PHRXM-GDL module.
Note: For Dual Link test pattern generation both Output 1 and Output 2 must be enabled on the
Generator. The Link 1 signal is produced on the module’s GEN A output and the Link 2 signal is
produced on the module’s GEN B output. Likewise if a Fiber connection is being used the Link 1
signal is produced on OPTICAL GEN A and the Link 2 signal is produced on OPTICAL GEN B.

Page 1-8

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Rx Software Options
Overview
The Rx range provides a number of software options that can enhance the Rx functionality for specificapplications.

3G-SDI, Advanced formats and 2K Support

This option (PHRXO-3G) provides 3G-SDI Level A and B support including advanced formats: 4:2:2
YUV, 4:4:4 RGB and 4:4:4 YUV at 10/12 bit, and 2K advanced formats including: 4:2:2 YCbCr, 4:4:4
RGB’ and 4:4:4 YCbCr at 10/12 bit. For broadcast manufacturers this option allows rigorous testing ofmany more formats beyond the standard signals used in traditional broadcasting.
The 2K-SDI support provides analysis of, and test pattern generation for, 2K Digital Cinema as
defined in the SMPTE ST 2048-2:2011 standard (“2048 x 1080 Digital Cinematography Production
Image FS/709 Formatting for Serial Digital Interface”) and SMPTE 428-9 (D-Cinema Distribution
Master - Image Pixel Structure Level 3 - Serial Digital Interface Signal Formatting).
Among the support for 3G level B is the ability to analyze signals such as SMPTE 425-B carrying 1 x
SMPTE 372M Dual-Link payload. Generation of these signals is activated if the generator is present.
Uniquely the PHABRIX units create three pathological signals in all formats which will be of greatinterest to broadcast manufacturers. The first is as defined in SMPTE RP198 and is the split field signal
with the equalizer test in the first half and the PLL test in the second half. The second and third areseparate full-frame EQ test and PLL tests signals. To maintain a regular parity distribution and mitigate
any DC offset, the EQ part of the pattern inverts a bit at the start of the first line in each alternate frame.
This is the form of 3G Level B Pathological signal that many video manufacturers are adopting as theirtest signal of choice as it stresses electronic circuits more thoroughly.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-9

SDI Data Display and Ancillary Packet Analysis

The SDI data analysis option (PHRXO-DATA) provides the engineer with a detailed view of the datawords contained within the SDI stream. This allows the analysis of complex faults and is particularly
useful when determining compatibility issues between equipment and when debugging new productdevelopments particularly in a R&D environment. Detail within the active SDI stream can be viewed
with continuous update.
Detail within the active SDI stream can be viewed with continuous update. The SDI Analysis option
provides the following functional areas:
Grid
Displays the SDI data in the form of an array.
StreamAllows the SDI continuous datastream to be viewed.
Component
Allows the video components to be displayed in separate columns.
Split
Allows the video components to be display individually.
Ancillary Data
Allows the user to capture whole Ancillary data packets identified by their data id (DID).
Ancillary Status
Allows additional user-defined selections with the appropriate DID or SDID code.
Access to the SDI analysis functionality is via the Analyzer - Data View and Sig Info - ANC Inspector
menus.

Page 1-10

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Advanced Physical Layer Analysis

The analysis option (PHRXO-EA) for the Rx range adds an additional jitter screen, plus enhancements
to the eye display. The extra features added to the eye and jitter module are focused on broadcast
manufacturers who have a need for high-end analysis tools. Histograms, decade filters, multiple eye
display, full screen jitter display and alignment and timing thermometers are all available withcomprehensive logging.
The Advanced physical layer analysis option provides the following functional areas:
Multi Eye Display
Enables analysis when serializer jitter is present: Products process video in either a 10 or
20 bit parallel data domain which is subsequently transmitted as a single bit serial datastream. By triggering every 10 or 20 eyes you can reveal repetitive parallel/serial clock
domain jitter in equipment being analyzed.
Histograms
Give statistical information which can be used to accurately measure rise time, fall time andamplitude. These automatic, accurate measurements can then be logged for extended
periods of time. Measurements like rise time and fall time are notoriously difficult to makewith SDI signals.
In addition to the standard timing and alignment jitter filters, decade filters are provided
allowing an engineer to analyze the frequency content of any jitter present. The number ofeyes displayed is adjustable from one eye up to one frame of eyes.
Decade Filters
Provided to enable an engineer to analyze the frequency content of any jitter present. The
number of eyes displayed is adjustable from one eye up to one frame of eyes.
Jitter Display
Separate full-screen jitter analysis display incorporated into the advanced option to enable
an engineer to analyze the nature of jitter present using a graph of jitter versus time. Again,
the decade filters are present and the time base can be adjusted from one line through to
one frame. By analyzing jitter in this detailed way an engineer can determine whether a signal is in or out of specification and also get a feel for where any problems lie.
Note: Now included with purchase of Analyzer Eye Module (PHRXM-AE or PHRXM-AGE).

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-11

Enhanced Remote Control (Now Included as Standard)

The Enhanced remote control option gives users full remote control of the unit via TCP/IP Sockets toallow any aspect of the unit to be modified or queried.
This allows complex applications to be created to perform test and measurement functions such as
automated testing of routers or other broadcast equipment.
The Rx instrument can act as a server and listen on a port waiting for incoming requests from clientssuch as a PC. Using this method of communication, the Rx range can provide a variety of information
to the control device it is connected to and be controlled in specified areas of the product using thecommand details included. All visual controls on the product have an associated command.
Messages may be sent to set or get data from a command i.e., if you set a value the unit will be
configured accordingly and a reply returned and if you get a value from the PHABRIX unit it will reply
with that value. All messages are acknowledged to increase the security of the interface i.e., closedloop communication.
The control structure can be selected as Passive or Active. Passive control allows simple remotecontrol where the host PC is in control and sends commands when it wants to change data or get
information. It is this method which is the most popular use for remote control.
Active control is when the Rx unit synchronizes with the host PC. Any changes on the Rx unit will
result in a message being sent to the host PC. This method is useful for controlling a Rx unit fromanother unit or via the PC simulator software. It requires more complex software on the host to
respond to the returned messages.
The option provides a programming guide including command information and examples, and can be
downloaded from the PHABRIX website. A Windows™ application for testing the interface is also
provided as part of this option.
See the Remote Control Guide for details.

Page 1-12

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby Metadata Generator

The Dolby Metadata Generator software option (PHRXO-BDG) allows generation of Dolby-E, Dolby
Digital and Dolby Digital Plus pre-encoded test signals to check that they are transferredtransparently through the broadcast chain unaffected by routers / switchers, satellite links, etc.

Dolby Analysis

The Dolby-analysis option (PHBRO-BDA) displays Dolby E, Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus
metadata present in a selected audio stream and determines whether a Dolby-E packet is timed
correctly on the SDI video stream. The Dolby audio may be monitored from any of the SDI input
embedded audio channel pairs or AES input.
Peak metadata audio levels metering is also displayed for Dolby E.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 1-13

Four Channel Loudness (Now Included as Standard)This option (PHRXO-4LOU) allows up to four channels of loudness metering and monitoring to be
performed by the Rx unit (one loudness channel per analyzer module).
The tools provided in the “Loudness” window allow the loudness of the selected stereo audio pair or
5.1 surround audio group to be monitored and measured. The Rx system provides a single Loudness
meter as standard and an additional three Loudness meters are available as an option. The Loudness
meters are accessed via the Analyzer module menu on the HDMI® monitor output.
The Loudness Setup allows the meter scale (LU, LUFS or LKFS), measurement standard (EBU or ITU)
and Meter Range as well as user-defined threshold values for Integrated, Momentary and Short Term
loudness.

Four Channel Closed Caption (Now Included as Standard)This option (PHRXO-4CAP) allows up to four channels of closed caption to be displayed. This isallocated as one channel per analyzer module.
This supports WTS/OP42/OP47, EIA 608 and EIA 708 closed caption / subtitle formats. >Page 1-14

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualFront Panel Controls

2

Overview
Switching On and Off the Instrument
To turn on your PHABRIX Rx 2000 press the red button at the top right-hand corner of the front panel.

Once the system has started, pressing the button again will switch it off. If for some reason the
instrument stops responding, press and hold the button for a few seconds to switch it off.

Dual Instrument Display
The Rx 2000 now supports Instrument display in the left-hand TFT screen often used for theConfidence display. This means that two instruments can be monitored on the front panel at the sametime.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-1

Front Panel Versus HDMI® Monitor Output Control
The Rx 2000 can be controlled from either the HDMI® monitor output or from the front panel. The
right-hand front panel display provides menu access to the Analyzer, Generator, Logging and System
menus and the left-hand display allows the selected Analyzer Input to be displayed for confidence(first disable HDMI® output in the System → HDMI/SDI Output menu).
Note: The use of the Rx 2000 front panel will take precedence over the HDMI® monitor output. If
the front panel is to be used regularly it is advisable to use Memory presets to return the HDMI®
monitor output to its normal state. Memory presets can be saved and recalled from the HDMI®
monitor output taskbar or from the front panel System → Memories menu. The HDMI Layout
checkbox must be enabled.

Confidence Display
The left-hand TFT screen is controlled by the eight buttons below the screen, allowing inputs to all
analyzer modules to be selected.
lll

Top - (First Button) takes you to the top level of the simple menu.
Input Bank 1 (Second Button) gives access to SDI1a, FIB1a, SDI1b, FIB1b, SDI2a, FIB2a, SDI2b,
and FIB2b.
Input Bank 2 (Third Button) gives access to SDI3a, FIB3a, SDI3b, FIB3b, SDI4a, FIB4a, SDI4b,
and FIB4b.

Selecting the button beneath the displayed input will select that input for display on the front panel.
This will use the analyzer module resource for that chosen input and re-assign analyzer resources on
the HDMI® monitor output accordingly.
Selecting the Preset button on the left-hand display will show a bank of 6 presets at a time. This
allows HDMI display presets to be selected from the front panel.
Selecting the Sys Ref button on the left-hand display will show a bank of 6 available references at atime.
Dual instrument display on the front panel is available for the Rx 2000.
Selecting the View button on the left-hand display will show a bank of instruments views available forselection. Select the None button to clear the display.

Page 2-2

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Main Menu
The Main menu, displayed on the right-hand LED screen gives access to the software modules
available on the Rx 2000 instrument.

The buttons beneath the screen correspond to the menu areas. Pressing on any of these buttons will
display the corresponding menu.

Instrument Status
The top line of the menus shows the instrument status and includes the Input Video status, Genlock
status and current time.

If there are any events in the event log, the word Log is displayed in a red font on the status line.
If a 3G video standard is selected the video standard display will be shown as 3GA if it is a 3G-Level A
standard, 3GB if it is a 3G-Level B dual link standard, 3G2 if it is a 3G-level B dual stream (two patterns)
standard or DL if it is a dual link output.
The input video standard will be shown in red if the input signal has errors, but only if the analyzer isconnected to the input. If the analyzer is set to monitor the output, the input standard will be shown inbrown.
The output standard will be shown in red if the instrument is generating errors. The output standard
will show OFF if the generator output is Off.
The Jitter values will be shown in red if the jitter values are greater than the values specified on the
Log Setup page for the relevant jitter meter.

Using the Menus
The Menu buttons select which instrument is in use as well as selecting the options for the instrument.
The bottom of the LCD display shows the function of each Menu button.
When in a specific function e.g., Generator, Analyzer etc., the cursor controls on the right- hand of the
instrument select a field to edit. The current field has a red box around it. Pressing the OK button
starts or ends editing of that field. Checkboxes are always in edit mode and pressing the OK button
inverts the current state.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-3

When editing some types of fields, the menu buttons at the bottom take on different functionality toallow cancelling edit mode or setting the value for the field. When lists of options are displayed themenu buttons allow selection of the first/last item in the list as well as paging through the available
options. If the list of items is small, the available items may be displayed on the menu buttons for
instant access.
The buttons along the bottom of the LCD display change the currently displayed page when notediting a data field. The left-hand button always selects the top level menu and system overview
page. So for example pressing the first button will select the Main Menu, selecting the second button
will select the Generator menu, etc.
The Main menu is the top level menu from which all other menus are selected on the Rx 2000
instrument. The main menus are:Generator(Only present if a Generator module is fitted.) Allows video test pattern selection to bemade and audio test tones to be selected.
Analyzer
Allows the selected input signal to be analyzed in the form of a Picture, Gamut, Waveform
monitor, Vectorscope and Eye Pattern display (option).
Sig Info
Allows detailed signal information about the video and audio status for the analyzer source
to be displayed.
Audio
Gives access to the Audio Meters and Audio Status displays.
SystemAllows the setup of system wide settings including memories, date/time and software.
Logging
Selects the logging page to view and setup the error logging system.
Speaker
Selects the speaker / headphone setup page.

Page 2-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualMultiple Analyzers
The Analyzer module resource used by the Rx 2000 front panel is directly linked to the selected
input source. If, for example, the SDI1a input is selected this will use Analyzer 1 (the first analyzer
channel found in the first occupied Module slot). If SDI2a is selected it will use Analyzer 2 (the second
analyzer channel).
Selection of inputs using the Rx 2000 front panel (left-hand bank of buttons) will automatically reassign the analyzer resource used by the HDMI® monitor output affecting its use. Note that Bank 1 on
the left-hand screen gives access to input SDI1a through to FIB2b and Bank 2 gives access to inputs
SDI3a through to FIB4b.

All of the different Instrument displays (Picture, Gamut, Waveform Monitor, Vectorscope, etc.) on the
Rx 2000 front panel use the same analyzer resource. The front panel buttons will simply switch the
instrument being displayed.
Note: For Dual Link analysis, the Link 1 signal must be connected to IN1 BNC connector and the
Link 2 signal must be connected to IN2 BNC connector on the same Analyzer module. Likewise,
if Fiber is being used, Link 1 should connect to OPTICAL A and Link 2 should connect to
OPTICAL B.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-5

Generator Menus
Video OutThe Rx instrument with a Generator Module installed can create video test signals for all supported
SD and HD SDI output standards including the 3 GHz standards at 1080p 50, 59, 60 Hz. It will support
YCrCb formats as well as RGB formats.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Video Out menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Generator button.

Generator
When multiple generator modules are installed, the one to be controlled can be selected from thedropdown list.

Output On
The Output On function turns ON the output circuitry. On Rx instruments that have dual generator
modules, there is the option to turn on output 1 and output 2 which correspond to the 2 generator
outputs.
Note: For Dual Link test pattern generation both Output 1 and Output 2 must be enabled. The
Link 1 signal is produced on the module’s GEN A output and the Link 2 signal is produced on themodule’s GEN B output. Likewise, if a Fiber connection is being used, the Link 1 signal is
produced on OPTICAL GEN A and the Link 2 signal is produced on OPTICAL GEN B.

Standard
The menus in the Standard section are used to select the desired video output format. The top-leftbox selects the basic mode of the Rx instrument and determines whether it is generating normal
SD/HD video or 3G level A or level B video. Dual streams refer to the ability of the Rx instrument togenerate two separate pictures when transmitting 3G-level B in some formats. Which mode isselected determines which formats are available. Only valid frame rates for the output standard may
be selected.

Page 2-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualColor Format
Currently only YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bit picture formats are supported by the standard product but an option
may be purchased to enable other color formats. The following color modes may be selected
dependent on the selected standard :l

YCbCr 422 10 bitl

YCbCr 444 12 bitl

YCbCr 444 10 bitl

YCbCrA 4444 10 bitl

YCbCr 422 12 bitl

RGB 444 10 bitl

RGBA 4444 10 bitl

RGB 444 12 bit

PatternThis selects the video pattern that is output by the generator. Many standard patterns are provided by
the Rx instrument. You may also upload your own test patterns to the Rx instrument into the Patterns
directory and then select them using the User File option in this field. See the section Rx File
Structure or supported file formats . If a User File has been selected, the i button beside the file canbe selected to get information on the file properties. Unsupported file types will be displayed as a
black image. If the video standard is changed while a user file is loaded and there is no file for the
new standard present, a black image will be loaded and the User File blanked.
A bouncing Box may be overlaid on the current test pattern by selecting the Box checkbox field.
Color Bars test patterns are used to check that the color gamut of the television system and to ensure
the correct luminance and chrominance levels.

The 100% Color bars test pattern is produced by using combinations of the Red, Green and Blue
primary colors:lWhite (100% R, 100% G, 100% B)

lYellow (100% R, 100% G, 0% B)

lCyan (0% R, 100% G, 100% B)lGreen (0% R, 100G, 0% B)lMagenta (100% R, 0%G, 100% B)l

Red (100% R, 0% G, 0%B)lBlue (0% R, 0% G, 100% B)

lBlack (0% R, 0% G, 0% B)

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-7

The 75% Color bars and 75% Color bars + Red test patterns are produced by using combinations of
the Red, Green and Blue primary colors:lWhite (100% R, 100% G, 100% B)

lYellow (75% R, 75% G, 0% B)

lCyan (0% R, 75% G, 75% B)lGreen (0% R, 75G, 0% B)lMagenta (75% R, 0%G, 100% B)l

Red (75% R, 0% G, 0%B)lBlue (0% R, 0% G, 75% B)lBlack (0% R, 0% G, 0% B)

Note: For consistency 75% color bars should always be used when measuring or comparing jitterlevels.

The Tartan bars test pattern is a chequerboard pattern of 75% color bar colors that produces every
combination of color vector change.

The SMPTE Color bars test pattern was developed for the NTSC analog video standard andproduced by using the combinations of the Red, Green and Blue primary colors as used in 75% color
bars.

Page 2-8

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The SMPTE ARIB STD-B28 Color bars test pattern is an updated version of SMPTE color bars
(developed by the Japanese Association of Radio Industry and Businesses) and standardized as
SMPTE RP 219-2002 and is used to test both 4×3 standard definition and 16×9 high-definition video
signals.

The A/V Delay Test pattern and audio tone provided by the Generator module can be used to checkany delay between the video and audio. This animated test pattern provides a constantly moving
Clapper board and corresponding A/V Delay tone when the clapper board reaches the center of thetest pattern. For more information see A/V Delay Analysis (Option: PHRXO-AVD).

The Multi-burst test pattern is used to check the frequency response of the video path and checkthat it has not been affected by digital processing such as resizing, standards conversion or color
grading. The frequency of each burst will depend on the video format selected. For example:
For SD 720 pixels:
0.5 MHz 1.75 MHz 2.5 MHz 3.5 MHz 4.5 MHz 5.5 MHz
For HD 1920 Pixels:
5 MHz 7.25 MHz 15 MHz 20 MHz 25 MHz 30 MHz

The Bowtie test pattern is used to check the alignment of the luminance and chrominancecomponents through television equipment.
The Ramps and Steps test patterns are used to check the linearity of television equipment to ensurethat there have been no digital bit level artefacts such as rounding errors introduced that may cause
banding on the television pictures.

The Luma Ramp test pattern is used to check the linearity of the luminance component. This test
pattern exercises all of the discrete digital video levels including illegal values below video black andabove peak white.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-9

The Legal Ramp test pattern is used to check the linearity of the luminance component. This test
pattern exercises all of the discrete digital video levels from video black to video white, excluding
illegal values.

The Valid Ramp test pattern is used to check the linearity of the Y (luminance), Cr (R-Y) and Cb (B-Y)
components. This test pattern exercises all of the discrete digital video levels of these components,
excluding illegal values.

The Gray Bar - 5 test pattern is used to check for non-linear distortion in the luminance component.
The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 20% steps. Typically non-linearity will be seen as aloss of grayscale distinction.

The Gray Bar - 11 test pattern is used to check for non-linear distortion in the luminance component.
The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 10% steps.

The Gray Bar - 5 Vertical test pattern is used to check for differential gain distortion in the luminancecomponent line by line. The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 20% steps. Typically, nonlinearity will be seen as a loss of grayscale distinction.

The Gray Bar - 11 - Vertical test pattern is used to check for differential gain distortion in theluminance component line by line. The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 10% steps.

Page 2-10

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Pluge (picture line-up generation equipment) test pattern is used to adjust the black level andcontrast of a video monitor. The pattern consists of vertical luminance bars for white, mid-gray, blackand super-black.
The Color Field test patterns are used to provide primary colors (such as 100% red, green, blue, cyan,
magenta and yellow) and monochrome luminance levels to check for calibration and banding effects
caused by encoding/decoding processes.

If color field is the selected test pattern, another control selects which color to generate. Three user
definable custom colors may be defined using the “->” button. Custom colors are edited using the
Red-Green-Blue sliders. When setting the color using the RGB sliders, the YCbCr values will show thevalues for the current color space. When setting the color using the YCbCr sliders, the RGB values willshow the values for the current color space.
The Zone Plate is a two-dimensional linear frequency sweep test pattern used to check the effect offiltering, sub-Nyquist, sampling, processing standards conversion and display. Whenever an image is
re-sized or re-sampled there is a strong probability that the resultant image will suffer from one ormore of the artefacts such as aliasing / moire, softening (caused by reduced frequency response) andringing / halos.

The Zone Plate test patterns are used to check that the horizontal and vertical frequency response of
the video path is not affected by television equipment.
The zone plate selector will contain 3 user customizable zone plates as well as several
predetermined zone plates. The -> button displays a dialog which allow the parameters of the zone
plate to be adjusted for the custom zone plates. Any of the preset zone plates may be copied to thecustom zone plates to act as a starting point for a new zone plate. As the zone plate settings are
stored in user memories several custom zone plates are available:
Moving Zone-2H
A moving zone plate centered on the screen.
Static Zone-2H
A static zone plate centered on the screen from DC to the Nyquist frequency at left/rightedges.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-11

Static Zone-2V
A static zone plate centered on the screen from DC to the Nyquist frequency at top/bottom
edges.
Sweep-Horiz
A horizontal sweep from DC to Nyquist frequency horizontally.
Sweep-Vert
A vertical sweep from DC vertically.
Grating-50kHz
A 50 kHz frequency sine wave when using an HD output.
Grating-1MHz@HD
A 1 MHz frequency sine wave when using an HD output.
Grating-5MHz@HD
A 5 MHz frequency sine wave when using an HD output
CustomAllows editing of Custom zone plate settings. Three custom zone plates can be set-up andcan also be copied from existing presets using the Copy To button.

Mode
Sets which type of Zone Plate is being produced. It may be Zone Plate (circular pattern)
Grating (Linear horizontal or vertical grid) Sweep (Frequency sweeps from start to end Frequency)
Start Phase
Sets the start phase of the sine wave generated by the zone plate generator and is set indegrees from 0 to 360 degrees
Phase Rate
Used to set the rate of change of phase of the sine wave and thus changes the speed thatthe zone plate moves at. It is specified in degrees per frame.
Angle
Changes the angle of the zone plate and thus can change a horizontal sweep into a vertical sweep or rotate an elliptical zone plate pattern.
XScale/Start Freq
Sets the horizontal scale of grating patterns or the start value of the zone plate sweep frequency.
YScale/End Freq
Sets the vertical scale of grating patterns or the end value of the zone plate sweep frequency.

Page 2-12

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Pathological test patterns are used to check that the phase-locked loop circuitry used to decode
SDI data can recover/regenerate the SDI sample clock under worst-case conditions.

EQ Test is a pathological signal that generates long run-lengths of 1s or 0s (for example 19 samples of
0 followed by a single 1) to test the accuracy of phase lock loop circuitry that recovers/the sample
clock from the SDI data.

PLL Test is a pathological signal that generates a pattern of two consecutive 1s followed by twoconsecutive 0s repeated for the whole pattern. This is the worst-case to test phase lock loop circuitrythat recovers/regenerates the sample clock from the SDI data.

Check Field is a pathological signal that generates long run-lengths of 1 s or 0 s to test the accuracy ofphase lock loop circuitry that recovers / regenerates the sample clock from the SDI data. This is acombination of the EQ Test pattern and the PLL Test Pattern.
Note: If Check field / Pathological is selected when a dual stream format has been selected,
BOTH outputs will be forced to check field due to internal hardware limitations. If another patternis selected, the Check field pattern will be deselected. The exceptions to this are when Color
Field or Zone Plate are selected as test patterns.
The Check field / Pathological/PLL Check/EQ Check patterns will only look like the picture above
when a YCbCr 422 10 bit color mode is selected. Other color modes will have different pictures but
still create the SDI datastream required by SMPTE.
EDH
If the output signal is SD (PAL-625 or NTSC-525) the insertion of EDH information may beturned on or off.
ErrorsThis field enables the insertion of CRC or EDH errors into the video signal. This allows
checking of third party error detection circuitry. In SD there is one EDH ancillary packet per
field. When errors are being inserted every EDH value gets deliberately corrupted. This
creates one error count per field. (Actually one AP error and one FF error). In HD there is a
CRC value calculated for each line. When errors are being inserted the CRC value on line
number 1 gets deliberately corrupted. This creates one CRC error count per frame. There isalso the option to generate CRC errors (not SD EDH errors) on only the switching line infield 1 which can be used to check that any downstream equipment ignores errors on
switching lines.
SMPTE 352
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-13

This checkbox allows the SMPTE 352 Payload ID field to be inserted into the video output
stream. The state of this checkbox is stored separately for SD, HD and HD-3G line standards. Note that for HD-3G line standards the Payload ID should be turned ON.
Ident
A picture or text Ident may be set to identify an SDI source. This Ident can be switched on
or off from this page but changing the text, font, or bitmap is performed by selecting theEdit button to display the Ident dialog. An overview of the Ident is displayed beside theEdit button.
Note: If the zone plate or color field are selected, text cannot be overlaid over them. A smaller
version of the video output signal is displayed on this page with any overlaid ident.

This dialog allows selection of either a user-defined bitmap picture which has been downloaded into
the Idents directory of the Rx instrument or user defined text.
For both types, the position of the ident can be set to one of Top-Left, Top-Center, Top-Right, LeftCenter, Center-Screen, Right Center, Bottom-Left, Bottom-Center, Bottom-Right. When text ident isused, the font, size and color can be specified. Several fonts are built in to the Rx instrument, othertrue-type (.ttf) fonts may be downloaded as required.

When editing text, the keyboard above is displayed to allow easy editing. Move the cursor to selectthe key to press and then press Ok to select. The Shift menu key causes the next keyboard tochange to shift mode for the next key press.
The [Caps Lock] menu key locks the keyboard in all capitals mode. The [Alt Gr] key shows any
language dependent alternate keys that may be pressed. Several country keyboard styles areprovided. Note that not all fonts support all non-English characters.

Frame Grab Playout
Each Generator module within the system can play-out a video clip captured and saved using the
Picture Frame Grab function. This can be used to playout generated test clips as well as video clips
Page 2-14

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualcaptured when an error condition occurred.

The Frame Grab playout mode can be enabled by selecting Frame Grab from the test patterns
dropdown list.
Any video clip recorded using Frame Grab will appear in the dropdown list.
Once a video clip has been selected and loaded the transport controls can be used to play, stop, step
forward and reverse.
lStep backward through the selected video clip frame by frame ( < )lStop playing the video clip ( ⏹ )lSteps forward through the selected video clip frame by frame ( > )lPlays the video clip repeatedly ( ►).

The displayed video clip will be output through the Generator video output connection together with
its audio and SMPTE 352 payload.
Note: The Generator video format and frame rate will automatically be set to that of the video clip
being played.

Note: Box and Ident cannot be used when a video clip is selected for playout.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-15

Genlock Menu
The Rx instrument with a Generator Module installed can create video test signals that are either freerunning or locked to a studio reference signal. The Genlock menu is used to select an external
locking reference or set the instrument to free run.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Genlock menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Generator button.
When using an external locking reference signal, the Rx system will provide the best possible locking
regardless of the locking reference frame rate and the generated frame rate:lllWhen the frame rate of the locking reference is exactly the same as the generated frame rate,
there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal between them.
When the frame rate of the locking reference and the generated frame rate are divisible (forexample 50/25, 60/30, 59.94/23.98) there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal
between them.
When there is no relationship between the frame rate of the locking reference and that of thegenerated frame rate (for example a 625/50 locking reference and a 23.98 generated test pattern) then there will be a static lock between them but this will not be consistent.

Source
The generator may be locked to an input reference which may be either the reference input which isa Bi-Level/Tri-Level sync or may be locked to the video input. Alternatively, the generator may free
run.

Delay
The test patterns generated by the Generator module can be delayed or advanced with respect tothe locking reference input using the Lines and Pixel values.

System Reference
The dropdown menu allows the selection of the system locking reference. This can be the external
locking reference signal or one of the SDI inputs.
The System Reference defines the video source that the Rx system is synchronized to and affects allof the Rx outputs:
Page 2-16

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManuallOn-board test pattern generator output from the CPU SDI connectorlGenerator module SDI outputsl

HDMI monitor outputl

AES audio outputs

The System Reference can be set to one of the following depending on the type of modules installed
within the Rx chassis:
Free Run
Where the Rx system uses its own internal locking reference.
Ext. Ref
Where the Rx system is locked to an analog studio reference signal connected to the Ref
input on the CPU module.
SDI1
Where the Rx system is locked to the SDI input on a single input Analyzer module fitted inmodule slot 1.
FIB1
Where the Rx system is locked to SFP optical input on a single input Analyzer module fitted
in module slot 1.
SDI2a
Where the Rx system is locked to the SDI a input on a dual input Analyzer module fitted inmodule slot 2.
SDI2a
Where the Rx system is locked to the SDI b input on a dual input Analyzer module fitted inmodule slot 2.
Note: System Reference selection can be saved as part of a preset. To do this ensure that theVideo checkbox is selected in the Analyzer section of the System Presets menu.
Ideally the Rx system should be locked to an external studio reference all analyzer inputs should beof the same frame rate as the locking reference and synchronous to the locking reference.
External Reference can be used in most applications where a studio locking reference is available
and is used to ensure that all outputs from the system are locked to the studio itself.
In applications where Dolby E, Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus is being analyzed or decoded, theSystem Reference should be set to external reference unless one is not available in which case the
System Reference should be set to the specific SDI input where the Dolby digital audio is embedded.
In situations where there is no studio reference or when the SDI input is asynchronous and when
decoding Dolby audio or routing embedded SDI audio channels to the AES output (4AES module)
then the System Reference should be set to the SDI input containing the Dolby audio or embedded
audio channels.
Note: The level of Generator jitter produced by the Rx is determined by the System Reference
being used. If the Rx is locked to an SDI or SFP Fiber input, while jitter measurements are being
made, then the measured jitter will include the Rx chassis’s own input locking jitter plus SDI
output jitter. This mode of operation may produce out of specification jitter.
Free Run should be used when using Analyzer / Generator modules to perform closed-loop testing,especially if Eye and Jitter measurements are being made.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-17

Audio Group Menu
The Rx instrument with a Generator Module installed can embed an audio signal on all 16 embedded
audio outputs. The Audio Group 1-4 and 5-8 menus control which audio channels, pairs or groups
have test tones applied and the type of tone.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Audio Group 1/2 menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Generator button.

Group nEach of the four groups may be separately enabled. When enabled, the source and level of eachchannel in a pair can be selected.

SourceThe source for each channel may be set to any of the following:
Silence
Digital silence at −144 dB with 24 bit
Fixed tone
A range of fixed frequencies from 100 Hz up to 20 kHz
Variable tone
Where the frequency can be set in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz to 23.99 kHz)NoiseWhite noise
A/V Delay
Provides a 1 kHz pulse tone centered about the clapper board animation of the AV Delay
Test pattern
AES InRouting the audio from the CPU AES input if present.
DolbyGen
If the Dolby Generation option has been purchased, the source may be set to DolbyGen at
which time the other channel in the audio pair is also set to DolbyGen and gain control

Page 2-18

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualdisabled. The generated Dolby metadata is defined in the System - Dolby Generator
menu.
DolbyDecode1
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the decoded Dolby audio channels Dolby-1 to
Dolby-8 from Decoder 1.
DolbyDecode2
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the decoded Dolby audio channels Dolby-1 to
Dolby-8 from Decoder 2.
AES
If a 4AES module is installed together with a Generator module then the AES audio fromthe AES module can be routed to the Generator module SDI output. The specific 4AES
module input channels can be selected from the source dropdown list in the form A-L
where A indicates input AES Input A and L indicates the left channel.

Inv
This checkbox phase-inverts the audio signal to allow checking of third-party audio mixing.

Link
his links the left and right channels of a pair so that changing the level on the left-hand channelchanges the level on the right-hand channel.

Master
The master level sets the 0 dB level for all the embedded audio channels. Using the dropdown menu,
the user can select an integer value between −18 and −24 dBFS. This feature allows all embedded
outputs to be adjusted together as well as giving a simple method to change from −18dB to −24dB
based standard levels.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-19

Dolby (Dolby Metadata Generator Option)

The Dolby Metadata Generator software option allows generation of Dolby-E, Dolby Digital and Dolby
Digital Plus pre-encoded test signals to check that they are transferred transparently through thebroadcast chain unaffected by routers / switchers, satellite links, etc.
Note: With this software version Dolby E can be embedded within 50, 59.94 and 60 frames per
second progressive video formats but this mode of working has not been supported by Dolby
since 2008. This mode of operation of Dolby Generator is only provided to support legacy Dolby
equipment produced prior to 2008.
For high progressive frame rates an external locking reference must be used.

Note: With this software version, non-keyed signals are generated which may be incompatible
with certain VTRs.

Overview
There are a number of Dolby broadcast digital audio standards that transport audio data over an
SMPTE 337M AES carrier with a 48 kHz sample rate. The type of Dolby to be generated can beselected from the dropdown list in the top left corner of the menu:l

Dolby El

Dolby Digitall

Dolby Digital Plus

These standards can be used to transport mono, stereo, 5.1 and 7.1 audio programs:
Dolby 5.1
Involves five channels for normal-range speakers (20 Hz – 20,000 Hz) (right front, center,left front, rear right, rear left) and one channel (20 Hz – 120 Hz allotted audio) for the subwoofer driven low-frequency effects.
Dolby 7.1

Page 2-20

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualUses six channels in the primary program (Independent Substream) for a standard 5.1 surround sound mix and then the 2 remaining 2 channels in an ancillary program (Dependent
Substream) to provide the additional down-mix.

Dolby E
Dolby E is an audio encoding and decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that allows
up to eight channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1 or 7.1) that for a primary program (Programme 1) andoptional ancillary programs. These eight channels are compressed (loss-less) into a digital stream thatcan be transferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a ‘perceptual audio’ system for digital audio that allows the reduction of dataneeds to deliver high-quality sound. This system was developed primarily for DTV, DVD and HDTV.
This format allow up to six channels of sound (mono, stereo or 5.1) in the form of a single ‘program’that can be delivered at different bit rates. These 6 channels are compressed (lossy) into a digital
stream that can be broadcast. The most elaborate mode in common use is Dolby 5.1 with uses all six
channels to provide surround sound.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus (E-AC-3) is a more advanced version of Dolby Digital that provides a more efficientencoding algorithm that provide enough bandwidth that allows up to 20 channels of audio (mono,
stereo, 5.1, 7.1 up to 13.1) that for a primary program (Programme 1) and optional ancillary programs thatcan be delivered at much lower bit rates than Dolby Digital. These 20 channels are compressed(lossy) into an independent digital datastream plus up to eight dependent sub-streams that can betransferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Dolby E Synchronization - Generator Reference
The Dolby audio test signal produced by the Rx instrument is common to all generator modules within
the system and is locked to either one of the generator video formats or to the System Reference(typically external reference).
If the Dolby Generator is locked to an external signal, the reference signal MUST have a compatible
frame rate. See the table below for examples.
Video Output Format

Valid Reference Formats

1080i501080i50, 625i50(PAL)

1080i591080i59, 525i59(NTSC)

1080p251080p25, 1080i50, 625i50(PAL)

1080p291080p29, 1080i59, 525i59(NTSC)

720p501080p25, 720p25, 1080i50, 625i50(PAL) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

720p591080p29, 720p29, 1080i59, 525i59(NTSC) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

1080p501080p25, 720p25, 1080i50, 625i50(PAL) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

1080p591080p29, 720p29, 1080i59, 525i59(NTSC) – due to length of packet being
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-21

Video Output Format

Valid Reference Formats
over one frame longNote: For high frame-rate progressive video formats being generated, the Rx chassis must havea compatible frame-rate locking reference and the Dolby Generator must be set to External
Reference.

Editing Program Information
Stream type:
Dolby-E, Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus streams can be generated.
Config, Bit Depth:
The program configuration and Bit Depth can be changed to load the pre-encoded file.
Stream contents:
The tones generated are of a fixed predefined frequency. Four sets of pre-encoded
streams are provided:
Ramp Var:
Each channel has a different frequency to allow checking of channels. The
levels are ramped so that different channels have different levels.
−3dB Fixed:
All the tones are at −3dB co-phased / timed and are at the same frequency.
−18dB Fixed
All the tones are at −3dB co-phased / timed and are at the same frequency.
−20dB Fixed
All the tones are at −3dB co-phased / timed and are at the same frequency.
Fixed Frequency values for Fixed level streams above:
Frame Rate

Normal Frequency

LFE Frequency

23.98

4.8 kHz211 Hz24

6 kHz

240 Hz25 / 50

6 kHz

240 Hz29.97 / 59.84

6 kHz

133 Hz30 / 60

6 kHz

240 Hz

Dolby-E start line:
The start line can be used to set valid or invalid ranges to allow checking of the Dolby-E
guard band on downstream equipment. If the start line is set outside the valid range specified by Dolby, the line number will be displayed in red font.
Relative to Ideal:
If this checkbox is checked, the line number displayed is relative to the Dolby specified
ideal line. A value of 0, therefore, starts the Dolby-E packet on the Ideal Line for that video
format.

Page 2-22

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualFrame Rate:
This is set by default to the currently generated frame rate but may be modified by the user
to test downstream equipment.
Original Rate:
This is set by default to the currently generated frame rate but may be modified by the user
to test downstream equipment.
Note: When generating a progressive fast rate video standard such as 720p50, 720p59 or
720p60 etc., the Dolby-E signal will always be generated at the related slower rate. This is a
Dolby restriction as the packets are over one frame in length for these video formats.

Program Metadata Editing
Many of the metadata fields may be edited to test downstream equipment. The Channel Mode field
may be edited to invalid settings but they will be shown in RED to show that they are invalid. The
settings currently being edited are for the selected program but multiple program metadata values
can be modified and the settings for all programs are stored in memories.
Metadata changes and line changes will happen cleanly so that no corruption to the Dolby signal will
occur.
A maximum of 30 characters may be used for program description text. If the text is longer than this,extra characters will be ignored.
The Generator → Dolby menu allows the metadata for a Dolby E datastream to be setup for testing
purposes. The main purpose of setting these metadata fields is to check that they are transferredtransparently through the broadcast chain unaffected by routers/switchers, satellite links, etc. For any
program this metadata would be created as part of Dolby E authoring process. Using the Dolby
generator, the following metadata can be setup for Program 1:
Dialogue Norm:
The standard audio level for dialog.
BsMod:(Bitstream Mode) indicates the type of audio service that the bitstream contains. Complete
Main (CM) is the normal mode of operation and contains a complete audio program including dialog, music, and effects.
Ctr DnMix:(Center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Sur DnMix:(Surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LRoCtrDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LRoSurDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding anddecoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LR CtrDnMix:(Left, right, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-23

LR SurDnMix:(Left, right, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Chan Mode:
Defines the channel configuration for Program 1 (i.e., mono, stereo, 5.1 channels).
Line Mode
An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down¬mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
RFMode:An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
Room Type:
This informational parameter indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used forthe final audio mixing session.
MixLevel:
The Surround Down mix Level parameter indicates the nominal Lo/Ro down mix level ofthe Surround channel(s) with respect to the Left and Right channels
DolbySurnd:
The Dolby Surround Mode parameter indicates whether a two-channel Dolby Digital bitstream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program.
DownMixMod:
This controls the Down Mix Mode, used by the content creator, to optimize Center and Surround channel levels for use in stereo down mix mode for any two-channel programs.
D Sur Ex:This controls the Dolby Surround Ex channel that provides an extra audio channel for
Dolby 5.1. The extra surround channel of the Dolby Surround Ex system is matrix-encoded
onto the discrete left-surround and right-surround channels of the 5.1 mix. The following
control bits can also be set:
LFE
The LFE Channel parameter enables or disables the Low-Frequency Effects (LFE) channel.
HPF
This parameter can be used to activate the DC High pass filter for all input channels.
LPF
The LFE Low Pass Filter parameter can be used to activate a 120 Hz low-pass filter applied
to the LFE input channel.
Sur 3dB Alt
The Surround Channel 3 dB Attenuation function is used to apply a 3 dB attenuation to the
Surround channels of a multichannel soundtrack created in a room with film style calibration, when encoding it for consumer home theater playback.
Sur Ph+Filter

Page 2-24

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Surround Channel 90-Degree Phase-Shift feature is used for generating multichannel
Dolby Digital bitstreams that can be down-mixed in an external two channel decoder to create a true Dolby Surround compatible output.
Org Stream
The Original Bitstream informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the
Dolby Digital bitstream. This bit has a value of 1 (box checked) if the bitstream is an original.
If it is a copy of an original bitstream, it has a value of 0.
Copyright
The Copyright Bit informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the Dolby
Digital bitstream. If this bit has a value of 1 (box checked), the information in the bitstream isindicated as protected by copyright. If it has a value of 0, it is not copyright protected.
RF Ov Prot.
The RF Over-modulation Protection parameter determines whether an RF pre-emphasis filter is used in the overload protection algorithm to prevent RF over-modulation in set-top
box decoders.

Default Program Metadata
Pressing the Default button will return program metadata settings to their default values.

Embedding Dolby on SDI Stream
To embed Dolby signals on an SDI stream, the Audio source for that channel should be set to Dolby.
These source selections are found on the Generator – Audio Group 1, 2, 3, 4 pages. Selecting one
channel of an audio pair to Dolby will force the other channel in the pair also to select Dolby. As the
Dolby streams are data, the volume and phase controls are disabled. Changing a channel from Dolby
to another source will cause the other channel in the pair to select silence.

Embedding Dolby Signals on AES Stream
To embed Dolby signals on the AES output, the Audio source for the AES output should be set to
DolbyGen.
This selection is found on the right-hand side of the Generator → Audio Group 1, 2, 3, 4 pages.
Note: If DolbyGen is selected as the Source for any AES output, the Dolby Generator in the
System menu needs to be set to External reference otherwise the Dolby audio packet may not
be embedded into the AES stream in the correct place.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-25

Analyzer Menus
Overview
The RX instrument signal analyzer displays the selected video input. On the HDMI® monitor output,
the source input for the analyzer is selected from the top right corner on the instrument panel. On the
Rx 2000 front panel, the source for the analyzer is set by the field at the bottom right of the page. The
current line and sample are the same for all pages of the analyzer and therefore when selecting asample on the Signal Data page, the cursor will show where that is on the Full Picture page.
The different types of analyzer can be displayed on the front panel of the Rx 2000 instrument and as
window panels on the HDMI® monitor output.

Page 2-26

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualPicture
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can display the selected input in the form of apicture monitor.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Picture menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Analyzer button.
The picture displayed is down-converted from the video source. The Picture view will automaticallypresent the vertical blanking area when the picture cursor is positioned there.
The following parameters are available in the sidebar menu:

Safe Area Generator
The Picture instrument includes 4 independent safe area generators that can be selected for Safe
Action Area-1, Safe Title Area-1, Safe Action Area-2 and Safe Title Area-2. Selecting the arrow to
the right of the Safe Area checkbox allows the required safe areas to be setup and selected.

Closed Caption / Subtitle Display
If the closed caption option is installed, the Caption Options menu allows the selection of WST,
OP42, OP47, EIA 608 and EIA 708 subtitles. The corresponding closed caption can be selected fromthe Closed Caption setup menu by to the right of the Caption checkbox.

The Show checkbox, when enabled, displays the chosen closed caption type on the image.
ll

The Auto Reset checkbox is for test purposes.
The 608 Channel numeric value allows the specific 608 closed caption channel to be selected.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-27

l

The 708 Service numeric value allows the specific 708 service to be selected.

l

The WST Page value allows the appropriate World Subtitle page to be selected.

Timecode Display
ANC time code can be displayed in the active picture area when turned on. Selecting the arrow to theright of the Time Code field allows this window to be displayed in three different positions and sizes.

Mono
Switches the Picture display to monochrome for improved visualization of the gamut validation errors.
Toggle the checkbox to return to full color.

Line, Sample and Field Selection
Line:
Specify the current line for analysis.
Sample:Specify the current sample for analysis.
Field:(For interlaced formats only) This control selects the field for analysis. If the current line is in
Field 1, changing the field will change to the same line in Field 2. The field number willchange accordingly.

Name
When selected, displays the name of the active, source interface of the video signal in the top-leftcorner of the image.

A/V Delay
When selected, displays the A/V Delay overlayin the top-right of the image. In addition, provides
access to the A/V Delay Analysis setup dialog.

Aspect Ratio
The aspect ratio of PAL (625 lines) may be set to either 4:3 or 16:9 as required for the source signal.
HD signals are always set to an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Picture Cursor and Zoom
Enabling the Cursor checkbox makes the picture cursor position (Line and Sample) visible in the
picture window. Selecting anywhere on the active picture or VANC region will place a visible
crosshair at that position and update the analyzed Line and Sample fields in the Picture instrument.
From the Rx 2000 front panel, with the Cursor checkbox is enabled, if the red focus box is moved tothe picture window and OK is pressed, the cursor may be used to scroll around the window. Press OK
again to cancel this mode. When in zoom mode, the cursor is always in the center of the window andthe picture scrolls behind it.
The picture cursor is common to the Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope (line only), and Data View
instruments. So updating its position (Line or Sample) in one instrument will automatically update it
across them all. A line of interest can analyzed in Waveform and Vectorscope in single line mode
(when the ‘All’ checkbox is disabled.)

Page 2-28

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualMoving the cursor into the VANC region reveals any ancillary data present there as if it were picture
data. The specific packet data words present can be inspected closely with the SDI data option
toolset (PHRXO-DATA).

If the picture window is focused (that is, when displaying a red boundary) and the current tab button ispressed again to enter full-screen mode, the cursors may be moved by pressing the OK button again.
Note: The standard cursor menu keys may be used but are not visible. Press OK again to cancel
cursor adjustment mode.

Frame Grab
Each Analyzer module allows a video clip to be captured for analysis and playback. The video clip
contains the full SDI data frame including video data, metadata and audio data. The video clip can berecorded manually or can be triggered by different events such as EDH and CRC errors. When Frame
Grab record mode is selected a rolling record buffer (holding approximately 70 SD frames or 13 HD
frames) is started so that the full SDI data frames before and after the trigger point are available foranalysis. When a trigger is received the record buffer is frozen to provide a video clip.
Once a video clip has been captured it can be played-back and navigated frame by frame using thetransport controls within the image are of the Picture instrument. The Rx instruments can be used toanalyze the SDI data frame by frame to display errors at the trigger point and the status of the SDI
frames before and after the trigger point.
The captured video clip can be saved for future reference and previously saved clips can berestored.
To capture a video clip manually, select the record button to start the record buffer (RECORDING) andthen press the T button to stop the record buffer (CAPTURED).
To capture a video clip from a trigger event, setup the event to be captured in the setup menu, press
the record button to start the record buffer (RECORDING). As soon as the trigger event has occurred,
CAPTURED is displayed to indicate that event has been captured as a video clip. The play, step
forward and step backward buttons can then be used to navigate through the SDI data frames.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-29

The Frame Grab controls are displayed is by selecting the Grab checkbox in the Picture instrument
menu.
The arrow box to the right of the Grab checkbox is used to setup triggers and save video clipslManual trigger for video clip capture ( T )lStart record buffer ( ● )lStep backward through the captured video clip frame-by-frame ( < )lStop playing the captured video clip ( ■ )lStep forward through the captured video clip frame by frame ( > )lPlay the captured video clip repeatedly ( ►).

The text box to the right of the transport controls displays the current status of the record buffer:l

BUFFERING - indicates that the record buffer is filling up.

lRECORDING – indicates that the record buffer is actively recording the SDI datastream.

l

CAPTURED - indicates that a video clip has been capturedl

PLAYING – indicates that the current contents is being played as a video clipl

Page 2-30

13/13 (T:7) – indicates the current frame/total number of frames and the trigger frame number.
This text will turn red when the currently displayed frame is the trigger frame.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSelecting the arrow box to the right of the Grab checkbox in the Picture menu will display the Frame
Grab setup menu.
In the Setup menu, the Frame Grab Triggers section allows the events that trigger the video clip
capture to be selected.
l

EDH AP – will trigger when the SD-SDI Error Data Handling Active Picture flag status changes.

l

EDH FF - will trigger when the SD-SDI Error Data Handling Full Field flag status changes.

l

CRC Y1 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 1 luminance data is set.

l

CRC C1 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 1 chrominance data is set.

l

CRC Y2 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 2 luminance data is set.

l

CRC C2 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 2 chrominance data is set.

l

CRC AP1 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 1 active picture changes.

l

CRC AP2 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 2 active picture changes.

l

ANC Y1 – will trigger when the link 1 luminance ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

l

ANC C1 – will trigger when the link 1 chrominance ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

l

ANC Y2 – will trigger when the link 2 luminance ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

l

ANC C2 – will trigger when the link 2 chroma ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

The Pos value is used to position the trigger point in the required position within the rolling record
buffer to select the proportion of frames before and after the trigger point.
The Control section of the setup menu is a repeat of the transport controls available in the Picture
instruments.
The File section of the setup menu allows the current video clip in the record buffer to be saved theRx file system (\FCAP folder) and allows previously saved video clips to be restored into the record
buffer.
Save:
Saves the current video clip in the record buffer in the \FCAP folder using the nameentered in the text box to the right of the Save button. The Single checkbox, if enabled, willcause on the current frame of the video clip to be saved.
Load
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-31

Allows a previously saved video clip to be restored to the record buffer. The dropdown list
to the right of the Load buttons allows the required video clip to be selected. As video clips
are selected in this list, their details will be displayed at the bottom of the menu.
DeleteAllows the currently selected video clip in the dropdown list to be deleted.
The current progress of the Save or Load operation is displayed in the Progress thermometer.
Note: Video clips can be exported and imported using the USB copy menu.

Page 2-32

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAnalyzer Gamut Monitor
The Rx Instrument, with an Analyzer Module installed, can monitor the selected input for the presenceof gamut violations in the Picture monitor, when Gamut monitoring is enabled in the Gamut
instrument. Areas of the picture, where the Gamut exceeds the configured threshold, can behighlighted on the Picture display using a selectable Zebra Bars overlay.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Gamut menu can be displayed by selecting Analyzer then Gamut
button. This will open a new window panel displaying the Gamut meters, color component levels andany error counts.
Note: Gamut monitoring can be enabled only for the latest variants of the A/AE or AG/AGE
interface cards. After upgrading to version 9.09, if you notice that the previous Gamut features
are unavailable and you have no access to the Gamut instrument described in this section, either
revert to the previous version or contact PHABRIX Support for information on upgrading theAnalyzer interface board.
The Gamut monitor provides gamut bars (or meters) for both the YCbCr and RGB color spaces, which
operate on 444 sampled pixel data regardless of the video standard. The gamut bars are based on
the analysis of unfiltered 444 RGB and YCbCr pixel data and indicate the maximum and minimum
values detected in the active picture over the period of one frame or field.
A Gamut Error (Err) Mode can be selected from either the EBU R103, Legal or Custom modes. The
Legal mode monitors the gamut limits according to SMPTE Narrow Range definitions.
Gamut meter bars are colored as follows:lllGreen: Gamut measurement lies within SMPTE narrow range levels (standard SDI range 64940 (GBRY), 64-960 (CbCr))
Yellow: Gamut measurements exceed SMPTE narrow range but lie within the EBU R103 control
range
Red: Gamut measurements exceed the EBU R103, Legal and / or Custom control range and are
in error.

The active green gamut meter bars have been selected (either by Gamut mode default (R103 or
Legal) or in a Custom setup) to contribute to the gamut error counts displayed in the Errors section of
the instrument. If a Gamut bar is deselected in the Setup dialog, then it is displayed in gray with theyellow and red areas still present and active. The red and yellow areas at the top or bottom of a
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-33

Gamut Bar informs the operator that gamut errors are occurring for that color component but are notbeing included in the error reports.
Zebra Bars can be enabled to overlay selectable cross-hatching patterns onto the Picture image tohighlight areas in violation of the gamut thresholds.
When gamut violations are detected, errors are displayed as a percentage of the picture in error(Percent), the number of pixels in error (Pixels) and a cumulative Count of detected frames or fields inerror. A Reset button enables the reported errors and elapsed monitoring time to be cleared back to
zero.
Note: On starting the Gamut instrument, if the video signal is not immediately registered by the
gamut bars, toggle the Gamut Err Enable checkbox to display the signal.
Gamut measurements are color-coded as follows:lGamut GBR and YCbCr minimum / maximum values: Always Whitel

Gamut error reports for Percent, Pixels and total Count:lGamut in error (Percent, Pixels, Count): Redl

Following reset: White

The following parameters are available in the sidebar menu to change the gamut monitoring
configuration:

Gamut Error (Err) Mode
Note: As a result of possible mathematical limitations in the conversion from YCbCr 422 to RGB
444 it is not recommended to use the RGB Gamut meters to monitor for exact values in a YCbCR
422 input.
Select one of the following Gamut error monitoring modes:
l

R103

l

Legal

l

CustomFor R103 Gamut Error Mode, the processor provides picture gamut error detection using the default
settings outlined in EBU Technical Recommendation R103. In this mode the video data for the RGB
and Y components are monitored for levels less than −5% and greater than +105%. Each of themonitored channels (Y, R, G, B) may have a low-pass filter inserted with the filter coefficients: 1/16, 2/16,
3/16, 4/16, 3/16, 2/16, 1/16 per component as required by R103. The resultant filtered gamut error bits Y,
R, G, B, are combined to create a single pixel error indicator.
Note: EBU R103 recommended filtering is applied horizontally but not vertically.
For Legal Gamut Error Mode, the processor provides picture gamut error detection using the default
settings within SMPTE narrow range. A low-pass filter is not available, by default, for this mode.
The Custom Gamut Error Mode becomes active when any of the default settings for either R103 or
Legal modes are changed in the Gamut setup dialog. The Custom setup persists until another change
is made. Custom modes can also be saved as Presets. For more information, see the section Gamut
Custom Mode.
For all Gamut Error Modes, the ratio of the number of pixels in error compared to the total number ofactive pixels in the monitored video standard is computed per video frame or field and is displayed asPage 2-34

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manuala percentage in the GUI. Frames containing errors above the configured percentage threshold(Pixels % in the Setup dialog) are considered in error and are logged when Gamut Logging is enabledin the Setup dialog.
An error Count accumulates the number of frames (progressive) or fields (interlaced) in error since thelast reset. The Count is displayed in red font if more than one frame or field is identified as containing
gamut error .
If the percentage of pixels in error exceeds a threshold, then the video frame is considered to have aVideo Frame Gamut Error. These errors can be logged in the Event Log when Gamut Logging isenabled in the Gamut Setup dialog. These errors can be logged in the Event Log when Gamut
Logging is enabled in the Gamut Setup dialog.To summarize:lA frame error is logged if the percentage of pixels in error exceeds the threshold default value,the EBU R103 alarm threshold at which 1% of the active image is in error.

The Gamut monitor runs continuously, once enabled, and can be reset.
See the section Gamut Setup for information on configuring the Gamut bars.

Zebra Bars Mode
A Zebra overlay generator provides a layer for all gamut modes, which can be superimposed on topof the Picture window to highlight areas of gamut error. The overlay may be configured either tofollow the R103 pixel error detector (YGBR) the Legal pixel error detector (YCbCrGBR) or any
combination of the individual component pixel error processors in Custom mode. The Zebra Bars
Mode indicator displays the current gamut component being monitored. For example, in R103 mode,
it will display YGBR, or, if using the Custom mode, with Zebra bars active only on the R component,
then Zebra Bars Mode will display R.
An additional monochrome setting for video is provided to enhance the visibility of the zebra overlay.
Monochrome mode can be useful to spot a single pixel that might be in error, for example, there may
be a faulty pixel on the camera sensor. The Zebra Red/Black overlay works well to highlight gamut
errors when the image is set to monochrome display. Zebra visibility and monochrome settings arealso part of the picture window configuration.
The Zebra Bars settings are as follows:l

Zebra Display: Enabled or disabledlZebra Type: White/Black, White/Dim, Red/Black, Red/Dim.

The following image shows the use of different zebra mode overlays on a video input to the Picture
window.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-35

Page 2-36

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGamut Errors Display
Gamut errors are displayed if the YCbCr or RGB levels exceed the following thresholds for the various
selectable scales:
Gamut Monitoring Mode R103:
Scale:

Decimal

%IRE

Hex

mV

R103

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Y

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

Cb

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

Cr

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

G

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

B

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

R

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

Gamut Monitoring Mode Legal:
Scale:

Decimal

%IRE

Hex

mV

Legal

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Y

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

Cb

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

Cr

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

G

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

B

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

R

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

If the Picture cursor is used to select an out-of-gamut area, the corresponding line and pixel can bedisplayed on the Waveform monitor and Data View to measure the value.
The Gamut Error counters to the right of the Gamut meters show the cumulative Gamut errors
detected since the last reset as follows:lPercent: Shows the percentage of pixels in errorlPixels: Shows the total number of pixels in errorlCount: Shows the total cumulative count of frames in error.

When Reset, all error counters and the elapsed time are set back to zero and restarted.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-37

Gamut Setup
The Gamut Setup menu enables the following items to be configured:lInclude or exclude Gamut meter bars from the error count.
When an Error checkbox is selected corresponding to a color component, the corresponding
gamut meter bar will turn green and will contribute towards the error count. Where thecorresponding Error checkbox is not selected, the gamut meter bar is displayed in gray anddoes not contribute towards the error count. Any gamut errors occurring when the component
is not included in the error count are displayed at the top or bottom of the bar in red or yellow
to alert the operator.

l

Low pass filter (LPF) activated or disabledlMetering scales (decimal, percent IRE, hexadecimal, mV)lCustom setuplFine-tuning of error recording and zebra grid component selectionlGamut logging.

Note: When entering a percentage, remember that the value entered is divided by ten to display
the final percentage, so to enter 0.1% enter 10, or to enter 10%, enter 100, etc. It is also
recommended to press Clear ALL to delete the previous entry before entering a new value.
The following figure shows the Gamut setup dialog and resulting configuration for the various gamut
modes:

Page 2-38

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGamut Check Configuration
Note: If you change any of the Gamut settings while in either R103 or Legal monitoring mode, themode will switch immediately to Custom mode, which you can save as a preset.
Use the Gamut Check section of the Setup dialog to:lCreate a customized Gamut monitoring mode by changing the default monitoring ranges for R,
G, B, Y, Cb and Cr.

l

Change the default error recording from the various meters.

lChange the default signal to which the zebra overlay is applied.

lSelect a different scale for the Gamut meters: decimal, %IRE, hex, or mV.

lActivate or deactivate a low pass filter (LPF).

When selecting or deselecting the Error or Zebra checkboxes, selecting an Error checkbox enables
the counting of errors for the corresponding color component. Selecting a Zebra checkbox enables
the display of Zebra Bars for the corresponding color component in the Picture instrument.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-39

Gamut Custom ModeIf you change any of the default settings for either R103 or Legal Gamut monitoring modes, the unit
automatically switches to Custom mode. It is possible to modify the monitored ranges, the LPF, typeof errors recorded, and the color components to which zebra bar overlays are applied.
Note: If the LPF checkbox is deselected, gamut monitoring may not report pixels in error, evenwhen the gamut bars show that some pixels fall outside the range of expected values for thecurrent frame.
When you select a custom setting, the Custom values that are selected will persist, enabling theoperator to switch from Custom mode back to R103 and / or Legal mode and then return to Custom
mode with the same settings. If, however, a Custom mode is defined and the operator switches tomode R103, for example, and makes a configuration change, this setting becomes the new Custom
mode setting and the previous Custom mode is replaced, unless saved as a Preset.

Gamut Logging
Logging of Gamut errors is enabled by selecting the Enable checkbox in the Setup dialog.
All Gamut errors are reset to zero when the Reset button in the Gamut Monitoring window is clicked.
When logging is active, this logs a Gamut Reset event in the logfile.
The percentage of pixels in error can be set in the Pixels % field so that Gamut errors are logged only
when this threshold is exceeded.
When there is a change to the gamut setup but no gamut errors are recorded, an information entry isadded to the gamut log:
i 14:39:12 03-10-2023 SDI1 Gamut OK: YGBR 1080p25 0.0%(0) ( <= 0.1% )When the Pixels % threshold is exceeded and logging is enabled, a Gamut Error is logged as follows(error recorded In R103 Mode):
E 14:39:12 03-10-2023 SDI1 Gamut Error: YGBR 1080p25 2.7%(56954) ( > 1.0% )The log entries can be interpreted as follows:li- Information eventl

E - Error eventl

14:39:12 - Time event occurredl

03-10-2023 - Date event occurredl

SDI1 - SDI input namel

YGBR 1080p25 - Active color components and standard when the error occurred. For R103
Mode, the monitored color components are Y and GBR. For Legal mode all color components
are monitored, so YCbCrGBR would be logged.

l

0.3% - Percentage of total pixels in error.

l(56954) - Number of pixels in error when the event was logged.

l( > 1.0%) - Error logging initiated as the percentage of gamut errors has exceeded the configured gamut threshold for that gamut error mode.

A Gamut Reset information event is logged when the gamut Reset button is pressed.

Page 2-40

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualData View
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed and SDI analysis option can display the selected
input in the form of a data array.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Data View menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Analyzer button.
This page shows the video signal as a datastream in several formats as described below. In eachmode, the data may be displayed in hexadecimal, decimal or binary formats. In each mode, the data
may be displayed in hexadecimal, decimal or binary formats. The binary format is not available in gridmode. The data may also be displayed as 10-bit or 8-bit format.
Note: The line number of a line of video changes at the end of active video. This has the effectthat the line number for pixels in horizontal blanking is the same as the line number for the active
picture after that line.

Type
Grid:
In this mode the data is shown in an X-Y format with lines and samples at the same time,
providing a representation of the picture in data format. If the cursor keys are used to
select the grid window and OK pressed, the cursor keys will scroll around the window. The
luma (Y) channel is shown in white whilst the Cr and Cb channels are shown in with a red or
blue tint respectivelyStrm:
One of three modes for displaying the samples on the current line only. The cursor keys
may be used to scroll the sample number when OK has been pressed. The info column
shows the type of data being displayed.
l AP - Active picturel VBL - Vertical blankingl HBL - Horizontal blanking
Comp:
Similar to the Strm mode above but in a component mode with Cr and Cb in different
columns. See Strm mode above for a description of the info column.
Split:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-41

Shows the two streams split into four parts to show Y, Y’, Cr and Cb in separate columns.
See Strm mode above for a description of the info column.
Note: When in Color modes other than YCbCr 422 10 bit, the pixel RGB or YCbCr values arepacked into 10 bit values across the different streams and thus will give unfamiliar values. When
the UnPack checkbox is checked the values in the active picture are unpacked to RGB or YCbCr
values.

Page 2-42

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualWaveform Monitor
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can display the selected input in the form of a
waveform monitor.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Waveform Monitor menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Analyzer button.

Waveform TypeThe waveform display format is set using the Setup button. The waveform monitor displays theselected signal in one of the following formats as set by the Mode control:
YCbCr:The Y, Cr and Cb waveforms are shown as three separate waveforms in a Parade format.
Y:
Only the luminance channel is shown.
Cb:
Only the blue chroma channel is shown.
Cr:
Only the red chroma channel is shown.
GBR:
The Green, Blue and Red waveforms are shown as three separate waveforms in a Parade
format.
Red:
Only the red channel is shown.
Green:
Only the green channel is shown.
Blue:
Only the blue channel is shown.
RGB:
The Red, Green and Blue waveforms are shown as three separate waveforms in a Parade
format.
RGBOvr:PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-43

The Red, Green and Blue waveforms are shown overlaid on the same waveform.
YCCOvr:
The Luminance, Cr and Cb waveforms are shown overlaid on the same waveform.

Waveform Scale
The next two controls show the vertical and horizontal magnifications. If either value is set to a value
other than x1, a vertical or horizontal offset will be shown on the bottom right edge of the waveform
display. The offsets are set by moving the focus cursor to the waveform window and pressing OK.
The menu keys can then be used to scroll around the window. The offset will be the same for all
magnifications values so switching between x1 and x5 will not lose the offset used in x5 mode.
The vertical offset values are in signal level bits but displayed in the current scale units so switching
between scales will keep the same offsets.

All, Line and Sample
The display may be restricted to a single line or all lines may be displayed at the same time.
The line, sample and field controls all track the related controls on other pages.
In active picture mode, the All checkbox is enabled, and waveform monitor displays the content of
the active picture (all active picture lines, overlaid on each other).
In single line mode, the All checkbox is disabled, and the waveform monitor displays a single active
picture line or VANC region line.

Setup Button Dialog

The Waveform Setup menu allows the vertical and horizontal scale of the waveform display to be
setup.
Active Picture:
If checked, only active picture is displayed for picture view and waveform monitor, all other
VBI data such as TRS words ANC data and audio is blanked. This control tracks the state of
the ActPix control on the Picture.
Vertical Scale:
The axes and measurements for the waveform monitor can be displayed either in percentages or in hex or decimal values as required.
Horizontal Scale:
The timing measurements may be set in either pixels or micro-seconds (μs)

Cursors
Various cursor modes are available on the Waveform monitor:
Pict:
This makes the picture cursor visible. The picture cursor can be moved as required.
Ampl

Page 2-44

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Amplitude cursor allows the level between 2 different levels (Cursor C and Cursor D)
to be measured.
Time:
The Time cursors allow the difference between to points (Cursor A and Cursor B) to bemeasured.
Both:This allows both the Amplitude and Time cursors to be selected at the same time.

With the Time cursor selected, then selecting the Timing Cursor button will switch between Cursor A
and Cursor B.
Using the Left and Right cursor buttons will move the currently selected cursor left or right. The
position will be displayed on the waveform and the time in pixels or microseconds.
The difference between the Cursor A and Cursor B will be also be displayed.
Holding down the x10 and x100 buttons while pressing the Up and Down cursor buttons increases
the speed of the cursor.
With the Ampl (Amplitude) cursor, then selecting the Amplitude Cursor button will switch between
Cursor C and Cursor D. The difference between the Cursor C and Cursor D will be also be displayed.
Using the Up and Down cursor buttons will move the currently selected cursor up or down. The
position of the amplitude cursors will be displayed on the screen either as a percentage or in
millivolts.
Holding down the x10 and x100 buttons while pressing the Up and Down cursor buttons increases
the speed of the cursor.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-45

Vectorscope
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can display the selected input in the form of avectorscope.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Vectorscope menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Analyzer button.
The display graticule may be set to show either the 100% bar positions or 75% positions. The color bar
position boxes will change according to the color space for the current input video standard.
Line:
Allows a specific video line to be displayed. This is useful when test patterns are transmitted as part of a program on specific video lines.
All:
The All checkbox forces the waveform monitor to display all lines, overlaid on each other.
When unselected, the specified line is displayed.
Field:The Fld 1 and Fld 2 modes allow specific video fields to be displayed.
Zoom:
Allows the vectorscope display to be zoomed-in to the Center, Cyan, Yellow, Green,
Magenta, Red or Blue positions at x1, x2, x5 or x10 magnifications.
100%/75%:
Selects the graticule scale to match the color bars being analyzed.
Gain:
When Zoom is set to x1, this function enables you to set the gain of the vectorscope display
to x2. If Zoom is set to anything other than x1, the Gain control is grayed-out.

Page 2-46

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualEye and Jitter
Overview
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Eye Module installed can display the selected input in the form ofan Eye Pattern. This allows the jitter of the selected input video signal to be monitored using an Eye
Pattern display.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Eye menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Analyzer button.
The term Eye Pattern is given to the measurement of SDI clock jitter display that forms the shape of aneye resulting from the two superimposed clock cycles. The open eye is displayed when monitoring ajitter free SDI signal and the eye closes increasingly with the severity of the jitter.

The Eye Pattern is formed by sampling the SDI signal at specific points in a progressive manner anddisplaying each sample taken on a persistent screen until the waveform is complete.

Causes of Jitter
Jitter can be caused by a range of different things and the artefacts displayed in the Eye waveform
are typically due to combinations of these at different frequencies and amplitudes:lllTransmission jitter caused by the equipment generating the video signal. This could include
clock phase jitter, amplitude jitter and wander.
Receiver phase lock loop errors in equipment decoding an SDI datastream. For example, whenvideo sources are switched and the circuitry of the equipment need time to establish phaselock or when the signal is distorted by long cable lengths.
Data dependent jitter due to the actual data content that, even after randomization, that contains sequences of zeros long enough for the clock regeneration to loose phase lock.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-47

l

l

l

Thermal and Shot Noise caused by the integrated circuits used within equipment. Integrated
Circuits can contain 10s of thousands of discrete transistors that can all cause random errors,
increasing in number as the temperature of the equipment rises.
Electromagnetic interference in Long cable lengths that may be susceptible to interference
from the power grid and from power switching.
Distorted waveform shape, created by equipment, by long cable runs, by poorly terminated,
un-equalized cables, poor cable frequency response of or poor return-loss.

Problems occur when these errors cause a level of jitter outside the specified acceptable parameters.
The different types of jitter are classified as follows:
Timing Jitter:
Refers to a short-term time interval error above a low frequency threshold of 10 Hz (asdefined in the SMPTE standards for SDI signals).
Alignment Jitter
Refers to artefacts above the specified threshold frequencies of (1 kHz for SD-SDI signals
and 100 kHz for HD-SDI signals). Typically, video equipment cannot tolerate Alignment Jitter which causes decoding errors from incorrect sampling of the datastream because the
SDI Clock transition occurs on the edge of the data sample instead of at the center of thedata sample.
Wander:
Refers to a long-term time interval error, ie artefacts below 10 Hz. Typically, all video equipment has the tendency to cause wander over a long period, the display of these artefacts
are not easily displayed in a meaningful way but are better logged as errors that exceed tolerances over a long period.
Random Jitter:
Refers to artefacts caused by random events or processes such as thermal or shot noisethat cause small amplitude variations in the clock edge position or could cause large signal
amplitude variations, though these typically would be infrequent.
Note: If an Rx Generator modules is being used as the test pattern generator then the System
Reference should be set to Free Run to avoid the introduction of jitter caused by the Rx locking
circuitry.

Eye Display
The Eye and Jitter display shows the Eye Pattern against a vertical graticule of +500 mV to −500 mV.
Four horizontal cursor lines show the 100%, 80%, 20% and 0% measurement positions on the
waveform. Along the bottom of the display are continuous automatic measurements for the following
parameters:lllPage 2-48

Amplitude – measured in mV
Rise time – measured in picoseconds. The rise time measurement is specified as the time
between the 20% and 80% points on the eye waveform.
Fall time - measured in picoseconds. The fall time measurement is specified as the time
between the 20% and 80% points on the eye waveform.

lRise/fall difference - measured in picosecondslRising edge overshoot – measured as a percentage of the overall signal amplitude.

lFalling edge overshoot – measured as a percentage of the overall signal amplitude.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualCable length – measured in metres. The cable length display is only an approximate value with
10 m resolution thus a 5 m cable will be shown as 0 m long. The cable type affects the length
displayed which has been calibrated for Belden 1694A cables.

l

Any measurements which exceed the specification of the SDI signal are indicated in red font whilevalid parameters are displayed in a white font.
Note: If jitter values are too large, the automated measurements cannot be made accurately andshould not be relied upon.
The eye display is only accurate when connected using a cable of 1 m in length. If a longer cable isused the eye will begin to close up and measurements will become more difficult to make. Note thatthe eye display is of the signal pre-equalizer, with the equalizer in the system being used tocompensate for long cable lengths. There is no method for the Rx instrument to view the signal postequalizer.

Jitter Filters
The Jitter 1 and Jitter 2 filter options allow the specific type of jitter to be applied to the waveform andthe thermometer displays. The options are:
Timing:As determined by the SMPTE standard for the specific video standard (i.e., jitter above the
10 Hz threshold.)
Align:As determined by the SMPTE standard for the specific video standard (i.e., jitter above 1
kHz threshold for SD-SDI signals and 100 kHz for HD-SDI signals.)
10Hz
Jitter above a 10 Hz threshold.
100 HzJitter above a 100 Hz threshold.
1kHz
Jitter above a 1 kHz threshold.
10kHz
Jitter above a 10 kHz threshold.
100kHzJitter above a 100 kHz threshold.
Jitter filter selection affects both the jitter thermometer and eye pattern displays. Timing andAlignment jitter filters are defined in the relevant SMPTE publication. The thermometer automaticallycalibrates to the specification of the video standard and chosen filter. When reading is in specification
the thermometer bar is green, when close to specification it is yellow, and when out of specification
red.
3G-SDI (2.97 Gbps)

HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps)

SD-SDI (270 Mbps)

Alignment Jitter

SD-SDI (270 Mbps)

100 kHz high pass

1 kHz high pass

Alignment Jitter

10 Hz high pass

10 Hz high pass

10 Hz high pass

Upper limit−3 dB at 9.5 MHz low
pass−3 dB at 4.75 MHz low
pass−3 dB at 0.86 MHz low
pass

On screen horizontal cursors indicate where on the eye the rise time measurements are being made.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-49

Note: The Rx instrument takes a little time to stabilize when the SDI input standard changes.

Jitter Meter Ranges
3G-SDI (2.97 Gbps)

HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps)

SD-SDI (270 Mbps)

Alignment Full-Scale

0.52 UI

0.34 UI

0.34 UI

Alignment (RedThreshold)

0.3 UI

0.2 UI

0.2 UI

Alignment (Yellow
Threshold)

0.2 UI

0.14 UI

0.14 UI

Timing Full Scale

3.4 UI

1.7 UI

0.34 UI

Timing (Red Threshold)

2 UI

1 UI

0.2 UITiming (Yellow
Threshold)

1.4 UI

0.7 UI

0.14 UI

Eye Color:
The eye color may be set to green or blue and may also be adjusted in gain to allow theeye display to show hot spots where most of the signal data is found.

Advanced Jitter Analysis

Advanced Jitter Analysis provides the user with additional tools on the Eye display to help determine
the nature of jitter present in SDI signals.
Histogram:
Amp/Timing/Both. Histograms enable the operator to observe the distribution of samples
in both amplitude (Amp) and time (Time). The amplitude histogram shows the distribution ofsamples over the complete visible eye picture. The time histogram shows the distributionof samples at the zero point of the eye waveform for two thirds of the visible time period.
Note that he time histogram overlays some of the automatic measurement display. The
measurements may still be read by Remote Control if purchased.

Page 2-50

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualJitter-1:
Timing, Align, 10Hz, 100 Hz, 1KHz, 10KHz or 100KHz. This filter operates on both the lefthand jitter thermometer and the eye waveform. The different filters enable the operator tounderstand more fully the nature of any jitter present. When in Timing or Alignment modes,
the meter range is set to show appropriate ranges for the SMPTE specification at the current video input standard.
Jitter-2:
This is a second jitter measurement thermometer and may be set to Timing, Align, 10Hz,
100 Hz, 1KHz, 10KHz or 100KHz. This filter operates on just the right-hand jitter thermometer. When in Timing or Alignment modes, the meter range is set to show appropriate
ranges for the SMPTE specification at the current video input standard. When in other filter
modes, the meter ranges are expanded so that larger ranges may be viewed.
Update:This allows selection of the update rate to allow longer display persistence. This may be
set to 40ms (normal use) or infinite. When set to infinite, the Run and Clear buttons areenabled.
Run:
This checkbox stops the display from updating so that a waveform may be investigated in
more detail. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite update mode.
Clear:
This button clears the eye display. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite
update mode.
Eyes:
Adjusts the number of eyes visible on the eye display. The 10 and 20 modes are useful forobserving serial-parallel conversion jitter.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-51

Jitter Analysis
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Eye Module installed can display the selected input in the form ofan Jitter waveform.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Jitter menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Analyzer button.
This screen shows a trace of jitter amplitude versus time along with two jitter thermometers and has
the following controls:
Jitter-1:
Timing / Align / 10 Hz / 100 Hz / 1 kHz / 10 kHz / 100 kHz. This filter operates on both the lefthand jitter thermometer and the jitter trace.
Jitter-2:
Timing / Align / 10 Hz / 100 Hz / 1 kHz / 10 kHz / 100 kHz. This filter operates on just the righthand jitter thermometer.
Horiz:
H / 2H / V / Frame – horizontal sweep control for jitter trace.
UI/div:
0.1 /0.2 / 0.5 / 1.0 – vertical gain control for the sweep trace.
Update:This allows selection of the update rate to allow longer display persistence. This may be
set to 40 ms (normal use) or infinite. When set to infinite, the Run and Clear buttons areenabled.
Run:
This checkbox stops the display from updating so that a waveform may be investigated in
more detail. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite update mode.
Clear:
This button clears the eye display. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite
update mode.

Page 2-52

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSignal Information Menus
Overview
These Signal Info pages give a detailed view of the status of the input (or generator output) signal,
subdivided into the following areas:lVideo statusl

Misc statusl

Ancillary (ANC) status.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-53

Video Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display any
EDH (error detection and handling) or CRC (cyclic redundancy check) errors detected in thedatastream.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Video Status menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Sig Info button.
Selecting SDI Errors will display the EDH or CRC status of the analyzer input as appropriate for thevideo standard being monitored. The status of each EDH / CRC count is displayed as the number of
seconds since an error occurred.

EDH / CRC Errors
This displays the EDH or CRC status of the analyzer input as appropriate for the video standard being
monitored. The status of each EDH / CRC count is displayed as the number of seconds since an error
occurred. The individual CRC fields may be reset individually or together. The Running time fieldshows the time since the last error reset occurred. The error rate field shows the number of errors per
second. The running time will also be affected by the input being lost or being intermittent. CRC
errors are ignored on the switching line if the Ignore switch line checkbox is checked.
ANC checksum errors are also detected and counted and may be logged.
When analyzing a 3G-Level B signal, the CRC status is displayed for each link or stream present
according to the input video format. On an RX instrument with a Dual-Link module with 2 video inputs,
only one 3G-Level B may be analyzed for CRC status at a time.

EDH Data
If the signal is SD (PAL-625 or NTSC-525) the EDH values for both active picture (AP) and full-field (FF)are displayed for each field. To enable engineers checking EDH integrity, the EDH values calculated
for active picture and full-field are also displayed.
Under normal conditions, the EDH-AP values should be constant, the full-field values may change if
audio or other ancillary data is embedded in the SDI signal.
The EDH flags for active picture, full-field and ancillary data are also displayed for diagnostic
purposes:

Page 2-54

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualEdh:Error Detected Here - This is set to 1 if a SDI error was detected. In the case of ancillarydata, this means that one or more ANC data packets had an incorrect checksum.
Eda:
Error Detected Already - This is set to 1 if a SDI error was detected in the signal received by
the previous device.
Idh:
Internal error Detected Here - This is set to 1 if a hardware error was detected in the previous device.
Ida:
Internal error Detected Already - This is set to 1 if an idh flag was received by the previous
device.
Ues:
Unknown error status: This is set to 1 if the previous device received an SDI signal from adevice not supporting EDH.
Note: Only a single EDH detector is connected to the input currently being analyzed. On an Rx
instrument with multiple video inputs, only the current input being analyzed can check for EDH
errors.

Cable Length
The Rx instrument measures the cable length connected to the SDI input BNC and the measurement
is only an approximate value. The cable type may be set to one of the following:lBelden: 8282, 1694A, 1505, 1855A.

l

Canare L-5CFBlImage 1000

The selected cable type will affect the cable length measurement.

Active Picture CRC
16-bit CCITT CRCs are calculated for the active picture data of the received signal. This can be used
to give a known value for known static picture content and allows the user to determine if the active
picture content is as expected.
CRCs are calculated independently upon each 10-bit stream (luminance and chrominance) of theinterface.
For example the generated 1920x1080, 100% bars in YCC422-10 should always produce a luminance
CRC of 0x0AB4 and a chrominance CRC of 0xB88E, no matter what scanning mode (interlaced,segmented frame or progressive) or frame rate is used.
Note: When using 4:4:4, 4:4:4:4 or 12-bit video formats (in dual-link or 3 Gbps) the CRCs arecalculated for each of the packed 10-bit virtual interfaces and will therefore generate different
values from those for YCC422-10.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-55

MISC Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display thecontent of any SMPTE 352 packets detected in the datastream.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Misc Status menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Sig Info button.

Payload ID – SMPTE 352
If the Rx instrument has detected a SMPTE 352 ancillary packet, it will be displayed here in hex anddecoded format.
The display shows the transport media, frame rate and frame mode (interlaced, progressive, orsegmented) as well as color format, bit depth, dynamic range and channel number. See the SMPTE
352 specification for further details.
When analyzing a 3G-Level B signal, the SMPTE 352 status is displayed for each link or stream
present according to the input video format. On an RX instrument with Dual-Link with 2 video inputs,
only one 3G-Level B may be analyzed for SMPTE 352 status at a time.

Video Format
This displays the currently detected line length for both active video and full line including blanking aswell as the number of active lines for the inputs present.
Note: The video frequency displayed is only correct if the Rx instrument has been calibrated andfree running or has been connected to an accurate reference input.
If the input signal is not a known signal (for example, if the line count or pixel count is not recognized)
The input status on the top line will display Invalid but the values in this section will be updated every
few seconds.
The Re-sync counter displays the number of times the SDI data has been re-synchronized and canhelp detect intermittent SDI signal problems.

Page 2-56

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualVideo Input Timing
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display its
timing relationship with the locking reference.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the video Input Timing menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Sig Info button.
The timing of SDI input signals is displayed relative to the external reference. If no reference ispresent then an error message is displayed. If the signal is timed to within +/− 2 samples, the values
are displayed in black in lines and samples (spl). If mistimed, then values are displayed in red. A bar
graph also displays the timing value which may either be line timing (+/− 0.1 lines or +/− 0.5 lines) orframe timing (+/− 0.5 frame). The total timing value is also displayed in microseconds (μs).
The red arrow on the bar shows the SDI input timing and the blue arrow shows the current target
timing point. The brown line shows the timing of the reference signal.
To compare timings of different signals, connect the signal to be compared to the SDI input andselect the Offset button to make this the current offset. All future timings will be relative to this offset
value.
To clear the current offset, move the focus to the two offset fields, press OK to edit them and thenpress default.
Note: All timing measurements are relative to line 1 on the SDI signal and line 1 on the reference
signal. This can lead to different values to other test and measurement instruments that include
an SD (PAL/NTSC) offset in their calculations. By comparing line 1 timings, the Rx instrument canbe used to measure time delays accurately through up/down/cross converters.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-57

ANC Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display
details of any Ancillary packets within the SDI datastream.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the ANC Status menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Sig Info button.
The ANC status menu shows which ANC packets are present on the SDI input and whether they haveany errors.
Each field is color coded according to whether the ANC packet is present (White), missing (Gray), haserrors (Red), or has previously had errors (yellow).
If the field has errors then a symbol beside the field shows which error type it is. The bottom of thepage shows the symbol for each type of error. The Reset button resets the Previous Errors state.

The Setup button and dialog allows user defined ANC packets to be configured.
The packet name, data ID (DID) and SDID may be specified for up to three user-defined ancillary
packets. The stream field specifies whether the packet should be on the chroma stream, theluminance stream or both.
The data packets that can be trapped by the ANC Status are as follows:
RP165-EDH:
The SMPTE RP165-EDH packet containing EDH (error data handling) and CRC (cyclic
redundancy counts). This only appears on SD-SDI signals.
S272-SD Audio:
The SMPTE 291M defined SD audio data in HANC space.
S272-SD Aux:
Page 2-58

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The SMPTE 291M defined SD auxiliary data in HANC space.
S272-SD Ctrl:
The SMPTE 291M defined SD control data in HANC space.
S299-HD Audio:
The SMPTE 291M defined HD audio data in HANC space.
S299-HD Ctrl:
The SMPTE 291M defined HD control data in HANC space.
S315-Cam. Pos:
The SMPTE 291M defined camera position data in HANC and VANC space.
S353-MPEG Record
The SMPTE 291M defined MPEG recoding data in HANC and VANC space.
S305-SDTIThe SMPTE 291M defined SDTI transport data packet in active frame space.
S348-HDTIThe SMPTE 291M defined HD-SDTI transport in active frame space.
S427-Lnk. Enc 1
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S427-Lnk. Enc 2
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S427-Link Enc
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S352-Payload
The SMPTE 291M defined Payload Identification data packet in VANC space.
OP47 Transport
The Free TV Operational Practice OP-47 defined transport of Closed Caption/Subtitling
data in the VANC space.
OP47 Dist.
The Free TV Operational Practice OP-47 defined distribution of Closed Caption/Subtitling
data in the VANC space.
ITU-R BT 1685:
The ITU-R BT 1685 defined Structure of inter-station control data packets.
RP214-KLV-V:
The SMPTE defined KLV Metadata transport in VANC space.
RP214-KLV-H:
The SMPTE defined KLV Metadata transport in HANC space.
RP233-UMID/ID:
The SMPTE defined UMID (Unique Material Identifier) in VANC space.
S2020-Audio:
The SMPTE S2020 defined standardized data packet defining the encoding for a Dolby
stereo or a multi-channel surround group of audio channels.
RP215 – Film:
The SMPTE defined recommended practice data packet for film codes in VANC space.
EIA-708 Caption:
The EIA standard defined closed caption data for HD-SDI in VANC space.
EIA-608 Caption:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-59

The EIA standard defined closed caption data for SD SDI 525i (NTSC) in VANC space.
RP207 Program:
The SMPTE RP207 defined program description data packet in VANC space.
RP208 – VBI:The SMPTE defined recommended practice VBI Data (vertical blanking interval data) in
VANC space.
S2010-SCTE MSGS:The SMPTE S2010 defined standardized API message data in VANC space.
S2016-3 AFD:The SMPTE S2016 defined standardized AFD (active format description) and Bar data
packet (defining active area of image).
ARIB-B.22:
The ARIB-defined Sub information data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.23-1:
The ARIB-defined user data 1 packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.23-2:
The ARIB-defined user data 2 packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.27 Capt.:
The ARIB-defined caption data in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.35:
The ARIB-defined trigger signal data packet for data broadcasting.
ARIB-B.39:
The ARIB-defined inter-stationary control data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37:
The ARIB-defined analog signal data in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37 HD:
The ARIB-defined HD data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37 Mob
The ARIB defined closed captioning information data packet.
ARIB-B.37 SD:
The ARIB defined SD data packet in the VANC space.
S2031-SCTE VBI:The SCTE S2031 standard defined VBI (vertical blanking interval) data packet for closed
captioning.
S2016-4 PAN:
The SCTE S2016 standard defined pan and scan data packet.
RP196-HANC:
The SMPTE defined recommended practice Time Code data packet in HANC space.
RP196-VANC:
The SMPTE defined recommended practice Vertical Timecode data packet in VANC
space.
RDD8-WSS:
The SMPTE defined wide screen switching data packet in the VANC space.
S12M-2 V-Tcode:
The SMPTE S12M defined standardized frame timecode data packet in VANC space.

Page 2-60

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualMark Deleted:
A user-defined data packet used to mark other data packets for deletion (ie to be ignoredby down-stream processes.
User-1:
A user-defined data packet.
User-2:A user-defined data packet.
User-3:A user-defined data packet.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-61

ANC Inspector (SDI Analysis Option)
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed and SDI analysis option can monitor theselected input and display the contents of selected Ancillary packets within the SDI data.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the ANC Inspector menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Sig Info button.
The packet type can be selected using either the dropdown list of known packets or the DID/SDID(Data Identifier/ Secondary Data Identifier) number fields (for example RP165 – EDH, S272 – SD AudioGroup 1, S272 – SD Audio Group 2, etc.) If the DID/SDID values match a known type, then that typewill be selected in the dropdown list. This may be further filtered using the Checkboxes on the Setup
dialog.
Note: The settings of the Setup dialog affect the currently displayed data. For example, if any
trigger parameters are set (such as DID or SDID set to specific values which do not appear in thedata) this may prevent data being displayed.
When searching for specific data events it is advisable first to switch off the Trigger parameters suchas DID, SDID, Checksum, DBN (Data Block Number), Parity and ANC Gaps, to ensure that you can see
data for the selected ANC packet. Only when the ANC Inspector is displaying streaming data, should
you introduce the specific trigger parameters required to trap the target data packet.
The Line and sample number of the detected packet is displayed to facilitate debugging ofgeneration equipment. The complete data packet is displayed as a hexadecimal grid at the bottom of
the page and may also be decoded into text above the grid. If an error occurs in the packet, theheader and checksum are displayed in red. The display of data may be frozen by pressing the Freeze
checkbox.
The Found description shows in which stream the ANC packet was detected, Chroma or Luma andwhat kind of trigger was detected. This may be:l

C: Checksum Errorl

D: DBN (Data block number) Errorl

P: Parity Errorl

G: ANC Gap Error

Several of the above flags may be displayed at the same time.

Page 2-62

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The ANC packets detected may be filtered using the Setup dialog. This allows a great deal of
freedom in setting when the display will be triggered.
If the On Trigger checkbox is checked the data packet will cause the display to be frozen and theFreeze checkbox will turn red when a trigger condition is met. See the section ANC Inspector Setup
below. Unchecking the freeze button will restore normal operation.
The −>Cursor button will copy the Line and Sample numbers to the SDI data view cursors to simplify
navigation to the ANC packet under investigation.

ANC Inspector Setup

If the Setup button is pressed a dialog box is shown to allow the ANC packet trigger parameters to be
set. The trigger parameters allow only selected lines to be checked or excluded when checking forthe presence of packets.
Line Range Filter:
If either of the Line Range Filter checkboxes are checked then the range of lines that the
ANC inspector will check is limited to that range. If the Selection below the range is set to
Inside then it will only check ANC packets inside the range (including the start and end
lines). If it is set to Outside then it will only check ANC packets outside the specified range.
HANC/VANC Filter:
A filter for simpler selection of where to search for packets. It may be selected to search
the HANC (Horizontal Ancillary Data) area, the VANC (Vertical Ancillary Data) area or bothareas.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-63

Error Triggers
If any of the Errors checkboxes are checked, then the ANC packet data will only be displayed if anerror occurs. The error states detected are:Checksum:
A checksum error in a packet was detected. ie Sum of data between DID and final UDW(User Data Words).
DBN:
A Data Block number error was detected in an audio packet. The DBN field (in the sameplace as the SDID) of an audio packet should either be 0 and never change OR incrementfrom 1...255 and then start at 1 again.
Parity:A parity error was detected for the DID, SDID and DataCount words in a packet. (Even Parity used and bit 9 is inverse of bit 8)
ANC Gaps:
The ANC packets were separated by a gap containing video blanking data. EDH (DIDD=0xf4) packets are ignored. Note that if an EDH packet is marked for deletion, this will result in an ANC GAP error.
The Setup dialog also shows when an ANC packet has been detected and where it was found. This
makes changing a filter simpler as the effect of the filter can be determined without closing the dialog.
This dialog also allows the user-defined ANC packets to be configured.

Page 2-64

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

SFP Info

The SFP Info menu displays details of the currently installed SFP module.
Along with manufacturer’s details of the SFP parameters, this displays the transmitted and received
power which can indicate optical losses in the infrastructure (optical fiber type, distance andconnection quality.)

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-65

Audio Menus
Audio Meters
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input audio andgraphically display the audio level for each audio channel.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the audio Meters menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Audio button.
This page shows up to 16 audio channels. The audio level value for each audio channel is displayed
numerically at the bottom of the display.
The source for each meter pair may be independently set to allow simultaneous metering of eight
different meter pairs associate to the Analyzer or all 16 channels in an embedded SDI stream. This isselected using the Setup menu at the right of the window or by right-clicking using the mouse on themeter pairs using contextual menus.

Meter Setup

The source for each pair of audio meters can be selected from the dropdown lists for each pair. The
scale and peak program meter ballistics can also be selected from the dropdown menus.
Page 2-66

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The scale used by the meters may be set to −18dB, −20dB. BBC, BBCM, DIN45406 or NordicN9
according to the standard operating level used. The graticule and audio levels displayed will change
to match the selected scale. The meters can be set to different ballistic settings using the dropdown
list:
l

l

l

l

PPM I emulating the performance of IEC 60268-10 Type I PPM style audio meters typically usedby German broadcasters.
PPM II emulating the performance of IEC 60268-10 Type II PPM style audio meters typicallyused by UK broadcasters.
Vu emulating the performance of IEC 60268-17 style audio meters typically used by Americanand Australian broadcasters.
Vu-Fr emulating the performance of ITU-R Rec. BS.645 style audio meters typically used by
French broadcasters.

These ballistics settings affect the response of the meter display to dynamic changes in audio level.
The peak hold bars can be displayed if the checkbox is selected and the decay time can be setup
using the dropdown list.

Audio Mix Mode

The Mix Mode function allows selected channels to be assigned to the left and right channels of the
Audio Monitoring output when Analyzer → Downmix is selected.
The dropdown menu allows Mix Mode to be set to User defined, 5.1A or 5.1B to use mappings definedin the System - Surround Channel Setup.
The Mix Mode channel mappings can be saved as an audio preset using the Save button andrecalled using the Rx 2000 front panel preset controls.

4AES Module
The Rx Instrument with an 4AES Module installed can monitor the selected AES input audio pairs andgraphically display the audio level for up to four pairs of AES audio channels.

Dolby Metadata Analysis
If the metadata Dolby analyzer option is installed, the meters may be set to display the encoded
Dolby metadata levels for up to eight Dolby channels within the specified embedded audio pair or
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-67

AES input.
If AES inputs are present then these may also be metered. At the bottom of each meter is the current
audio level for that channel in dBFs (decibels relative to 0 dB full-scale).
Note: Dolby audio cannot be heard on the speaker if the Dolby Decoder module is not present.

Dolby Decoder module
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the levels of the decoded baseband audio channels can bemonitored using the Audio Meters. To do this Dolby P1, Dolby P2, etc. must be selected using the
Setup menu.
The Decoder 1 and Decoder 2 selections from the dropdown list of the meter window will display thelevels for the decoded Dolby audio channels. With Decoder 1 or 2 selected, the meter display
changes color to blue indicating that decoded Dolby audio is in use and channels can be selected aspart of a downmix.

Page 2-68

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAudio Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input audio and detailits audio encoding details.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Audio Status menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Audio button.
The Audio Status menu shows the Channel Status for the selected audio channel is displayed in
decoded form as well as a hexadecimal dump of the bytes.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-69

Dolby Status (Dolby Analyzer Option)
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed and Dolby Analyzer Option can monitor theselected input audio and provide details of its Dolby E audio encoding.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Dolby menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Audio button.
The Dolby E status option allows display of the Dolby E metadata present in the selected audio
stream and determines whether the Dolby E packet is timed correctly on the SDI video stream.
This option therefore allows the correct timing of the Dolby E packets with the SDI signal to bechecked at all stages in a broadcast chain.
Checks can be made to see that the Dolby E has been created correctly and transferredtransparently through the broadcast chain unaffected by routers, switchers, satellite links, etc.

Overview
Dolby E, Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus digital audio standards can be transported as audio dataover an SMPTE 337M AES carrier with a 48 kHz sample rate.
These standards can be used to transport mono, stereo, 5.1 and 7.1 audio programs:ll

Dolby 5.1 - involves five channels for normal-range speakers (20 Hz – 20,000 Hz) (right front,
center, left front, rear right, rear left) and one channel (20 Hz – 120 Hz allotted audio) for the subwoofer driven low-frequency effects.
Dolby 7.1 - uses six channels in the primary program (Independent Substream) for a standard
5.1 surround sound mix and then the remaining two channels in an ancillary program (Dependent Substream) to provide the additional down-mix.

Dolby E
Dolby E is an audio encoding and decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that allows
up to 8 channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1 or 7.1) that for a primary program (Programme 1) andoptional ancillary programs. These 8 channels are compressed (loss-less) into a digital stream thatcan be transferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Page 2-70

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby Digital
Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a perceptual audio system for digital audio that allows the reduction of dataneeds to deliver high-quality sound. This system was developed primarily for DTV, DVD and HDTV.
This format allows up to six channels of sound (mono, stereo or 5.1) in the form of a single ‘program’that can be delivered at different bit rates. These 6 channels are compressed (lossy) into a digital
stream that can be broadcast. The most elaborate mode in common use is Dolby 5.1 with uses all six
channels to provide surround sound.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus (E-AC-3) is a more advanced version of Dolby Digital that provides a more efficientencoding algorithm with enough bandwidth to allow up to 20 channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1, 7.1
up to 13.1) for a primary program (Program 1) and optional ancillary programs that can be delivered atlower bit rates than Dolby Digital. These 20 channels are compressed (lossy) into an independent
digital datastream plus up to eight dependent sub-stream that can be transferred between
compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Analyzer Reference
For the Dolby E data to be decoded correctly, the internal audio circuitry requires a reference that issynchronized to the input SDI signal for embedded audio and the external system reference for AES
audio. The Generator Reference must not be set to Free-Run or Dolby errors may be detected. Notethat the description field will display Invalid Reference if an incorrect reference is selected.

In this example, the SDI signal contains embedded audio with Dolby E, Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital
Plus present on one or more audio pairs. The Rx instrument needs to lock its internal audio clock to
the SDI signal and the Rx needs to be configured to select the specific audio channels containing the
Dolby audio.
In the example below, the AES signal contains a Dolby digital audio stream. The Rx instrument needs
to lock its internal audio clock to the external reference signal. This can be done from the Ref menu
on the HDMI task bar, the Rx 2000 Dolby Metadata and the Rx 2000 Generator - Genlock menus.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-71

In the Dolby Meta-Data window, the Dolby Timing source should be set to Ext Ref.
The AES source must be locked to the same reference as the Rx.

Source Selection
The Dolby E may be monitored from any of the SDI input embedded audio channel pairs or the AES
input. The two dropdown lists in this section allow the module input and specific audio channels to be
selected.

Dolby E Framing Values
It is important for the Dolby E packet to be positioned well away from the video switching line so that
Dolby E packets are not corrupted by downstream switchers. At all places in the signal chain whereaudio can be delayed by a different value to the video, the Dolby E packet needs to be re-timed tomake sure that this timing specification is met. The position of the Dolby E packet in the video frame isdisplayed in lines and micro-seconds (μs).

Dolby E Timing source
Dolby E timing may be measured relative to the SDI input or the External reference. If the Ideal
checkbox is checked, the Dolby E Frame timing is relative to the normal position that it should be, thatis, it should be as close to zero as possible. Each video standard has a specified Ideal line number onwhich the Dolby E packet should start. If the Dolby E timing line is outside the valid range of lines it will
be displayed in red. If it is outside the ideal range it will be displayed in dark green – this is still a valid
Dolby E position but not recommended by Dolby. The timing measurement is always displayed interms of the SDI input lines and thus if an AES input is used as the Dolby E source, the line position will
not be displayed.
If you do not have the same reference as the SDI source, you will have to set the Reference Source
and Dolby Timing Source to be the SDI input.
Note: If Dolby E is present on a fast frame rate signal (50p, 59p or 60p) then it should always bereferenced to a interlaced reference at the same field rate as the packet length is longer than asingle frame and must start at the beginning of an even numbered frame.

Page 2-72

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby E Program Configuration

This displays the Program configuration (5.1+2 etc.), the number of the program in the metadata, theframe rates and bit depths and timecode if present.
Errors:
Displays the number of CRC errors detected in the Dolby E metadata.
Start Gain:
These fields indicate the gain to be applied to the specified channel at the beginning of
the audio frame when decoding.
End Gain:
These fields indicate the gain to be applied to the specified channel at the end of theaudio frame when decoding.
Program Selection:
Selects which set of program metadata is shown. Up to 8 programs can be encoded in the
Dolby E packet dependent on the Program Configuration.
Program Description:User-defined description for the selected program.

Program Metadata
The Audio – Dolby menu allows the metadata for a Dolby E datastream to be viewed. For any
program this metadata would be created as part of the Dolby E authoring process. The following
metadata can be viewed for Program 1:
Dialogue Norm:
The standard audio level for dialog.
BsMod:(Bitstream Mode) indicates the type of audio service that the bitstream contains. Complete
Main (CM) is the normal mode of operation and contains a complete audio program including dialog, music, and effects.
Ctr DnMix:(Center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Sur DnMix:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-73

(Surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LRoCtrDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LRoSurDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding anddecoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LR CtrDnMix:(Left, right, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LR SurDnMix:(Left, right, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Chan Mode:
Defines the channel configuration for Program 1 (i.e., mono, stereo, 5.1 channels).
Line Mode
An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down¬mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
RFMode:An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
Room Type:
This informational parameter indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used forthe final audio mixing session.
MixLevel:
The Surround Down mix Level parameter indicates the nominal Lo/Ro down mix level ofthe Surround channel(s) with respect to the Left and Right channels
DolbySurnd:
The Dolby Surround Mode parameter indicates whether a two-channel Dolby Digital bitstream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program.
DownMixMod:
This controls the Down Mix Mode, used by the content creator, to optimize Center and Surround channel levels for use in stereo down mix mode for any two-channel programs.
D Sur Ex:This controls the Dolby Surround Ex channel that provides an extra audio channel for
Dolby 5.1. The extra surround channel of the Dolby Surround Ex system is matrix-encoded
onto the discrete left-surround and right-surround channels of the 5.1 mix.
The following control bits can also be set:
LFE
The LFE Channel parameter enables or disables the Low-Frequency Effects (LFE) channel.
HPF

Page 2-74

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualThis parameter can be used to activate the DC High pass filter for all input channels.
LPF
The LFE Low Pass Filter parameter can be used to activate a 120 Hz low-pass filter applied
to the LFE input channel.
Sur 3dB Alt
The Surround Channel 3 dB Attenuation function is used to apply a 3 dB attenuation to the
Surround channels of a multichannel soundtrack created in a room with film style calibration, when encoding it for consumer home theater playback.
Sur Ph+Filter
The Surround Channel 90-Degree Phase-Shift feature is used for generating multichannel
Dolby Digital bitstreams that can be down-mixed in an external two channel decoder to create a true Dolby Surround compatible output.
Org Stream
The Original Bitstream informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the
Dolby Digital bitstream. This bit has a value of 1 (box checked) if the bitstream is an original.
If it is a copy of an original bitstream, it has a value of 0.
Copyright
The Copyright Bit informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the Dolby
Digital bitstream. If this bit has a value of 1 (box checked), the information in the bitstream isindicated as protected by copyright. If it has a value of 0, it is not copyright protected.
RF Ov Prot.
The RF Over-modulation Protection parameter determines whether an RF pre-emphasis filter is used in the overload protection algorithm to prevent RF over-modulation in set-top
box decoders.

Peak Metering
The peak audio levels are included in the Dolby E metadata packet and may be displayed on the
Audio - Meters page. Select the appropriate set of meters to display Dolby levels and then they will
follow the selected Dolby E source.
Note: Note that audio cannot be decoded by the Rx range of products and so you will NOT beable to listen to the Dolby E signal. Note also that the LFE channel audio levels do not seem to bemetered by current Dolby encoding modules.
See the section Logging Menus for details on which changes of Dolby E status may be logged.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-75

Loudness Meters
The tools provided in the Loudness window allow the loudness of the selected source stereo audio
pair, 5.1 surround sound audio group or decoded Dolby program (from the Dolby Decoder module) tobe monitored and measured. The Rx system provides up to four Loudness meters as standard,
allocated as one loudness channel per analyzer module.

Loudness is measured in accordance with ITU 1770 and EBU Recommendation 128 which define themeasurement in terms of Loudness Units (UI), Loudness Units Full Scale (LUFS), Loudness K-weighted
Full Scale (LKFS) over different time periods.
The Loudness display allows the required mode (Integrated, Momentary or Short Term), input (SDI,
Fiber or AES), audio source, and (in the case of a Dolby Decoder audio source,) Dolby program to be
selected.
The left-hand part of the window displays the actual audio values of the select audio channels
numerically and graphically. The right-hand part of the window provides the current Integrated,
Momentary and Short Term loudness values, a loudness bar graphically displaying the selected
loudness mode value, input and source selection and loudness logging controls.
The right-hand part of the window also provides a True Peak Hold indicator showing the highest
perceived loudness level measured. The value will be displayed in red if it exceeds the True Peak
Alarm threshold level shown. The Alarm level is configurable in Options. The True Peak Hold
indicator can be reset.

Loudness Logging
If the Enable checkbox is selected in the Logging section, the system will log loudness continuously
and save CSV files every 30 minutes.
As defined in the EBU Recommendation 128, the loudness meter provides the following functions:lllStart: Starts the integrated loudness measurement.
Pause: Pauses the current integrated loudness logging process. Re-selecting this button will
resume the loudness logging process from the point where it was paused.
Reset: Clears the current Infinitely integrated loudness session.

Loudness logs are stored automatically each time the pre-set duration is reached. The duration canbe defined in the Export Time setting found in Options, to be between one minute and three hours
long; although 30 minute intervals are more practical. These logs will be individual, time-stamped
CSV (comma separated value) files which are held in the loudness folder within the Rx operating
system. (See the section Rx File Structure for details).

Page 2-76

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualLog files can be saved manually at any time by selecting Save in the Loudness Options window;
which can be accessed by selecting the Options button. Selecting the Save Name text box displays
an on-screen keyboard to allow the CSV file to be named appropriately. These logs can be copied
onto a USB pen drive if inserted into the front panel and selected using from the loudness folder.

Mode
The loudness is measured simultaneously with three different time periods:l

M (momentary) covering the shortest timescale of 400 msl

S (short term) covering the intermediate timescale of 3 secondsl

I (integrated) covering the duration of a program or segment

The M, S and I values are displayed for the selected audio pair or 5.1 surround sound audio channels.

Input and Source
The SDI input with the embedded audio channels to be monitored is selected using the Input
dropdown list. The audio channels within the selected input are then selectable from the Source
dropdown list. The loudness meter can display and log the loudness of stereo pairs (for example, G1P1) or 5.1 surround sound audio channels.

Options

The Options menu allows the selection of meter scale (LU, LUFS or LKFS), measurement standard(EBU or ITU) and Meter Range as well as user-defined threshold values for Integrated, Momentaryand Short Term loudness. This menu also allows the manual or automatic deletion of Loudness logs.
The Mode dropdown allows the selection of the displayed scale of LU (Loudness Unit), LUFS
(Loudness Unit Full Scale) or LKFS (Loudness K-weighted Full Scale). These affect the loudness
values measured. Note that LUFS and LKFS have a −23 dB weighting to standardize broadcast
loudness measurement and prevent digital clipping. So if a −23 dB test tone is measured it will give 0
LUFS or 0 LKFS.
The Standard dropdown menu allows the EBU RP128 or ITU 1770 loudness measurement standard to
be selected. These affect the loudness values measured.
The Audio and dBFS dropdowns in the Scales section allows the scales of the audio channel meters
to be selected. The actual scale of the Loudness meter is defined by the loudness mode selection.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-77

The Integrated (Infinity), Momentary and Short Term target values define the level, above which, aloudness error is logged as exceeding the defined upper limits. The errors count is displayed on the
Loudness window. If Targets → Enable is selected in the Local Options section, cursors will be
displayed on the meter bar and the loudness values will flash red when the target level is exceed.
The dB values next to the Integrated (Infinity), Momentary and Short Term values allow a guard band
to be set above the target value.
In the True Peak section, the True Peak Alarm threshold can be set.
Selecting the OK button will save the current changes and the Cancel button will discard any changes
made.
Loudness logs that have been manually or automatically saved can be deleted manually using the
Delete and Delete all buttons. When continuously logging program loudness, the Auto Delete
function can be used to delete log files older than 1 to 10 days. To refine the search when looking forexisting log files, enable the Filter checkbox and then enter file name text in the Filter text box.

GPIO Loudness Control
The loudness meters can be controlled by way of the GPIO interface using pins 0 and 1 or pins 2 and3. The control mechanism uses two GPI pins that function as follows:
Pin 0 / 2
Enable / Reset

Pin 1 / 3
Run / Pause

Loudness
Operation

1

1

Reset

1

0

Reset

0

1

Paused00Running

Where:
l0 Represents Active LOW (grounded)l

1 Represents NOT 0 (HIGH)l

Pin 0 / 2 default (HIGH): Resetl

Pin 1 / 3 default (HIGH): Run

When using the Loudness GPIO Control, the default state is Reset. This is equivalent to the default
state of the Loudness user interface at power-on of the Rx. While Enable/Reset is HIGH (Reset) thestate of Run/Pause is ignored.
To start Loudness monitoring:
The Enable/Reset Pin is asserted LOW (Enable, leaving Run/Pause HIGH (Run).
To pause Loudness monitoring:
The Run/Pause Pin is asserted LOW (Pause) and it will remain paused until the Run/Pause
pin goes HIGH (Run).
To reset Loudness monitoring:
The Enable/Reset Pin is asserted HIGH (RESET). Loudness will remain stopped (in RESET)
while the Enable/Reset Pin remains HIGH (RESET).
While Loudness GPIO Control is enabled, the two buttons which allow the user to start, stop, pause,
resume and reset Loudness in the GUI are hidden and replaced by the GPI Control state.

Page 2-78

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Local Options menu has a new local configuration section for GPIO Control where the user can
Enable/Disable external control and select which two of the four GPI Pins to use (the choice is 0/1 or
2/3). This enables the user to control two different loudness monitors independently via GPIO or
control multiple loudness monitors from the same GPIO control.
When Pins 2/3 are selected, Pin 2 is Enable/Reset and Pin 3 is Run/Pause..
The following screen shows GPIO Control in the running state:

When the Loudness Meter(s) are under GPIO Control, the current GPI state is displayed in the bottomright corner of the window, for example:l

GPI State: Runningl

GPI State: Pausedl

GPI State: Reset

Configuration Conflict Handling for GPIO Preset and Loudness Control
The user can now select GPIO Input control from either the Presets screen or the Loudness Options
screen. It is possible to enable GPIO control for both Presets and Loudness at the same time but, on
experiencing a conflicting setting, the system displays an error dialog stating that the current
configuration is invalid:

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-79

Click Ok to close the error dialog and resolve the GPIO conflict between the Loudness and Preset
controls.
Logging with GPIO Loudness Control Enabled
The GPIO Loudness Control will begin a new log file on starting or resuming Loudness monitoring (ifconfigured in the Loudness options.) The GPIO pins can also be used to force a new log file while
Loudness is running by pulsing the Run/Pause control for 100 ms.

Confidence Check
These different measure modes can give unpredictable results dependent on the type of program
and the combination of narrative, music and loud audio events such as explosions. The actual values
measured are also affected by the meter scale.
As a simple confidence check, use a stereo sine wave, 1000 Hz, -23.0 dBFS (per-channel peak level),in phase as the test tone applied to both channels simultaneously for 20 second duration. This should
give the following results:

Page 2-80l

M, S, I = -23.0 ±0.1 LUFS orl

M, S, I = 0.0 ±0.1 LU

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby Decoder Setup (option)
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed in the Rx system, it can be configured to decode specific SDI
or AES inputs of Analyzer or 4AES modules.

The Dolby Decoder Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output
task bar and selecting Dolby Setup.
Source:Defines the specific Analyzer input channel or 4AES module to use.
Input Pair:
Defines the specific SDI audio pair or 4AES module input to use.
ProgramDefines the specific Dolby program to decode.
Note: The two Dolby Decoders cannot be assigned to the same Analyzer or 4AES module.
Throughout the Rx system audio instruments, the decoded output of these two Dolby Decoders canbe selected so that the individual decoded Dolby channels, pairs of channels or a mixed-down
version can be selected.
Note: The Dolby Decoder settings are stored as part of the system configuration and cannot besaved in presets.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-81

System Menus
Presets
The Rx Instrument settings for Generator, Analyzer and HDMI® monitor output can be saved andrecalled as required.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Presets menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
System button.
The Presets menu displays the current settings of the Rx instrument which may be saved for futurerecall.
The checkboxes on the right-hand side determine what is saved in the memory. Non-overlapping
memories may then be combined. For example, saving generator or HDMI setting separately without
affecting the analyzer settings.
Note: If login has been enabled for an Rx instrument, memories may only be added, edited,renamed or cleared and archives backed up by a user with Modify Memories permissions.

Saving Presets
Select the Preset to save settings to by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing OK.
Use the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next tothe memory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.
Specify which aspects of the Rx instrument are to be saved in the memory using the checkboxes on
the right-hand side. If you want to change the name of the memory see the section Renaming a
Preset before saving.
Move the cursor to the Save button and press OK. The text field under the Memory list will change toshow the last Saved or Recalled memory.

Recalling Presets
Select the Preset to be recalled by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing OK. Use
the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next to thememory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.

Page 2-82

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualMove the cursor to the Recall button and press OK. The text field under the Memory list will change toshow the last Saved or Recalled memory.

Renaming a Preset
Select the Preset to be renamed by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing OK.
Use the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next tothe memory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.
Move the cursor to the edit field and press OK. The menu keys at the bottom of the screen willchange to show text keys similar to a mobile phone. Pressing a key repeatedly will cycle through thecharacters for that key. Pressing a different key will move the cursor to the next position and insert thefirst key value for that key. The cursor left and right keys can be used to move the position of the text
cursor which is where the next character will be inserted. The Back Space key will delete the key tothe left of the cursor. The Cancel key will cancel edit mode and restore the original text. Once you
have finished editing the name, press OK to rename the memory.

Adding Additional Memories
To add a new memory, press the ADD button. This will use the current memory name and settings.

Clearing Presets
Select the Preset to be cleared by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing OK. Use
the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next to thememory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.
Move the cursor to the Clear button and press OK. The memory list will show the default name for thatmemory. A cleared memory cannot be recalled.

Exporting Presets
Presets can be exported to a single file for backup purposes and re-imported into the internal format.
This allows different sets of memories to be used for different tasks, such as command scripts. In
addition, presets can be exported from one Rx instrument and imported onto another Rx, as
described below. Exported memories are in a text format and so may be edited on a PC anddownloaded to or from the backups directory on the Rx instrument using FTP or USB.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-83

To export memories, select the Backup... button which will open a window to select the file to create.
Existing files are shown and a new filename may be selected using the File Name edit box. Select the
Save button to create the backup file. The filename created will have a .mem file extension.
To import memories, select the Restore... button which will open a window to select the file to import.
Existing files are shown and one should be selected before the Load button is pressed. Select the
Load button to import the backup file.
Note: When importing a backup file, all existing memories are deleted before the backup file isloaded so make sure that they are backed-up first.

Transferring Presets to a Different Rx
Warning: Before attempting to copy presets from one Rx to another, ensure that the target Rx
has an identical hardware configuration as the source Rx and is also running exactly the same
software version. If there are any hardware or software differences between the source andtarget devices, you may experience configuration issues.
First, save your backed-up presets to a USB pen drive. Insert a USB pen drive into one of the USB
ports on the front or rear panel of the Rx. This opens the USB Disk Connected dialog box.
From the Types dropdown menu, select: Archives.

With Archives selected, highlight the desired preset backup in the right-hand list under backups
System Files, for example: loudness. Click the button <− Copy to copy the backed-up preset file to theUSB device.
Click Eject and remove the USB device from the Rx.
Locate the next Rx instrument onto which to import the presets and insert the USB pen drive into oneof the available USB ports. Again the USB Disk Connected dialog is automatically displayed.
From the Types dropdown menu, select: Archives.

Page 2-84

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualWith Archives selected, highlight the desired preset backup in the left-hand list under USB Files, forexample: loudness. Click the button Copy −> to copy the backed-up preset file from the USB device
to the new Rx system files.
Click Eject and remove the USB device from the Rx.
Once the presets file(s) are loaded onto the new Rx instrument, they can be used as previously
described in this section.

Disk SpaceThe disk space section shows total size of the internal flash disk, how much is used as a percentage
and how much free space is available.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-85

Network
The Rx Instrument is fully network compatible and has a complete network interface to allow control
of any Rx instrument from any other unit. The Network menu allows the Rx instrument to be
configured as part of a network.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Network menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
System button.

Network Setup
On all Rx instruments the network addressing can be setup using the HDMI® monitor output. On the
Rx 2000 instrument the IP Address can be setup using the Front Panel menus.
Note: If the Rx instrument is turned on without the network connected, you will have to select theRe-connect button to set networking up correctly. This is because the Ethernet connection autosenses whether it has to swap the cable over which means that you can use any Ethernet cablewith the Rx instrument but it also requires the Ethernet connection to be present when startingup.
The IP Address for the Rx instrument can be setup using the Network Setup window on the HDMI®
monitor output. A new Network Setup window can be created by right-clicking with a mouse in thedisplay area and selecting the Network Setup option.
If the DHCP checkbox is enabled, then the Rx instrument will attempt to automatically request an IP
Address from any network it is connected to. This will only work if there is a DHCP server on network.
If your network has static (non-changing) addresses, you will need to see your network administrator
to get an address assigned to your instrument and to get the Subnet mask and default gateway
address. These details can then be entered in the corresponding boxes in the menu. Select eachnumeric box in turn and use the Up / Down cursors to pick the required value.
When the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS Server values have been setup, use
the Apply button to attach the Rx instrument to the network.
On the Rx 2000 instrument, select the System → Network menu to access the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, Default Gateway and DNS Server values. Select the Setup button and edit the settings. Notethat if the DHCP checkbox is enabled, you will not be able to change these values. Once the network
addressing has been setup, select the Apply button to attach the Rx instrument to the network.

Page 2-86

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualRemote Control of the Rx Instrument
To allow remote control of an Rx instrument, you must have the TCP/IP address of the instrument set
and the Remote Control On checkbox must be checked.
The listbox shows a list of current connections made to the instrument. This includes the web browser
connection (127.0.0.1) which may be seen intermittently as the web browser connects every few
seconds and then disconnects again. See the Remote Control documentation available for download
for more information on the protocol and method of control.
The Rx instrument uses a default Port Number of 2100 for remote control access (see the Remote
Control SDK documentation available from the Download section of PHABRIX website.) This port
number may now be changed if it conflicts with other applications in your system.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-87

Info
The specific unit and software option details of the Rx instrument can be viewed using the Info menu.
This shows serial numbers, Rx instrument MAC address and version information. It also allows thedate and time to be set and factory default settings to be recalled. The options security code isentered on this page if options are purchased.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Info menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
System button.
The System Info window on the HDMI® monitor output can also be used to display this information.

Unit Details
The Unit Details section provides information about the systems current software versions.

Changing the Date and Time
Check the Change checkbox under the date and time fields and then use the cursor to move aroundthe date and time. Press OK to edit a field and again to complete the change. When all fields havebeen edited, deselect the Change checkbox and the new date and time will be set.
Note: The date may not be changed while a 30 day trial option is active.

Changing the Date Format
The date format used on the logging screens, etc. may be set using the Format dropdown. Threeformats are available:l

Day-Month-Year (d-m-y)lMonth-Day-Year (m-d-y)lYear-Month-Day (y-m-d)

Network Time Protocol
The Date and Time Setup window allows the selection of Network Time Protocol to control the Rx
system time. Select the Set TIme Automatically checkbox and enter primary and secondary
addresses for the network time then select the Apply button to apply these changes.
Page 2-88

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The primary and secondary address fields can be populated with IP addresses or with a web address(for example: pool.ntp.org).
Note: If the Rx network is set to a static IP address, then the network Default Gateway address
and DNS Server address must have valid addresses.
The system will automatically try and retry the primary and secondary addresses until local systemtime can be synchronized to network time. The system will check every 24 hours to ensure that thesystem time is synchronized.
Deselect the Change checkbox to action the Date and Time change.

Setting LCD Brightness
Use the LCD brightness slider to set the front panel screen brightness.

Setting User Language
The language used to display the menus in may be changed to one of the supported languages.
(Currently only English is supported.)

Changing Options Security Code
When new options are purchased for the Rx instrument a new Security Code will be supplied. This isspecific to this instrument and cannot be used on other units. The security code is entered using theEdit field below the System Option list and is edited by pressing OK and using the menu function
keys. If an incorrect Security code is entered a dialog is displayed. The new Security code will only besaved if it is valid, the old code will be used until a valid code is entered. Once a valid new code has
been entered, the list of options provided by that code will be displayed. The options code is stored
independently to memories and system settings.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-89

Utils
The current status of the hardware modules can be viewed using the Utils menu. This menu displays
details of the Rx instrument’s module (board) operating status and details the system temperature andindividual board voltages.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Utils menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
System button.
The System Status / Board Status window on the HDMI® monitor output can also be used to display
this information.

Dealer Features
This section of the menu details the features that can be used by suppliers of the Rx instrument.
Show Options:
If selected, will enable the features throughout the menu system.
EnableIf selected, allows options to be cleared from the Rx instrument.
Clear Option:
When pressed, removes the selected options from the Rx instrument.

Board (Module)This section of the menu details the Modules that are currently installed in the Rx chassis.
Front:
Displays the hardware details of the front panel board.
CPU:
Displays the hardware details of the CPU Board.
Board 1:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot. 1.
Board 2:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 2.
Board 3:

Page 2-90

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDisplays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 3.
Board 4:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 4.

Hardware Status
This section of the menu shows any hardware errors that have been recorded by the Rx instrument. If
the error count is greater than zero, contact you local dealer for advice.

System TemperatureThis section of the menu displays the current Rx instrument temperature. This information is provided
for diagnostics purposes only.

Voltages
This section of the menu displays the current voltages for the currently selected board in the Board
section of the menu. This information is provided for diagnostics purposes only.

SFP
This section of the menu displays the type of SFP (Small Form Factor Package) module is installed in
the board currently selected board in the Board section of the menu. This information is provided for
diagnostics purposes only.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-91

Engineer
The Engineer menu is used to manage the Rx instrument and allows user access to be setup and theinstallation of new versions of software.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Engineer menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
System button.

Clear Memories
This section of the menu allows the defined users who can access the Rx instrument to be cleared. To
use this function, select the Enable checkbox and press the Clear ALL button. This will clear all of theuser memories.

Default Settings
This section of the menu allows you to reset the Rx instrument back to its default settings. To do this,select the Enable checkbox and press the Set Defaults button and the factory defaults will berecalled. This will not affect the system Security Code or Free Run frequency.

Rear Audio Calibration
The Cal value is use to calibrate the analog circuitry on the CPU Module to ensure that analog audio
signal level matches the digital audio level being produced by the Generator module.

Software UpgradeThis section of the menu allows new software versions to be installed. The Rx instrument may
download and install new versions of software when available. This process is a two-stage process:Download the software and then install it.
Note: On the HDMI® monitor output this controlled from the System Info menu.
1. To download the latest software version, make sure that the network settings are correct andthat the Rx instrument is connected to the internet over the Ethernet connection.
Pressing the Download button will cause the current release of software to
be downloaded from the Phabrix website. This will take a short timedependent on the connection to the Internet. Once the download has
Page 2-92

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualcompleted, the software will be checked for errors before being stored on
the Rx instrument for future installation. If the latest software is alreadypresent on the Rx instrument, no software will be downloaded and amessage will be shown.
Note: Multiple releases of software may be stored on the Rx
instrument, so that you can re-install a previous release if required.
2. To install the downloaded software on the Rx instrument, select the release using the field withreleases listed. The largest number is the latest release. Select the Install button and a confirmation dialog is displayed. Press Yes and the installation will start. This process takes several
minutes to decompress the software, extract the files and then reprogram the hardware. If anerror is given during the installation, retry the installation and or download. Do not switch the Rx
instrument off until an installation has completed correctly.
Once the installation has competed, if Reboot after Install is checked the
Rx instrument will re-start with the new software installed. If not checked
then the instrument should be manually switched off and on again.
Note: As part of the installation procedure, all memories are archived toa backup file and then deleted. They can be restored from the System→ Memories page using the Restore button and selecting thearchive: _Before_Upgrade.
The software release notes can be viewed by selecting the Changes button.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-93

HDMI/SDI Output
HDMI Output
The Rx range of products provide a Monitor output in the form of an HDMI output that can display up
to 16 instrument windows at 1920 x 1080 resolution. This menu also controls the use of the SDI output
on the CPU board and allows the built-in generator to be used.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the HDMI/SDI Output menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding System button.
The Monitor output display can display the presets selected by the Preset Buttons and can becontrolled by a USB mouse and keyboard connected to the Rx instrument.
Note: On the Rx 500 and Rx 1000 instruments, the HDMI Monitor Output is always enabled. But
on the Rx 2000 instrument, however, the Monitor output can be enabled / disabled in the
HDMI/SDI Output menu available from the instrument display on the front of the instrument.
The HDMI® monitor output can only be in the following formats:l1080p, 50, 59.94 or 60l1080i, 50, 59.94 or 60

If the checkbox Lock to Ref is enabled, the HDMI output will be locked to the system’s locking
reference input signal, see the section External Locking Reference.

CPU SDI Output
The built-in video signal Generator on the CPU board (standard on all Rx instruments) provides an SDI
test output. This is tied to the HDMI® monitor output and can only produce test signals in a range ofvideo formats matching those of the HDMI output. If an unrestricted range of test signal video formats
is needed, then either the HDMI out needs to be disabled or an additional Generator module isrequired.
With the HDMI output enabled then the frame rate of the SDI output is limited to be matched to the
HDMI output. The HDMI standard and frame rate combo-boxes will be limited to 1080p 50 / 59 / 60. If
the HDMI output is disabled, the SDI output may be any frame rate.

Page 2-94

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Using SDI output as Test Pattern Generator
The SDI output on the CPU module can be used as a test pattern and audio tone generator. This
output is limited to specific test patterns and can only provide audio tones for Audio Group 1.
Select the required video format, line rate and frame rate from the dropdown menus in the CPU SDI
Output section then select 100% Bars, 75% Bars of CheckField as the test pattern.
The audio source for each channel may be Silence, Fixed tone (a range of fixed frequencies),
Variable tone (set in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz to 23.99 kHz) or White noise.
If the checkbox Lock to Ref is enabled the test pattern will be locked to the system’s locking
reference input signal. See the following section External Locking Reference.

Using HDMI over SDI
If you wish to route the HDMI® monitor output over SDI, select the checkbox SDI in the section
Instrumentation Output.
This will disable the on-board test pattern generator.

External Locking Reference
When using an external locking reference signal, the Rx system will provide the best possible locking
regardless of the locking reference frame rate and the generated frame rate.
When the frame rate of the locking reference is exactly the same as the generated frame rate, there
will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal between them.
When the frame rate of the locking reference and the generated frame rate are divisible (for example
50/25, 60/30, 59.94/23.98) there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal between them.
When there is no relationship between the frame rate of the locking reference and that of thegenerated frame rate (for example a 625/50 locking reference and a 23.98 generated test pattern)then there will be a static lock between them but this will not be consistent.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-95

Logging Menus
Overview
Logging allows events to be detected and recorded for future examination. The events to be logged
can be specified so that unwanted events do not appear in the event log. If a system has a problem
with intermittent signals, the Rx instrument can be connected to that source and can be left for several
days to log any errors. At the end of that period the log can be examined and the time and date ofeach error noted.

Page 2-96

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualEvent Log
The Event Log records events that have triggers set-up in the Log Setup menu.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Events menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Logging button.
Pressing the OK button on the Rx 2000 front panel when the highlight is on the event log page allows
the event log to be scrolled through to view all events in the list. The currently selected event isshown on the event log header.
The event log may be cleared by pressing the button Clear Log button; a confirmation dialog isdisplayed asking the user to confirm the action. A date stamped mark may be inserted into the event
log to allow users to see when a test started or when a significant event happened using the Add
Mark in log button.
Note: The event log displays changes in status only, so if the input is always in error and nevergood, an event will not be shown. To get the full state of the instrument take a look at the current
status together with the event log.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-97

Log Setup
The Log Setup menu allows specific events to be tracked by the Rx instrument. The events to belogged are set up on this page by checking the appropriate Log checkboxes.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Log Setup menu can be displayed by selecting the corresponding
Logging button.

Audio Thresholds
This section allows the thresholds for audio events to be set. If the audio level for a channel is higher
than that specified for the Clip or High fields for the number of seconds specified then an event will
be added to the event log. If the audio level for a channel is lower than that specified for the Quiet or
Muted fields, then an event will be added to the event log. Logging may be limited to specified audio
pairs.

Video Status
This section allows specific video status events to be logged:
Output Standard:
A log event will be added whenever the generator video standard changes.
Reference Status:
A log event will be added whenever the external reference standard changes or theexternal reference input is lost or reappears.
Input Status:
A log event will be added whenever the input video standard changes or if the input is lostor reappears.
EDH / CRC:
A log event will be added whenever a EDH / CRC error state changes. If the EDH / CRC
state is correct, the event will show OK, else it will show FAIL. Separate Luma and Chroma
CRC events may be shown. Note that EDH / CRC events may occur when an SDI signal isconnected or removed.
TRS Errors:
If the number of lines changes or line length changes during a frame, the input video will
be detected as the TRS changing and an event logged. If the signal stays changing only aPage 2-98

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualsingle event will be logged. If the SDI signal has a static line count and line length for fiveseconds, a TRS OK event will be added to the log. This reduces the number of log events
for a bad SDI signal.
Picture CRC
This should only be used for static single frame test patterns (do not use for Zone Plate,
dynamic broadcast signals or CheckField/Pathalogical test patterns which are two frames
long at HD). This can be used to log changes in the CRC for the active picture (a value
which is unique for each test pattern). If the CRC changes and was previously OK an error
is added to the event log. If the CRC is the same as the last frame for five seconds an OK
event will be added to the event log. Thus, if the active picture CRC is continuously changing there will only be one event in the log until the picture remains static when an OK
event will be added.

AES Status
This section allows AES audio errors to be logged:
Errors:A log event will be added whenever the embedded audio error status changes. This may
be due to a Data Block Number error, ECC error or phase error status change. The event
entry will detail which state has changed.
Input Status:
A log event will be added if the AES signal disappears or appears.

Dolby E Status (Requires Dolby E Analysis Option)
This section allows Dolby E errors to be logged.
Errors:Adds an event to the event log when a Dolby E input stream is detected or lost. An event
will also be added if a CRC error is detected in the Dolby E metadata stream. If an error is
detected in the Dolby E stream, it may mean that the Dolby E stream has not been synchronized with the embedded audio clocks.
Timing:Will log if the Dolby E frame timing is outside the Dolby specified Ideal range. A Warning
event will be given if the signal is OK but slightly outside the range and an Error event if it ison an invalid line.
Comn. MetaData:
Will log any changes of the common metadata (Program Configuration, Bit Depth, Frame
Rates)
Prog. Metadata:
Will log any changed program metadata. This can be useful for following changes to a program stream over a long period of transmission.

Logging
This section controls all logging events
Clear
Clears all entries in the event log.
EnablePHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-99

Enables the logging process. If this is not checked, no events will be added to the log. Thisis a simple method of turning off alllogging temporarily.
BeepCauses the Rx will emit a short tone when an Event is added to the log. Note that the beep
will happen even if the Speaker is set to Mute.
SYS Errors
Allows system errors to be displayed in the Event Log if they happen. If you are having
problems with your Rx, checking this box can add events that can help PHABRIX determine the nature of the problem.
System Info
Allows system to report additional internal messages in the Event Log if they happen. If you
are having problems with your Rx instrument, checking this box can add events that canhelp PHABRIX determine the nature of the problem.
Save
Saves the current event log to a text file in the currently specified language. The log file created, logfile.txt may be downloaded using a FTP connection.

Log Time Limit
The time when logging is enabled may be limited by time of day. Logging will start at the specified
start time and end at the specified end time. The specified times must be after the current time. Uncheck the box to log at all times. Logging must be enabled using the checkbox above for this to work.

Page 2-100

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualLog Eye Jitter
The Eye Log Setup menu allows specific Eye and Jitter events to be tracked by the Rx instrument.
The events to be logged are set up on this page by checking the appropriate Log checkboxes.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Log Eye Jitter menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Logging button.

Jitter Thresholds
The jitter level at which an event is added may be set independently for each meter. (Only one meteris provided as standard.) This allows you to set the maximum allowed jitter level and then test forinvalid values over a period of time.
A different jitter threshold may be set for each of the three SDI data rates (SD / HD / 3G) for both Jitter1
and Jitter2. The defaults are the maximum values specified by the SMPTE standard.
Jitter errors are detected within 200 ns and so intermittent peak errors can be detected.

Eye Timings
If checked, these controls will enable logging of invalid timing values. An event will be logged if thevalue exceeds the valid SMPTE range and an event will be logged when the signal becomes valid
again.
Eye measurements are performed using statistical calculations on the waveforms and are thus
performed at a slower rate than jitter measurements. Measurements can take a few seconds tostabilize and this should be taken into account.

Eye Amplitude
If checked, these controls will enable logging of invalid amplitude or overshoot / undershoot values.
An event will be logged if the value exceeds the valid SMPTE range and an event will be logged
when the signal becomes valid again.
Eye measurements are performed using statistical calculations on the waveforms and are thus
performed at a slower rate than jitter measurements. Measurements can take a few seconds tostabilize and this should be taken into account.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-101

Log ANC Status
The Log ANC Status menu allows specific ANC data events to be tracked by the Rx instrument. The
events to be logged are set up on this page by checking the appropriate Log checkboxes.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Log ANC Status menu can be displayed by selecting thecorresponding Logging button.
The Log ANC Status menu allows you to select which ANC packets to log when changes in status
occur (e.g. Present, Checksum Error, Missing, Parity Error). Individual checkboxes are provided todetermine which packet DID/SDID combinations are logged.
See the section Ancillary Packet Status for definitions of these checkboxes.
Select All
Pressing this causes the checkboxes for all packets to be checked.
Select Active
Pressing this causes the checkboxes for all packets currently present to be checked.
Select All
Pressing this causes the checkboxes for all packets to be deselected.
SetupThis allows the user to define and name their own DID/SDID values for an ANC packet
type.

Reset
Clears the state for all packet types and thus a packet that was displayed as previously inerror is shown as OK.

Page 2-102

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSpeaker Menu
Speaker
The Speaker menu controls which audio pair that can be heard on the loudspeakers and headphone
output of the Rx instrument.

Using the Rx 2000 front panel, the Speaker menu can be displayed by selecting the Speaker button.

Speaker / Headphone
The Rx 2000 instrument contains stereo loud speakers and associated stereo headphone socket
which can be connected to any of the audio input or output channels or pairs.
The Mute checkbox allows both signals to be muted.
A volume control is provided to adjust the level to headphones and speaker together. The balance
control can be used to adjust the Left-Right balance for the source being monitored.
The monitored source can be set to the input or output of the Rx instrument and the input and output
sources can be set independently to either a stereo pair or single audio channel.
The Source dropdown is used to select Analyzer, AES Input or Dolby Decoder output as the audio
source. The Analyzer Source is used to select the specific channels of the source that is to be heard.
The speaker can be muted when headphones are plugged in by checking the Mute checkbox.
Note: When listening to an audio source, the Rx system needs the locked to the same reference
as the audio otherwise audio clicks may be heard on the speaker.

Rear Panel Audio
The controls in the Rear Panel Audio section of the menu are used to setup the audio levels of theunbalanced analog audio available on the D-type connector on the CPU module.
The Follows Speaker Gain checkbox, if enabled, will cause the audio level of the analog signal tofollow the level set by the volume control on the front panel of the Rx unit. If the checkbox is notenabled the analog audio level will remain the same regardless of the front panel volume control.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-103

The Follow Speaker Source checkbox if enabled make the rear panel audio the same as the
Speaker / Headphone selection.
The volume slider below the Follows Speaker Gain checkbox can be adjusted to set the nominal
output volume of the analog output signal.
The Source dropdown is used to select Analyzer, AES Input or Dolby Decoder output as the audio
source. The Analyzer Source is used to select the specific channels that is to be routed through torear panel and HDMI audio.
The HDMI/SDI 8ch Output checkbox, if enabled, allows eight audio channels to be routed to the rear
panel / HDMI audio instead of a stereo pair.

Page 2-104

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAdmin Menus
USB Disk Connected Window

If a USB pen drive is plugged into the Rx unit, the USB Disk Connected window is displayed. This
allows items to be copied between the USB root directory and specific Rx folders.
The left-hand pane show the files in the root directory of the USB pen drive and the right-hand paneshows the files in the currently selected Rx folder. The Types dropdown box allows the selection of
the following Rx folders:lSoftware - System operating software (.GZ)

lScreen Captures - HDMI screen captures (.BMP)l

Archives - system archive files (.MEM)l

Loudness - program audio loudness logs (.CSV)l

Pattern NTSC - 720 x 525 test patterns (.PAT)lPattern PAL - 720 x 625 test patterns (.PAT)lPattern 720 YCC - 1280 x 720 YCrCb test patterns (.YC4)l

Pattern 720 RGB - 1280 x 720 RGB test patterns (.RGB)l

Pattern 1080 YCC - 1920 x 1080 YCrCb test patterns (.YC4)l

Pattern 1080 RGB - 1920 x 1080 RGB test patterns (.RGB)l

Pattern 1035 YCC - 1920 x 1035 YCrCb test patterns (.YC4)

lFonts - Generator Ident fonts (.TTF)l

Grabs - Video clips or frames captured using Frame Grab (.GRB)

Files can be deleted from either the USB root directory or the currently selected Rx folder using thetwo delete buttons:<− Delete
Permanently deletes the selected / highlighted file in the USB root directory.
Delete −>Permanently deletes the selected / highlighted file in the USB root directory.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 2-105

Note: Great care must be taken not to delete files used by the Rx operating system. Files can becopied between the USB root directory or the currently selected Rx folder using the two copy
buttons:
Copy −>
Copies the currently selected / highlighted file in the USB root directory to the currently
selected Rx folder.
<− Copy
Copies the currently selected / highlighted file in the selected Rx folder to the USB root directory.
Before the USB pen drive is removed from the Rx unit, select the Eject button to close the session.
This will prevent accidental damage or corruption of the files on the USB pen drive.

Page 2-106

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualHDMI Monitor Output

3

Overview
The Rx range of products provide a Monitor output in the form of an HDMI output that can display up
to 16 instrument windows at 1920 x 1080 resolution. This Monitor output display can display thepresets selected by the Preset Buttons and can be controlled by a USB mouse and keyboard
connected to the Rx instrument.

Note: On the Rx 2000 instrument, the Monitor output can be enable/disabled in the HDMI/SDI
Output menu, available from the Instrument Display on the front of the instrument.
When an HDMI or SDI monitor is connected to the Rx instrument, it will display a Task Bar along thebottom of the screen that shows the currently installed Analyzer and Generator modules. These arecolor coded to match the instrument panels allocated to the selected input/output and module. All of
the instruments that share the same Analyzer or Generator resource have the same color coding.

Clicking on the Input of an Analyzer module will allow different analyzer instrument windows to be
selected for that input. Clicking on the Output of a Generator module will allow different generator
windows to be displayed for that output. Clicking on the System, Logging and Presets menus will
display the corresponding windows.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-1

Display Area
The display area above the Task Bar can display any of the instrument panels that are available with
the installed hardware modules and software options. The instrument panels that are displayed canbe selected from preconfigured, already saved and/or new instrument panels (or windows) createdby right-clicking the mouse.

Locking Reference VITC and LTC
Vertical Interval Timecode (VITC) and Longitudinal Timecode (LTC) present on the analog (625i/50
and 525i/59.94) locking reference signal connected to the REF connector on the rear of the Rx unit
can be displayed on the Task Bar of the HDMI® monitor output.

The locking reference can be selected by pressing the Ref button. This offers Free Run, External
Reference (analog locking reference signal) and SDI inputs.
The System → Time Code Setup menu allows the system’s locking reference input LTC and VITC to
be displayed on the HDMI® monitor output. The line number where the VITC is located on the analog
locking reference signal can be selected using the Line Number field.

Page 3-2

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualManaging the Monitor Output
Closing Open Panels (Windows)
Any open panels can be closed using the X button in the top-right corner of each panel. The currently
selected panel (the one with the blue bar) can be closed by left-clicking the mouse on the Systemmenu and selecting Close Window. The Close ALL Windows function will remove all of the
instrument panels from the display area.
The functions within each Instrument panel on the Monitor Output display can be selected using themouse rather than the Navigation Buttons used with the front panel Instrument Display.

Working with Multiple Analyzers
The analyzer channel that is used for the instrument panels is directly locked to the input of theAnalyzer module itself. Clicking on the Input of an Analyzer module on the task bar will allow different
analyzer instruments windows to be selected for that input. The input to be analyzed can also be
selected from a dropdown list ( sDI1a, FIB1a, sDI1b, FIB1b, sDI2a, etc.)

Note: Analyzer 1 is used by the Front Panel on the Rx 2000 instrument so if the input to analyzer 1
is changed on the Front Panel it will also change the HDMI® monitor output.
Changing an input that has already been assigned to an analyzer will re-assign the input to all of the
instrument panels that share the same analyzer. In addition, an input can only be monitored by one
analyzer channel at a time.
For Dual Link analysis the Link 1 signal must be connected to IN1 BNC connector and the Link 2 signal
must be connected to IN2 BNC connector on the same Analyzer module. Likewise, if using fiber, Link
1 should connect to OPTICAL A and Link 2 should connect to OPTICAL B.

Working with Multiple Generators
When the Rx instrument contains multiple Generator modules, the generator to be controlled can beselected from the dropdown list in the corner of the panel (GEN1, GEN2, etc). Note that the module
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-3

PHRXM-GDL has two outputs (GEN-A and GEN-B) but this is treated as a single Generator as theoutputs are locked together.

Saving Monitor Display Layouts

Elements of the currently displayed Instrument Panels can be saved as presets using the Prst Menu
button on the Task Bar.

The System Presets panel then allows you to select the checkbox HDMI Layout and provide a namefor the preset before it is saved. You can then recall stored presets later using either the Load Preset
menu or the front panel controls of the Rx instrument.

Page 3-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualContext Menus

Right-clicking on the Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope, Lissajous, Eye and Jitter windows will display
context sensitive menus that can be used to control the functions of these instruments.

Instrument Panel Resizing
Instrument panels are created and displayed at sixteenth screen size by default. Specific instruments
such as Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope and Eye waveform can be displayed at quarter screen size.
The Picture and Waveform instruments can also be displayed at 3/4 screen and at native resolution(with 1080i this will be full screen 1920 x 1080).

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-5

Instrument panels of different sizes can be assembled on screen in any combination and these canbe saved as memory presets.
The icon buttons in the top right corner of the instrument panel control the size of the panel:l

1/16th screen size panel:l

1/4 screen size panel:l

Close panel:

Note: The window panel size can also be changed by double-clicking in the instrument area
using the left-hand mouse button.
To create 3/4 size Picture and Waveform, start with a 1/4 size window and drag the bottom rightcorner of the window until it is approximately 3/4 size then release.

Page 3-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGenerator Panels
Overview
Clicking on the Output of a Generator module will allow different generator windows to be displayed
for that output.

Clicking on instrument type title (Generator, Generator Audio 1-4, Generator Audio 5-8, Generator
Reference) allows the generator type to be changed.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-7

Generator VideoThe Rx instrument with a Generator Module installed can create video test signals for all supported
SD and HD SDI output standards including the 3GHz standards at 1080p/50/59/60. It will support
Y,Cr,Cb formats as well as RGB formats.

The Generator Video window is accessed by clicking on a Generator slot on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Generator. This will create a new window panel for the selected output.

Output On
The Output On function activates the output circuitry. On Rx instruments that have dual generator
modules, there is the option to switch on Output 1 (1-On) and Output 2 (2-On) which correspond to thetwo generator outputs.
Note that for Dual Link test pattern generation, both Output 1 and Output 2 must be enabled. The Link
1 signal is produced on the module’s GEN A output and the Link 2 signal is produced on the module’s
GEN B output. Likewise, if a fiber connection is being used the Link 1 signal is produced on OPTICAL
GEN A and the Link 2 signal is produced on OPTICAL GEN B.

Standard
The menus in the Standard section are used to select the desire video output format. The top-left box
selects the basic mode of the Rx instrument and determines whether it is generating normal SD/HD
vide or 3G level A or level B video. Dual streams refer to the ability of the Rx instrument to generate
two separate pictures when transmitting 3G-level B in some formats. Which mode is selected
determines which formats are available. Only valid frame rates for the output standard may be
selected.

Color Format
Currently only YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bit picture formats are supported by the standard product but an Option
may be purchased to enable other color formats. The following color modes may be selected
dependent on line standard selected:

Page 3-8l

YCbCr 422 10 bitl

YCbCr 444 12 bitl

YCbCr 444 10 bit
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manuall

YCbCrA 4444 10 bitl

YCbCr 422 12 bitl

RGB 444 10 bitl

RGBA 4444 10 bitl

RGB 444 12 bit

PatternThis selects the video pattern that is output by the generator. Many standard patterns are provided by
the Rx instrument. You may also upload your own test patterns to the Rx instrument into the Patterns
directory and then select them using the User File option in this field. See the section Rx File
Structure for supported file formats. If a User File has been selected, the i button, beside the file, canbe selected to get information on the file properties. Unsupported file types will be displayed as a
black image. If the video standard is changed while a user file is loaded and there is no file for the
new standard present, a black image will be loaded and the User File blanked.
A bouncing Box may be overlaid on the current test pattern by selecting the Box checkbox.
Color Bars test patterns are used to check that the color gamut of the television system and to ensure
the correct luminance and chrominance levels.

The 100% Color bars test pattern is produced by using combinations of the Red, Green and Blue
primary colors:lWhite (100% R, 100% G, 100% B)

lYellow (100% R, 100% G, 0% B)

lCyan (0% R, 100% G, 100% B)lGreen (0% R, 100 G, 0% B)lMagenta (100% R, 0% G, 100% B)l

Red (100% R, 0% G, 0% B)lBlue (0% R, 0% G, 100% B)

lBlack (0% R, 0% G, 0% B)

The 75% Color bars and 75% Color bars + Red test patterns are produced by using combinations of
the Red, Green and Blue primary colors:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-9lWhite (100% R, 100% G, 100% B)

lYellow (75% R, 75% G, 0% B)

lCyan (0% R, 75% G, 75% B)lGreen (0% R, 75 G, 0% B)lMagenta (75% R, 0% G, 100% B)l

Red (75% R, 0% G, 0% B)lBlue (0% R, 0% G, 75% B)lBlack (0% R, 0% G, 0% B)

Note: For consistency, 75% color bars should always be used when measuring or comparing
jitter levels.

The Tartan bars test pattern is a chequerboard pattern of 75% color bar colors that produces every
combination of color vector change.

The SMPTE Color bars test pattern was developed for the NTSC analog video standard andproduced by using the combinations of the Red, Green and Blue primary colors as used in 75% color
bars.

The SMPTE ARIB STD-B28 Color bars test pattern is an updated version of SMPTE color bars
(developed by the Japanese Association of Radio Industry and Businesses) and standardized as
SMPTE RP 219-2002 and is used to test both 4×3 standard definition and 16×9 high-definition video
signals.

The A/V Delay test pattern and audio tone provided by the Generator module can be used to checkany delay between the video and audio. This animated test pattern provides a constantly moving
Clapper board and corresponding A/V Delay tone when the clapper board reaches the center of thetest pattern. For more information, see the section A/V Delay Analysis (Option: PHRXO-AVD).

Page 3-10

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Multi-burst test pattern is used to check the frequency response of the video path and checkthat it has not been affected by digital processing such as resizing, standards conversion or color
grading. The frequency of each burst will depend on the video format selected. For example:
For SD 720 pixels:
l

0.5 MHz, 1.75 MHz, 2.5 MHz, 3.5 MHz, 4.5 MHz, 5.5 MHz

For HD 1920 Pixels:l

5 MHz, 7.25 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz, 30 MHz

The Bowtie test pattern is used to check the alignment of the luminance and chrominancecomponents through television equipment.
The Ramps and Steps test patterns are used to check the linearity of television equipment to ensurethat there have been no digital bit level artifacts such as rounding errors introduced that may cause
banding on the television pictures.

The Luma Ramp test pattern is used to check the linearity of the luminance component. This test
pattern exercises all of the discrete digital video levels including illegal values below video black andabove peak white.

The Legal Ramp test pattern is used to check the linearity of the luminance component. This test
pattern exercises all of the discrete digital video levels from video black to video white, excluding
illegal values.

The Valid Ramp test pattern is used to check the linearity of the Y (luminance), Cr (R-Y) and Cb (B-Y)
components. This test pattern exercises all of the discrete digital video levels of these components,
excluding illegal values.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-11

The Gray Bar - 5 test pattern is used to check for non-linear distortion in the luminance component.
The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 20% steps. Typically non-linearity will be seen as aloss of grayscale distinction.

The Gray Bar - 11 test pattern is used to check for non-linear distortion in the luminance component.
The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 10% steps.

The Gray Bar - 5 Vertical test pattern is used to check for differential gain distortion in the luminancecomponent line by line. The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 20% steps. Typically, nonlinearity will be seen as a loss of grayscale distinction.

The Gray Bar - 11 - Vertical test pattern is used to check for differential gain distortion in theluminance component line by line. The bars range from 100% white to 0% black in 10% steps.

The Pluge (picture line-up generation equipment) test pattern is used to adjust the black level andcontrast of a video monitor. The pattern consists of vertical luminance bars for white, mid-gray, blackand super-black.
The Color Field test patterns are used to provide primary colors (such as 100% red, green, blue, cyan,
magenta and yellow) and monochrome luminance levels to check for calibration and banding effects
caused by encoding / decoding processes.

Page 3-12

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualIf Color Field is the selected test pattern, another control selects which color to generate. Three user
definable custom colors may be defined using the −> button. Custom colors are edited using the RedGreen-Blue sliders. When setting the color using the RGB sliders, the YCbCr values will show thevalues for the current color space. When setting the color using the YCbCr sliders, the RGB values willshow the values for the current color space.
The Zone Plate (below) is a two-dimensional linear frequency sweep test pattern used to check theeffect of filtering, sub-Nyquist, sampling, processing standards conversion and display. Whenever animage is re-sized or re-sampled there is a strong probability that the resultant image will suffer fromone or more of the artefacts such as aliasing / moire, softening (caused by reduced frequency
response) and ringing / halos.

The Zone Plate test patterns are used to check that the horizontal and vertical frequency response of
the video path is not affected by television equipment.
The zone plate selector will contain three user-customizable zone plates as well as several
predetermined zone plates. The −> button displays a dialog which allows the parameters of the zone
plate to be adjusted for the custom zone plates. Any of the preset zone plates may be copied to thecustom zone plates to act as a starting point for a new zone plate. As the zone plate settings are
stored in user memories several custom zone plates are available:
Moving Zone-2H:
A moving zone plate centered on the screen.
Static Zone-2H:
A static zone plate centered on the screen from DC to the Nyquist frequency at left/rightedges.
Static Zone-2V:
A static zone plate centered on the screen from DC to the Nyquist frequency at top/bottom
edges.
Sweep-Horiz:
A horizontal sweep from DC to Nyquist frequency horizontally.
Sweep-Vert:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-13

A vertical sweep from DC vertically.
Grating-50kHz:
A 50 kHz frequency sine wave when using an HD output.
Grating-1MHz@HD:
A 1 MHz frequency sine wave when using an HD output.
Grating-5MHz@HD:
A 5 MHz frequency sine wave when using an HD output
Custom:Allows editing of Custom zone plate settings. Three custom zone plates can be set-up andcan also be copied from existing presets using the Copy To button.

Mode:
Sets which type of Zone Plate is being produced. It may be Zone Plate (circular pattern)
Grating (Linear horizontal or vertical grid) Sweep (Frequency sweeps from start to end Frequency)
Start Phase:
Sets the start phase of the sine wave generated by the zone plate generator and is set indegrees from 0 to 360 degrees
Phase Rate:
Used to set the rate of change of phase of the sine wave and thus changes the speed thatthe zone plate moves at. It is specified in degrees per frame.
Angle:
Changes the angle of the zone plate and thus can change a horizontal sweep into a vertical sweep or rotate an elliptical zone plate pattern.
XScale/Start Freq:
Sets the horizontal scale of grating patterns or the start value of the zone plate sweep frequency.
YScale/End Freq:
Sets the vertical scale of grating patterns or the end value of the zone plate sweep frequency.
The Pathological test patterns are used to check that the phase-locked loop circuitry used to decode
SDI data can recover/regenerate the SDI sample clock under worst-case conditions.

Page 3-14

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

EQ Test is a pathological signal that generates long run-lengths of 1s or 0s (for example 19 samples of
0 followed by a single 1) to test the accuracy of phase lock loop circuitry that recovers/the sample
clock from the SDI data.

PLL Test is a pathological signal that generates a pattern of 2 consecutive 1s followed by 2
consecutive 0s repeated for the whole pattern. This is the worst-case to test phase lock loop circuitrythat recovers/regenerates the sample clock from the SDI data.

Check Field is a pathological signal that generates long run-lengths of 1 s or 0 s to test the accuracyof phase lock loop circuitry that recovers/regenerates the sample clock from the SDI data. This is acombination of the EQ Test pattern and the PLL Test Pattern.
If Check field/Pathological is selected when a dual-stream format has also been selected, both
outputs will be forced to check field due to internal hardware limitations. If another pattern is selected,
the Check field pattern will be de-selected. The exceptions to this are when Color Field or Zone Plate
are selected as test patterns.
The Check field/Pathological/PLL Check/EQ Check patterns will only look like the picture above
when a YCbCr 422 10 bit color mode is selected. Other color modes will have different pictures but
still create the SDI datastream required by SMPTE.
EDH (Error Detection and Handling):
If the output signal is SD (PAL-625 or NTSC-525) the insertion of EDH information may beswitched on or off. Note: EDH is automatically active for HD.
Errors:This field enables the insertion of CRC or EDH errors into the video signal. This allows
checking of third party error detection circuitry. In SD there is one EDH ancillary packet per
field. When errors are being inserted every EDH value gets deliberately corrupted. This
creates one error count per field. (Actually one AP error and one FF error). In HD there is a
CRC value calculated for each line. When errors are being inserted the CRC value on line
number 1 gets deliberately corrupted. This creates one CRC error count per frame. There isalso the option to generate CRC errors (not SD EDH errors) on only the switching line infield 1 which can be used to check that any downstream equipment ignores errors on
switching lines.
SMPTE 352:
This checkbox allows the SMPTE 352 Payload ID field to be inserted into the video output
stream. The state of this checkbox is stored separately for SD, HD and HD-3G line standards. Note that for HD-3G line standards the Payload ID should be turned ON.
Ident:
A picture or text Ident may be set to identify an SDI source. This Ident can be switched on
or off from this page but changing the text, font, or bitmap is performed by selecting theEdit button to display the Ident dialog. An overview of the Ident is displayed beside theEdit button.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-15

Note: If the zone plate or color field are selected, text cannot be overlaid over them. A smaller
version of the video output signal is displayed on this page with any overlaid ident.

This dialog allows selection of either a user-defined bitmap picture which has been downloaded into
the Idents directory of the Rx instrument or user defined text.
For both types, the position of the ident can be set to one of Top-Left, Top-Center, Top-Right, LeftCenter, Center-Screen, Right Center, Bottom-Left, Bottom-Center, Bottom-Right. When text ident isused, the font, size and color can be specified. Several fonts are built in to the Rx instrument, othertrue-type (.ttf) fonts may be downloaded as required.

When editing text, the keyboard above is displayed to allow easy editing. Move the cursor to selectthe key to press and then press Ok to select. The Shift menu key causes the next keyboard tochange to shift mode for the next key press.
The [Caps Lock] menu key locks the keyboard in all capitals mode. The [Alt Gr] key shows any
language dependent alternate keys that may be pressed. Several country keyboard styles areprovided. Note that not all fonts support all non-English characters.

A/V Delay Using the Generator (Option: PHRXO-AVD)
The A/V Delay option (PHRXO-AVD) provides an end-to-end solution to measure the differential
delay between Audio and Video signals through a broadcast system.
If using the Rx as video source, open a Generator Video window , select an HD standard and thenselect A/V Delay from the Pattern dropdown menu to select the in-built EBU compatible pattern,available as an option on an AG or AGE Generator module. If desired, you can simulate a positive or
negative delay by adjusting the number of frames in the Audio Delay field. An audio delay offset withrespect to video of up to +/− 40 frames can be applied in increments of one frame. The AV Delay
audio pulse can be inserted on up to 16 embedded SDI audio channels, which can be analyzed
simultaneously.

Page 3-16

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualNext, set-up the audio signal in a generator Output Audio window. Select A/V Delay from thedropdown menu for one of the 16 available audio channels you would like to monitor, for example,
group 1, pair 1, left Channel. You can choose to set the other channel of the pair to silent, fixed tone,etc., as required to listen to the A/V Delay tone.

If you want to listen to the audio signal, you can open an Audio Monitoring window, set the Source
dropdown to Analyzer and select the appropriate audio group pair for monitoring. Either connect
headphones to the unit to listen to the A/V Delay audio signal or listen over the built-in loudspeakers.

Frame Grab Playout
Each Generator module within the system can play-out a video clip captured and saved using the
Picture Frame Grab function. This can be used to playout generated test clips as well as video clips
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-17

captured when an error condition occurred.

The Frame Grab playout mode can be enabled by selecting Frame Grab from the test patterns
dropdown list.
Any video clip recorded using Frame Grab will appear in the dropdown list.
Once a video clip has been selected and loaded the transport controls can be used to play, stop, step
forward and reverse.
lStep backward through the selected video clip frame by frame ( <lStop playing the video clip ( ⏹ )lStep forward through the selected video clip frame by frame ( > )lPlay the video clip repeatedly ( ►).

The displayed video clip will be output by way of the Generator video output connection along with
its audio and SMPTE 352 payload.
Note: The Generator video format and frame rate will automatically be set to that of the video clip
being played.

Note: The Box and Ident functions cannot be used when a video clip is selected for playout.

Page 3-18

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGenerator Reference
The Rx instrument with a Generator Module installed can create video test signals that are either freerunning or locked to a studio reference signal. The Genlock menu is used to select an external
locking reference or set the instrument to free run.

The Generator Reference window is accessed by clicking on a Generator slot on the monitor output
task bar and selecting Generator Reference. This will create a new window panel for the selected
output.
llll

When using an external locking reference signal, the Rx system will provide the best possible
locking regardless of the locking reference frame rate and the generated frame rate.
When the frame rate of the locking reference is exactly the same as the generated frame rate,
there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal between them.
When the frame rate of the locking reference and the generated frame rate are divisible (forexample 50/25, 60/30, 59.94/23.98) there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal
between them.
When there is no relationship between the frame rate of the locking reference and that of thegenerated frame rate (for example a 625/50 locking reference and a 23.98 generated test pattern) then there will be a static lock between them but this will not be consistent.

Source
The generator may be locked to an input reference which may be either the reference input which isa Bi-Level / Tri-Level sync or may be locked to the video input. Alternatively, the generator may free
run.

Delay
The test patterns generated by the Generator module can be delayed or advanced with respect tothe locking reference input using the Lines and Pixel values.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-19

Generator Output Audio Menu
The Rx instrument with a Generator Module installed can embed an audio signal on all 16 embedded
audio outputs. The Output Audio-1 and -2 menus control which audio channels, pairs or groups havetest tones applied and the type of tone.

The Output Audio-1 window is accessed by clicking on a Generator slot on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Output Audio 1. This will create a new window panel for the selected output.

Group nEach of the four groups may be separately enabled. When enabled, the source and level of eachchannel in a pair can be selected.

SourceThe source for each channel may be set to any of the following:
Silence:
Digital silence at −144 dB with 24-bit
Fixed Tone:
A range of fixed frequencies from 100 Hz up to 20 kHz
Variable Tone:
Where the frequency can be set in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz to 23.99 kHz)
Noise:White noise
A/V Delay:
Providing a 1 kHz pulse tone centered about the clapper board animation of the AV Delay
Test pattern
AES In:Routing the audio from the CPU AES input if present.
DolbyGen:
If the Dolby Generation option has been purchased, the source may be set to DolbyGen at
which time the other channel in the audio pair is also set to DolbyGen and gain control disabled. The generated Dolby metadata is defined in the System - Dolby Generator menu.
DolbyDecode1:

Page 3-20

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualIf the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the decoded Dolby audio channels Dolby-1 to
Dolby-8 from Decoder 1.
DolbyDecode2:
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the decoded Dolby audio channels Dolby-1 to
Dolby-8 from Decoder 2.
AES:
If a 4AES module is installed along with a Generator module then the AES audio from the
AES module can be routed to the Generator module SDI output. The specific 4AES module
input channels can be selected from the source dropdown list in the form A-L where A
indicates input AES Input A and L indicates the left channel.

Inv
This checkbox phase-inverts the audio signal to allow checking of third-party audio mixing.

Link
This links the left and right channels of a pair so that changing the level on the left-hand channelchanges the level on the right-hand channel.

Master
The master level sets the 0dB level for all the embedded audio channels. Using the dropdown menu,
the user can select an integer value between –18 and –24 dBFS. This feature allows all embedded
outputs to be adjusted together as well as giving a simple method to change from −18 dB to −24 dB
based standard levels. The Master level will not adjust the level of an AES input signal selected forembedding on SDI output.

4AES Module

The Output Audio window is accessed by clicking on a 4AES Module Generator slot on the monitor
output task bar and selecting Output Audio 1. This will create a new window panel for the selected
output.
The PHRXM-4AGE module has four bi-directional AES digital audio pairs (IO_A, IO_B, IO_C and IO_
D).
When configured as inputs this allows the audio pairs to be routed to the Audio Meter, Lissajous andLoudness instruments for the 4AES module.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-21

When configured as outputs the audio pairs can be audio tones (including Fixed Tone, Variable Tone,
Silence or Noise ) or selected embedded audio channels from an Analyzer SDI video input or loop
through copies from another AES input.
The mode of operation can be selected from the Generator Audio Groups menu the for each audio
pair using the dropdown list (displaying A Out, A In or B Loop).
When # Out is selected the chosen AES pair will be configured as an output. The type of output isselectable from the dropdown list (displaying Fixed Tone, Variable Tone, Noise, etc.) The embedded
audio from any Analyzer SDI video can be selected from the source dropdown list to allow it to berouted to the AES module output. Each audio channel that is output by the 4AES module can beselected from a specific SDI input, audio group and left/right channel.
When # In is selected the chosen AES pair will be configured as an input and therefore allow theaudio from the AES connector to be viewed on the Audio Meter, Lissajous display or Loudness meter.
When # Loop is select the chosen AES pair will be configured as an output with a copy of thecorresponding AES input.
Note: If DolbyGen is selected as the Source for any AES output, the Dolby Generator in the
System menu needs to be set to External reference otherwise the Dolby audio packet may not
be embedded into the AES stream in the correct place.

Page 3-22

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAnalyzer Panels
Overview
Clicking on the Analyzer module button on the task bar will allow different analyzer instruments
windows to be selected for that input.

Clicking on instrument type title (Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope, etc.) allows the waveform type tobe changed. Clicking on the input allows the input to the analyzer to be changed.

The AES4 module provides audio-only analysis tools and audio-only generation tools. Pressing theleft-hand AES button (input) will display the analyzer functions that are available and pressing on theright-hand AES button (output) will display the Output audio configuration menu.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-23

Picture
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can display the selected input in the form of apicture monitor.

The Picture window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar andselecting Picture. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Selecting the white arrow in the top corner of the window will show or hide the menu controls. Rightclicking on the image will also allow menus to be selected.
The picture displayed is down-converted from the video source. The Picture view will automaticallypresent the vertical blanking area when the picture cursor is positioned there.

Right-clicking with the mouse in the image area will display contextual menus that can be used to
select and setup the different functions on the Picture window.
Page 3-24

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualBlue:Show only the Blue color component of the picture.
Aspect Ratio:
The aspect ratio of PAL (625 lines) and NTSC (525 lines) may be set to either 4:3 or 16:9 as
required for the source signal. HD signals are always set to an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Timecode Display
ANC time code can be displayed in the active picture area when turned on. Selecting the arrow to theright of the Time Code field allows this window to be displayed in three different positions and sizes.

The Time Code Displays window also controls display of time code information on the HDMI®
monitor output. Time code is available on the locking reference input and on each video input that isanalyzed.

Safe Area Generator
The Picture instrument includes four independent safe area generators that can be selected for Safe
Action Area-1, Safe Title Area-1, Safe Action Area-2 and Safe Title Area-2. Selecting the arrow to
the right of the Safe Area checkbox allows the required safe areas to be setup and selected.

These can be selected from standard SMPTE, ARIB TR-B.4, EBU or ITU templates for 4:3, 14:9, 16:9 or
aspect ratios or can be user-defined.

Sample, Line and Field Selection
Sample:Specify the current sample for analysis. Picture cursor sample position.
Line:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-25

Specify the current line for analysis. Picture cursor line position.
Field:(Interlaced formats only.) This control selects the field for analysis. If the current line is in
Field 1, changing the field will change to the same line in Field 2. The field number willchange to show the correct field for the current line number.

Picture Cursors and Zoom

Enabling the Cursor checkbox makes the picture cursor position (Line and Sample) visible in the
picture window. Clicking anywhere on the active picture or VANC region will place a visible crosshair
there, and update the analyzed Line and Sample fields in the Picture instrument.
The picture cursor is common to the Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope (line only), and Data View
instruments. So updating its position (Line or Sample) in one instrument will automatically update it
across them all. A line of interest can be analyzed in the Waveform and Vectorscope in single line
mode (when the All checkbox is disabled.)
Moving the cursor into the VANC region reveals any ancillary data present there as if it were picture
data. The specific packet data words present can be inspected closely with the SDI data option
toolset (PHRXO-DATA).

Selecting the Zoom function will expand the displayed image (within a 1/16 or 1/4 sized instrument
window) to native resolution.
If the Cursor is used then the expanded image will be placed about the selected cursor position.
Clicking and dragging on the image will move the zoomed image.

Closed Caption / Subtitle Display
If the closed caption option is installed, the Caption Options menu allows the selection of thefollowing subtitle formats:

Page 3-26

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

l

WST

l

OP42

l

OP47

l

EIA 608l

EIA 706

Closed caption text will be displayed in the image area as defined by the closed caption formatting
information relevant to the closed caption type.

Closed caption is the name given to text-based, encoded and hidden information that is optionallydisplayed on screen by the user in America, Canada and Australia. In Europe this information is called
subtitles. Europe and Australia use systems based on the standard WST (World System Teletext)
format although they are named differently. The Closed Caption system used in America and Canada
is technically a completely different system to WST.
The IEA 608 closed caption system (used in the USA and Canada for standard definition video)
embeds a data packet on line 21/284 of the SDI 525i video framework and allows up to 32 charactersper video frame and up to 4 different caption streams (called channels in this system).
The EIA 708 closed caption system (used in the USA and Canada for HD video) embeds informationin the VANC area of the HD-SDI video framework and uses DID 61 for the Caption Distribution Packet(CDP). EIA 708 typically supports up to six different closed caption streams (called services in thissystem) although theoretically this system supports up to 63 services.
The WST subtitle system (used in Europe for HD-SDI) embeds information in the VANC area of the
SDI video framework, typically on line 21/334. This system theoretically supports up to 2047 (0x7FF
Hex pages) different closed caption pages. Typically, however, the number of pages is limited tothose numbered 100 to 199, 200 to 299, etc up to 800 to 899. In Europe the common practice is touse pages 888, 889 and 890. In Australia however page 801 is used.
The OP42 closed caption system (used in Australia for analog 625i standard definition video) is a
specific subset of the functionality of the WST system and embeds information on line 21/334. Thissystem supports only a few different closed caption pages with page 801 is used as the first page.
The OP47 closed caption system (used in Australia for HD-SDI) is basically a wrapper around the WST
system that allows it to be embedded in the VANC area of the SDI-HD video framework using DID 43.
This system theoretically supports up to 2047 (0x7FF Hex pages) different closed caption pages.
Typically, however, the number of pages is limited. In Australia page 801 is used as the first page.
When configuring an Rx instrument with the closed caption option, first establish which closed caption
system is being used or is present on the video signal. The ANC Status display (available with the
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-27

HD/SD-SDI Data Analyzer and Ancillary Packet Analyzer option) will show IEA 608, IEA 708 and OP47
data packets that appear in the vertical ancillary area of the SDI framework. The corresponding
closed caption can then be selected from the Captions setup menu:l

The Show checkbox, when enabled, displays the chosen closed caption type on the image.

l

The Auto Reset checkbox is for test purposes.

l

The 608 Channel numeric value allows the specific 608 closed caption channel to be selected.

l

The 708 Service numeric value allows the specific 708 service to be selected.

l

The WST Page value allows the appropriate World Subtitle page to be selected.

A/V Delay Analysis (Option: PHRXO-AVD)
The A/V Delay Analysis option (PHRXO-AVD) provides an end-to-end solution to measure thedifferential delay between Audio and Video signals through a broadcast system, when used together
with a suitable A/V Delay Generator. For more information on using the Rx Generator with A/V Delay,
see the section A/V Delay Using the Generator (Option: PHRXO-AVD).
The analyzer tool provides a real-time visual and audible indication of the differential delay between
the video and the selected audio channel pair(s) and is compatible with EBU and Lawo V_line
AV Sync measurement patterns. The Rx enables you to monitor up to 16 audio channels
simultaneously. The Rx EBU-compatible test pattern displays a constantly moving clapper board andsounds an A/V delay tone when the clapper board reaches the center of the test pattern.
To analyze A/V delay, open a Picture window displaying a compatible pattern, which may be either
an EBU Tech 3305 AV Sync clapperboard pattern or the Lavo V_Line AV Sync measurement pattern.
In the Picture side menu, select the AV Del checkbox to display a screen overlay of the actual
A/V Delay value(s) on the selected audio channel(s). To configure the audio channels for analysis or
select the displayed pattern type, select the AV Del menu to open the AV Delay Analysis Setup
dialog. Use the Pattern Type dropdown to select either EBU or Lawo options. In addition, you canalso use this dialog to select which of the 16 possible audio channels you would like to analyze.

Page 3-28

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualIf an Audio Metering window is also open, you will see the periodic audio pulse on the meter for theselected audio channel.
You can use A/V Delay analysis with all supported video formats and frame rates on SDI interfaces.

Native Resolution Picture Display
The Picture instrument can now be displayed on the HDMI monitor at native resolution up to 1920 x
1080. A 1920 x 1080 image source will be displayed at full screen size. Smaller images formats suchas SD (720 x 625 or 720 x 525) and HD image formats such as 1280 x 720 will be displayed at actual
pixel size on the HDMI monitor.
The Picture can be displayed as full size by clicking on the image or by selecting the icon in the top
right corner of the window. When expanded it will cover the underlying instruments and when it isreduced the underlying instruments will be displayed. The Picture can also be displayed at 3/4 screen
size by dragging the bottom right corner of a 1/16 or 1/4 Picture.

AFD/WSS and V-Chip Monitoring
Both AFD/WSS and V-Chip monitoring is displayed in the top right corner of the image to allow quality
control of program material to be performed prior and during transmission. These can be enabled byusing the Picture contextual menu (right-click in the image area).

Frame Grab
Each Analyzer module allows a video clip to be captured for analysis and playback. The video clip
contains the full SDI data frame including video data, metadata and audio data. The video clip can berecorded manually or can be triggered by different events such as EDH and CRC errors. When Frame
Grab record mode is selected a rolling record buffer (holding approximately 70 SD frames or 13 HD
frames) is started so that the full SDI data frames before and after the trigger point are available foranalysis. When a trigger is received the record buffer is frozen to provide a video clip.
Once a video clip has been captured it can be played-back and navigated frame by frame using thetransport controls within the image area of the Picture instrument. The Rx instruments can be used toanalyze the SDI data frame-by-frame to display errors at the trigger point and the status of the SDI
frames before and after the trigger point.
The captured video clip can be saved for future reference and previously saved clips can berestored.
To capture a video clip manually, select the record button to start the record buffer (RECORDING) andthen press the T button to stop the record buffer (CAPTURED).
To capture a video clip from a trigger event, setup the event to be captured in the setup menu, press
the record button to start the record buffer (RECORDING). As soon as the trigger event has occurred,
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-29

CAPTURED is displayed to indicate that event has been captured as a video clip. The play, step
forward and step backward buttons can then be used to navigate through the SDI data frames.

The Frame Grab controls are displayed by selecting the Grab checkbox in the Picture instrument
menu.
The arrow box to the right of the Grab checkbox is used to setup triggers and save video clips using
the following controls:lManual trigger for video clip capture ( T )lStart record buffer ( ● )lStep backward through the captured video clip frame by frame ( < )lStop playing the captured video clip ( ■ )lStep forward through the captured video clip frame by frame ( > ).

lPlay the captured video clip repeatedly ( ►).

The text box to the right of the transport controls displays the current status of the record buffer:l

BUFFERING – indicates that the record buffer is filling up.

lRECORDING – indicates that the record buffer is actively recording the SDI datastream.

l

CAPTURED –indicates that a video clip has been successfully captured.

l

PLAYING – indicates that the current content is being played as a video clip.

l

13/13 (T:7) – indicates the current frame/total number of frames and the trigger frame number.
This text will turn red when the currently displayed frame is the trigger frame.

Selecting the arrow box to the right of the Grab checkbox in the Picture menu will display the Frame
Grab Setup menu.
Within the Setup menu, the Frame Grab Triggers section allows the events that trigger the video clip
capture to be selected.

Page 3-30

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manuall

EDH AP – will trigger when the SD-SDI Error Data Handling Active Picture flag status changes.

l

EDH FF - will trigger when the SD-SDI Error Data Handling Full Field flag status changes.

l

CRC Y1 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 1 luminance data is set.

l

CRC C1 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 1 chrominance data is set.

l

CRC Y2 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 2 luminance data is set.

l

CRC C2 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 2 chrominance data is set.

l

CRC AP1 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 1 active picture changes.

l

CRC AP2 – will trigger when the cyclic redundancy check for link 2 active picture changes.

l

ANC Y1 – will trigger when the link 1 luminance ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

l

ANC C1 – will trigger when the link 1 chrominance ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

l

ANC Y2 – will trigger when the link 2 luminance ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

l

ANC C2 – will trigger when the link 2 chroma ANC stream checksum error flag is set.

The Pos value is used to position the trigger point in the required position within the rolling record
buffer to select the proportion of frames before and after the trigger point.
The Control section of the setup menu is a repeat of the transport controls available in the Picture
instruments.
The File section of the setup menu allows the current video clip in the record buffer to be saved theRx file system (\FCAP folder) and allows previously saved video clips to be restored into the record
buffer.
Save:
Saves the current video clip in the record buffer in the \FCAP folder use the name enteredin the text box to the right of the Save button. The Single checkbox, if enabled, will cause
on the current frame of the video clip to be saved.
Load:
Allows a previously saved video clip to be restored to the record buffer. The dropdown list
to the right of the Load buttons allows the required video clip to be selected. As video clips
are selected in this list, their details will be displayed at the bottom of the menu.
Delete:Allows the currently selected video clip in the dropdown list to be deleted.
The current progress of the Save or Load operation is displayed in the Progress thermometer.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-31

Note: Video clips can be exported and imported using the USB copy menu.

Page 3-32

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAnalyzer Gamut Monitor
The Rx Instrument, with an Analyzer Module installed, can monitor the selected input for the presenceof gamut violations in the Picture monitor, when Gamut monitoring is enabled in the Gamut
instrument. Areas of the picture, where the Gamut exceeds the configured threshold, can behighlighted on the Picture display using a selectable Zebra Bars overlay.

The Gamut window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar andselecting Gamut. This will create a new window panel displaying the Gamut meters, color component
levels and any error counts.
Note: Gamut monitoring can be enabled on the latest variants of the A/AE or AG/AGE interface
cards. After upgrading to version 9.09, if you notice that the Gamut features from an earlier
version are unavailable and you have no access to the Gamut instrument described in thissection, either revert to the previous version or contact PHABRIX Support for information on
upgrading the Analyzer interface board.
The Gamut monitor provides gamut bars (or meters) for both the YCbCr and RGB color spaces, which
operate on 444 sampled pixel data regardless of the video standard. The gamut bars are based on
the analysis of unfiltered 444 RGB and YCbCr pixel data and indicate the maximum and minimum
values detected in the active picture over the period of one frame or field.
A Gamut Error (Err) Mode can be selected from either the EBU R103, Legal or Custom modes. The
Legal mode monitors the Gamut limits according to SMPTE Narrow Range definitions.
Gamut meter bars are colored as follows:lllGreen: Gamut measurement lies within SMPTE narrow range levels (standard SDI range 64940 (GBRY), 64-960 (CbCr))
Yellow: Gamut measurements exceed SMPTE narrow range but lie within EBU R103 control
range
Red: Gamut measurements exceed the EBU R103, Legal and / or Custom control range and are
in error.

The active green gamut meter bars have been selected (either by Gamut mode default (R103 or
Legal) or in a Custom setup) to contribute to the gamut error counts displayed in the Errors section of
the instrument. If a Gamut bar is deselected in the Setup dialog, then it is displayed in gray with theyellow and red areas still present and active. The red and yellow areas at the top or bottom of a

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-33

Gamut Bar informs the operator that gamut errors are occurring for that color component but are notbeing included in the error reports.
Zebra Bars can be enabled to overlay selectable cross-hatching patterns onto the Picture image tohighlight areas in violation of the Gamut thresholds.
When gamut violations are detected, errors are displayed as a percentage of the picture in error(Percent), the number of pixels in error (Pixels) and a cumulative Count of detected frames or fields inerror. A Reset button enables the reported errors and elapsed monitoring time to be cleared back to
zero.
Note: On starting the Gamut instrument, if the video signal is not immediately registered by the
gamut bars, toggle the Gamut Err Enable checkbox to display the signal.

Gamut measurements are color-coded as follows:lGamut GBR and YCbCr minimum / maximum values: Always Whitel

Gamut error reports for Percent, Pixels and total Count:lGamut in error (Percent, Pixels, Count): Redl

Following reset: White

The following parameters are available in the sidebar menu to change the gamut monitoring
configuration:

Gamut Error (Err) Mode
Note: As a result of possible mathematical limitations in the conversion from YCbCr 422 to RGB
444 it is not recommended to use the RGB Gamut meters to monitor for exact values in a YCbCR
422 input.
Select one of the following Gamut error monitoring modes:
l

R103

l

Legal

l

CustomFor R103 Gamut Error Mode, the processor provides picture gamut error detection using the default
settings outlined in EBU Technical Recommendation R103. In this mode the video data for the RGB
and Y components are monitored for levels less than −5% and greater than +105%. Each of themonitored channels (Y, R, G, B) may have a low-pass filter inserted with the filter coefficients: 1/16, 2/16,
3/16, 4/16, 3/16, 2/16, 1/16 per component as required by R103. The resultant filtered gamut error bits Y,
R, G, B, are combined to create a single pixel error indicator.
Note: EBU R103 recommended filtering is applied horizontally but not vertically.
For Legal Gamut Error Mode, the processor provides picture gamut error detection using the default
settings within SMPTE narrow range. A low-pass filter is not available, by default, for this mode.
The Custom Gamut Error Mode becomes active when any of the default settings for either R103 or
Legal modes are changed in the Gamut setup dialog. The Custom setup persists until another change
is made. Custom modes can also be saved as Presets. For more information, see the section Gamut
Custom Mode.

Page 3-34

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualFor all Gamut Error Modes, the ratio of the number of pixels in error compared to the total number ofactive pixels in the monitored video standard is computed per video frame or field and is displayed asa percentage in the GUI. Frames containing errors above the configured percentage threshold(Pixels % in the Setup dialog) are considered in error and are logged when Gamut Logging is enabledin the Setup dialog.
An error Count accumulates the number of frames (progressive) or fields (interlaced) in error since thelast reset. The Count is displayed in red font if more than one frame or field is identified as containing
gamut error .
If the percentage of pixels in error exceeds a threshold, then the video frame is considered to have aVideo Frame Gamut Error. These errors can be logged in the Event Log when Gamut Logging isenabled in the Gamut Setup dialog.If the number of Video Frame Gamut is greater than one, then theCount is displayed in a red font. To summarize:lA frame error is logged if the percentage of pixels in error exceeds the threshold default value,the EBU R103 alarm threshold at which 1% of the active image is in error.

The Gamut monitor runs continuously, once enabled, and can be reset.
See the section Gamut Setup for information on configuring the Gamut bars.

Zebra Bars Mode
A Zebra overlay generator provides a layer for all gamut modes, which can be superimposed on topof the picture window to highlight areas of gamut error. The overlay may be configured either tofollow the R103 pixel error detector (YGBR) the Legal pixel error detector (YCbCrGBR) or any
combination of the individual component pixel error processors in Custom mode. The Zebra Bars
Mode indicator displays the current gamut component being monitored. For example, in R103 mode,
it will display YGBR, or, if using the Custom mode, with Zebra bars active only on the R component,
then Zebra Bars Mode will display R.
An additional monochrome setting for video is provided to enhance the visibility of the zebra overlay.
Monochrome mode can be useful to spot a single pixel that might be in error, for example, there may
be a faulty pixel on the camera sensor. The Zebra Red/Black overlay works well to highlight gamut
errors when the image is set to monochrome display. Zebra visibility and monochrome settings arealso part of the picture window configuration.
The Zebra Bars settings are as follows:l

Zebra Display: Enabled or disabledlZebra Type: White/Black, White/Dim, Red/Black, Red/Dim.

The following image shows the use of different zebra mode overlays on a video input to the Picture
window.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-35

Page 3-36

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGamut Errors Display
Gamut errors are displayed if the YCbCr or RGB levels exceed the following thresholds for the various
selectable scales:
Gamut Monitoring Mode R103:
Scale:

Decimal

%IRE

Hex

mV

R103

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Y

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

Cb

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

Cr

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

G

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

B

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

R

20

984

−5

105

14

3D8

−35

735

Gamut Monitoring Mode Legal:
Scale:

Decimal

%IRE

Hex

mV

Legal

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Y

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

Cb

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

Cr

64

960

−50

50

40

3C0

−350

350

G

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

B

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

R

64

940

0

100

40

3AC

0

700

If the Picture cursor is used to select an out-of-gamut area, the corresponding line and pixel can bedisplayed on the Waveform monitor and Data View to measure the value.
The Gamut Error counters to the right of the Gamut meters show the cumulative Gamut errors
detected since the last reset as follows:lPercent: Shows the percentage of pixels in errorlPixels: Shows the total number of pixels in errorlCount: Shows the total cumulative count of frames in error.

When Reset, all error counters and the elapsed time are set back to zero and restarted.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-37

Gamut Setup
The Gamut Setup menu enables the following items to be configured:lInclude or exclude Gamut meter bars from the error count.
When an Error checkbox is selected corresponding to a color component, the corresponding
gamut meter bar will turn green and will contribute towards the error count. Where thecorresponding Error checkbox is not selected, the gamut meter bar is displayed in gray anddoes not contribute towards the error count. Any gamut errors occurring when the component
is not included in the error count are displayed at the top or bottom of the bar in red or yellow
to alert the operator.

l

Low pass filter (LPF) activated or disabledlMetering scales (decimal, percent IRE, hexadecimal, mV)lCustom setuplFine-tuning of error recording and zebra grid component selectionlGamut logging.

Note: When entering a percentage, remember that the value entered is divided by ten to display
the final percentage, so to enter 0.1% enter 10, or to enter 10%, enter 100, etc. It is also
recommended to press Clear ALL to delete the previous entry before entering a new value.
The following figure shows the Gamut setup dialog and resulting configuration for the various gamut
modes:

Page 3-38

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGamut Check Configuration
Note: If you change any of the Gamut settings while in either R103 or Legal monitoring mode, themode will switch immediately to Custom mode, which you can save as a preset.
Use the Gamut Check section of the Setup dialog to:lCreate a customized Gamut monitoring mode by changing the default monitoring ranges for R,
G, B, Y, Cb and Cr.

l

Change the default error recording from the various meters.

lChange the default signal to which the zebra overlay is applied.

lSelect a different scale for the Gamut meters: decimal, %IRE, hex, or mV.

lActivate or deactivate a low pass filter (LPF).

When selecting or deselecting the Error or Zebra checkboxes, selecting an Error checkbox enables
the counting of errors for the corresponding color component. Selecting a Zebra checkbox enables
the display of Zebra Bars for the corresponding color component in the Picture instrument.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-39

Gamut Custom ModeIf you change any of the default settings for either R103 or Legal Gamut monitoring modes, the unit
automatically switches to Custom mode. It is possible to modify the monitored ranges, the LPF, typeof errors recorded, and the color components to which zebra bar overlays are applied.
Note: If the LPF checkbox is deselected, gamut monitoring may not report pixels in error, evenwhen the gamut bars show that some pixels fall outside the range of expected values for thecurrent frame.
When you select a custom setting, the Custom values that are selected will persist, enabling theoperator to switch from Custom mode back to R103 and / or Legal mode and then return to Custom
mode with the same settings. If, however, a Custom mode is defined and the operator switches tomode R103, for example, and makes a configuration change, this setting becomes the new Custom
mode setting and the previous Custom mode is replaced, unless saved as a Preset.

Gamut Logging
Logging of Gamut errors is enabled by selecting the Enable checkbox in the Setup dialog.
All Gamut errors are reset to zero when the Reset button in the Gamut Monitoring window is clicked.
When logging is active, this logs a Gamut Reset event in the logfile.
The percentage of pixels in error can be set in the Pixels % field so that Gamut errors are logged only
when this threshold is exceeded.
When there is a change to the gamut setup but no gamut errors are recorded, an information entry isadded to the gamut log:
i 14:39:12 03-10-2023 SDI1 Gamut OK: YGBR 1080p25 0.0%(0) ( <= 0.1% )When the Pixels % threshold is exceeded and logging is enabled, a Gamut Error is logged as follows:
In R103 Mode:E 14:39:12 03-10-2023 SDI1 Gamut Error: YGBR 1080p25 2.7%(56954) ( > 1.0% )This error can be interpreted as follows:li- Information eventl

E - Error eventl

14:39:12 - Time event occurredl

03-10-2023 - Date event occurredl

SDI1 - SDI input namel

YGBR 1080p25 - Active color components and standard when the error occurred. For R103
Mode, the monitored color components are Y and GBR. For Legal mode all color components
are monitored, so YCbCrGBR would be logged.

l

0.3% - Percentage of total pixels in error.

l(56954) - Number of pixels in error when the event was logged.

l( > 1.0%) - Error logging initiated as the percentage of gamut errors has exceeded the configured gamut threshold for that gamut error mode.

A Gamut Reset information event is logged when the gamut Reset button is pressed.

Page 3-40

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualData View
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed and SDI analysis option can display the selected
input in the form of a data array.

The SDI Data View window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Data View. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
This page shows the video signal as a datastream in several formats as described below. In eachmode, the data may be displayed in hexadecimal, decimal or binary formats. In each mode, the data
may be displayed in hexadecimal, decimal or binary formats. The binary format is not available in gridmode. The data may also be displayed as 10-bit or 8-bit format.
Note: The line number of a line of video changes at the end of active video. This has the effectthat the line number for pixels in horizontal blanking is the same as the line number for the active
picture after that line.

Type
Grid:
In this mode the data is shown in an X-Y format with lines and samples at the same time,
providing a representation of the picture in data format. If the cursor keys are used to
select the grid window and OK pressed, the cursor keys will scroll around the window. The
luma (Y) channel is shown in white whilst the Cr and Cb channels are shown with a red or
blue tint respectivelyStrm:
One of three modes for displaying the samples on the current line only. The cursor keys
may be used to scroll the sample number when OK has been pressed. The info column
shows the type of data being displayed.
l

AP - Active picturel

VBL - Vertical blankingl

HBL - Horizontal blanking

Comp:
Similar to the Strm mode above but in a component mode with Cr and Cb in different
columns. See Strm mode above for a description of the info column.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-41

Split:Shows the two streams split into four parts to show Y, Y’, Cr and Cb in separate columns.
See Strm mode above for a description of the info column.
Note: When in Color modes other than YCbCr 422 10 bit, the pixel RGB or YCbCr values arepacked into 10 bit values across the different streams and thus will give unfamiliar values. When
the UnPack checkbox is checked the values in the active picture are unpacked to RGB or YCbCr
values.

Page 3-42

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualWaveform Monitor
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can display the selected input in the form of a
waveform monitor.

The Waveform window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar andselecting Waveform. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Selecting the white arrow in the top-right corner of the window will show or hide the menu controls.

Waveform TypeThe waveform display format is set using the Setup button. The waveform monitor displays theselected signal in one of the following formats as set by the Mode control:
YCbCr:The Y, Cr and Cb waveforms are shown as three separate waveforms in a Parade format.
Y:
Only the luminance channel is shown.
Cb:
Only the blue chroma channel is shown.
Cr:
Only the red chroma channel is shown.
GBR:
The Green, Blue and Red waveforms are shown as three separate waveforms in a Parade
format.
Red:
Only the red channel is shown.
Green:
Only the green channel is shown.
Blue:
Only the blue channel is shown.
RGB:
The Red, Green and Blue waveforms are shown as three separate waveforms in a Parade
format.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-43

RGBOvr:
The Red, Green and Blue waveforms are shown overlaid on the same waveform.
YCCOvr:
The Luminance, Cr and Cb waveforms are shown overlaid on the same waveform.

Waveform Scale
The horizontal scale (x1 H) of the waveform (at 1/16 window size on the HDMI output) can be selected
to view the left, right and center areas of the waveform display.
The vertical scale (x1 V) of the waveform (at 1/16 window size on the HDMI output) can be selected toview the high, middle and low areas of the waveform display.

Cursors
Various cursor modes are available on the Waveform monitor:
Pict:
This makes the picture cursor visible. The picture cursor can be moved as required.
Ampl:
The Amplitude cursor allows the level between 2 different levels (Cursor C and Cursor D)
to be measured.
Time:
The Time cursors allow the difference between to points (Cursor A and Cursor B) to bemeasured.
Both:This allows both the Amplitude and Time cursors to be selected at the same time.

If the Waveform Pict (Picture) cursor is selected, then a vertical cursor will be also be displayed on the
waveform at the corresponding pixel sample.
The Waveform monitor provides both amplitude cursors, to measure the amplitude of the waveform,
and time cursors to measure the time between two selected points on the waveform.

Page 3-44

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualWith the Time cursor selected, then clicking on the waveform will place a vertical cursor (Cursor A) on
the waveform and the time (in pixels or microseconds) from the start of picture will displayed. Clicking
a second time in a different place on the waveform will place a second cursor (Cursor B).
The difference between the Cursor A and Cursor B will be displayed in pixels or microseconds.
Clicking on the vertical dotted cursor and then clicking a different horizontal position will move thecursor to that point.
With the Ampl (Amplitude) cursor selected, then clicking on the waveform will place a horizontal
cursor (Cursor C) on the waveform and the amplitude at that point will be displayed at the bottom of
the waveform prefixed by C either as a percentage or in millivolts. Clicking on the horizontal dottedcursor and then clicking a different vertical position will move the cursor there.

All, Line and Sample
The display may be restricted to a single line or all lines may be displayed at the same time.
The line, sample and field controls all track the related controls on other pages.
In active picture mode, the All checkbox is enabled, and waveform monitor displays the content of
the active picture (all active picture lines, overlaid on each other).
In single line mode, the All checkbox is disabled, and the waveform monitor displays a single active
picture line or VANC region line.

Waveform Setup Button Dialog

The Waveform Setup menu allows the vertical and horizontal scale of the waveform display to be
setup.
Graticule:
The brightness of the display graticule can be adjusted between 100% (full brightness) and
0% (not displayed)
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-45

Vertical Scale:
The axes and measurements for the waveform monitor can be displayed either in percentages or in hex or decimal values as required.
Horizontal Scale:
The timing measurements may be set in either pixels or micro-seconds (μs)

Page 3-46

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualVectorscope
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can display the selected input in the form of avectorscope.

The Vectorscope window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Vectorscope. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Selecting the white arrow in the top corner of the window will show or hide the menu controls.
The display graticule may be set to show either the 100% bar positions or 75% positions. The color bar
position boxes will change according to the color space for the current input video standard.
Line:
Allows a specific video line to be displayed. This is useful when test patterns are transmitted as part of a program on specific video lines.
All:
The All checkbox forces the waveform monitor to display all lines, overlaid on each other.
When unselected, the specified line is displayed.
Field:The Fld 1 and Fld 2 modes allow specific video fields to be displayed.
Zoom:
Allows the vectorscope display to be zoomed-in to the Center, Cyan, Yellow, Green,
Magenta, Red or Blue positions at x1, x2, x5 or x10 magnifications.
100% / 75%:
Selects the graticule scale to match the color bars being analyzed.
Gain:
When Zoom is set to x1, this function enables you to set the gain of the vectorscope display
to x2. If Zoom is set to anything other than x1, the Gain control is grayed-out.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-47

Eye
Overview
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Eye Module installed can display the selected input in the form ofan Eye Pattern. This allows the jitter of the selected input video signal to be monitored using an Eye
Pattern display.

The Eye window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer Eye slot on the monitor output task bar andselecting Eye. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Selecting the white arrow in the top corner of the window will show or hide the menu controls.
The term Eye Pattern is given to the measurement of SDI clock jitter display that forms the shape of aneye due to the two superimposed clock cycles. The open eye is displayed when monitoring a jitter
free SDI signal and the eye closes increasingly with the severity of the jitter.

The Eye Pattern is formed by sampling the SDI signal at specific points in a progressive manner anddisplaying each sample taken on a persistent screen until the waveform is complete.

Causes of Jitter
Jitter can be caused by a number of different effects and the artifacts displayed in the Eye waveform
are typically due to combinations of these at different frequencies and amplitudes:llPage 3-48

Transmission jitter caused by the equipment generating the video signal. This could include
clock phase jitter, amplitude jitter and wander.
Receiver phase lock loop errors in equipment decoding an SDI datastream. For example, whenvideo sources are switched and the circuitry of the equipment needs time to establish phaselock or when the signal is distorted by long cable lengths.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

l

l

l

l

Data dependent jitter due to the actual data content that, even after randomization, that contains sequences of zeros long enough for the clock regeneration to lose phase lock.
Thermal and Shot Noise caused by the integrated circuits used within equipment. Integrated
Circuits can contain many discrete transistors that can all cause random errors, increasing in
number as the temperature of the equipment rises.
Electromagnetic interference in long cable lengths that may be susceptible to interference
from the power grid and from power switching.
Distorted waveform shape, created by equipment, by long cable runs, by poorly terminated,
un-equalized cables, poor cable frequency response of or poor return-loss.

Problems occur when these errors cause a level of jitter outside the specified acceptable parameters.
The different types of jitter are classified as follows:
Timing Jitter:
Refers to a short-term time interval error above a low frequency threshold of 10 Hz (asdefined in the SMPTE standards for SDI signals).
Alignment Jitter:
Refers to artifacts above the specified threshold frequencies of (1 kHz for SD-SDI signals
and 100 kHz for HD-SDI signals). Typically, video equipment cannot tolerate Alignment Jitter which causes decoding errors from incorrect sampling of the datastream because the
SDI Clock transition occurs on the edge of the data sample instead of at the center of thedata sample.
Wander:
Refers to a long-term time interval error, ie artefacts below 10 Hz. Typically, all video equipment has the tendency to cause wander over a long period, the display of these artefacts
are not easily displayed in a meaningful way but are better logged as errors that exceed tolerances over a long period.
Random Jitter:
Refers to artefacts caused by random events or processes such as thermal or shot noisethat cause small amplitude variations in the clock edge position or could cause large signal
amplitude variations, though these typically would be infrequent.
Note: If an Rx Generator module is being used as the test pattern generator then the System
Reference should be set to Free Run to avoid the introduction of jitter caused by the Rx locking
circuitry.

Eye Display
The Eye and Jitter display shows the Eye Pattern against a vertical graticule of +500 mV to −500 mV.
Four horizontal cursor lines show the 100%, 80%, 20% and 0% measurement positions on the
waveform. Along the bottom of the display are continuous automatic measurements for the following
parameters:
l

l

l

l

Amplitude – measured in mV
Rise time – measured in picoseconds. The rise time measurement is specified as the time
between the 20% and 80% points on the eye waveform.
Fall time - measured in picoseconds. The fall time measurement is specified as the time
between the 20% and 80% points on the eye waveform.
Rise/fall difference - measured in picoseconds
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-49lRising edge overshoot – measured as a percentage of the overall signal amplitude.

lFalling edge overshoot – measured as a percentage of the overall signal amplitude.

l

Cable length – measured in meters. The cable length display is only an approximate value with
10 m resolution, so a 5 m long cable will be shown as having a length of 0 m. The cable typeaffects the length displayed which has been calibrated for Belden 1694A cables.

Any measurements which exceed the specification of the SDI signal are indicated in red whilst valid
parameters are displayed in white.
Note: If jitter values are too large, the automated measurements cannot be made accurately andshould not be relied on.
The eye display is only accurate when connected with a cable of length 1 m. If a longer cable is usedthe eye will begin to close up and measurements will become more difficult to perform. Note that theeye display is of the signal pre-equalizer, the equalizer in a system being used to compensate forlong cable lengths. There is no method for the Rx instrument to view the signal post-equalizer.

Jitter Filters
The Jitter 1 filter allows the specific type of jitter to be applied to the waveform and the thermometer
displays. The options are:
Timing:As determined by the SMPTE standard for the specific video standard (i.e., jitter above the
10 Hz threshold.)
Align:As determined by the SMPTE standard for the specific video standard (i.e., jitter above 1
kHz threshold for SD-SDI signals and 100 kHz for HD-SDI signals.)
10Hz:
Jitter above a 10 Hz threshold.
100Hz:
Jitter above a 100 Hz threshold.
1kHz:
Jitter above a 1 kHz threshold.
10kHz:
Jitter above a 10 kHz threshold.
100kHz:Jitter above a 100 kHz threshold.
Jitter filter selection affects both the jitter thermometer and eye pattern displays. Timing andAlignment jitter filters are defined in the relevant SMPTE publication. The thermometer automaticallycalibrates to the specification of the video standard and chosen filter. When the reading is within
specification, the thermometer bar is green, when close to specification it is yellow, and when out ofspecification it is red.

Page 3-50

3G-SDI (2.97 Gbps)

HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps)

SD-SDI (270 Mbps)

Alignment Jitter

SD-SDI (270 Mbps)

100 kHz high pass

1 kHz high pass

Alignment Jitter

10 Hz high pass

10 Hz high pass

10 Hz high pass

Upper limit−3 dB at 9.5 MHz low
pass−3 dB at 4.75 MHz low
pass−3 dB at 0.86 MHz low
pass

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualOn-screen horizontal cursors indicate the position on the eye that the rise time measurements arebeing made.
Note: The Rx instrument takes a little time to stabilize when the SDI input standard changes.

Jitter Meter Ranges
3G-SDI (2.97 Gbps)

HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps)

SD-SDI (270 Mbps)

Alignment Full-Scale

0.52 UI

0.34 UI

0.34 UI

Alignment (RedThreshold)

0.3 UI

0.2 UI

0.2 UI

Alignment (Yellow
Threshold)

0.2 UI

0.14 UI

0.14 UI

Timing Full Scale

3.4 UI

1.7 UI

0.34 UI

Timing (Red Threshold)

2 UI

1 UI

0.2 UITiming (Yellow
Threshold)

1.4 UI

0.7 UI

0.14 UI

Eye Color:
The eye color may be set to green or blue and may also be adjusted in gain to allow theeye display to show hot spots where most of the signal data is found.

Advanced Jitter Analysis

Advanced Jitter Analysis provides the user with additional tools on the Eye display to help determine
the nature of jitter present in SDI signals.
Histogram:Amp, Timing, or Both. Histograms enable the operator to observe the distribution ofsamples in both amplitude (Amp) and time (Time). The amplitude histogram shows the distribution of samples over the complete visible eye picture. The time histogram shows the
distribution of samples at the zero point of the eye waveform for two thirds of the visible

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-51

time period. Note that he time histogram overlays some of the automatic measurement display. The measurements may still be read by Remote Control if purchased.
Jitter-1:
Timing, Align, 10Hz, 100 Hz, 1KHz, 10KHz or 100KHz. This filter operates on both the lefthand jitter thermometer and the eye waveform. The different filters enable the operator tounderstand more fully the nature of any jitter present. When in Timing or Alignment modes,
the meter range is set to show appropriate ranges for the SMPTE specification at the current video input standard.
Jitter-2:
This is a second jitter measurement thermometer and may be set to Timing, Align, 10Hz,
100 Hz, 1KHz, 10KHz or 100KHz. This filter operates on just the right-hand jitter thermometer. When in Timing or Alignment modes, the meter range is set to show appropriate
ranges for the SMPTE specification at the current video input standard. When in other filter
modes, the meter ranges are expanded so that larger ranges may be viewed.
Update:This allows selection of the update rate to allow longer display persistence. This may be
set to 40 ms (normal use) or infinite. When set to infinite, the Run and Clear buttons areenabled.
Run:
This checkbox stops the display from updating so that a waveform may be investigated in
more detail. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite update mode.
Clear:
This button clears the eye display. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite
update mode.
Eyes:
Adjusts the number of eyes visible on the eye display. The 10 and 20 modes are useful forobserving serial-parallel conversion jitter.

Page 3-52

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualJitter
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Eye Module installed can display the selected input in the form ofa Jitter waveform.

The Jitter window is accessed by clicking an Analyzer Eye slot on the monitor output task bar andselecting Jitter. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Selecting the white arrow in the top corner of the window will show or hide the menu controls.
This screen shows a trace of jitter amplitude versus time along with two jitter thermometers and has
the following controls:
Jitter-1:
Timing, Align, 10Hz, 100Hz, 1kHz, 10kHz, or 100kHz. This filter operates on both the lefthand jitter thermometer and the jitter trace.
Jitter-2:
Timing, Align, 10Hz, 100Hz, 1kHz, 10kHz, or 100kHz. This filter operates on just the righthand jitter thermometer.
Horiz:
H, 2H, V or Frame – horizontal sweep control for jitter trace.
UI/div:
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1.0 – vertical gain control for the sweep trace.
Update:This allows selection of the update rate to allow longer display persistence. This may be
set to 40 ms (normal use) or infinite. When set to infinite, the Run and Clear buttons areenabled.
Run:
This checkbox stops the display from updating so that a waveform may be investigated in
more detail. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite update mode.
Clear:
This button clears the eye display. It is only enabled when the update mode is set to infinite update mode.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-53

Video Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display any
EDH (error detection and handling) or CRC (cyclic redundancy check) errors detected in thedatastream.

The Video Status window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar
and selecting SDI Errors. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Selecting Video will display the EDH or CRC status of the analyzer input as appropriate for the video
standard being monitored. The status of each EDH / CRC count is displayed as the number of
seconds since an error occurred.

EDH/CRC Errors
This displays the EDH or CRC status of the analyzer input as appropriate for the video standard being
monitored. The status of each EDH/ CRC count is displayed as the number of seconds since an error
occurred. The individual CRC fields may be reset individually or together. The Running time fieldshows the time since the last error reset occurred. The error rate field shows the number of errors per
second. The running time will also be affected by the input being lost or being intermittent. CRC
errors are ignored on the switching line if the Ignore switch line checkbox is checked.
ANC checksum errors are also detected and counted and may be logged.
When analyzing a 3G-Level B signal, the CRC status is displayed for each link or stream present
according to the input video format. On an RX instrument with a Dual-Link module with two video
inputs, only one 3G-Level B may be analyzed for CRC status at a time.

EDH DATA
If the signal is SD (PAL-625 or NTSC-525) the EDH values for both active picture (AP) and full-field (FF)are displayed for each field. To enable engineers checking EDH integrity, the EDH values calculated
for active picture and full-field are also displayed.
Under normal conditions, the EDH-AP values should be constant, the full-field values may change if
audio or other ancillary data is embedded in the SDI signal.
The EDH flags for active picture, full-field and ancillary data are also displayed for diagnostic
purposes.

Page 3-54

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualEdh:Error Detected Here - This is set to 1 if a SDI error was detected. In the case of ancillarydata, this means that one or more ANC data packets had an incorrect checksum.
Eda:
Error Detected Already - This is set to 1 if a SDI error was detected in the signal received by
the previous device.
Idh:
Internal error Detected Here - This is set to 1 if a hardware error was detected in the previous device.
Ida:
Internal error Detected Already - This is set to 1 if an idh flag was received by the previous
device.
Ues:
Unknown error status: This is set to 1 if the previous device received an SDI signal from adevice not supporting EDH.
Note: Only a single EDH detector is connected to the input currently being analyzed. On an Rx
instrument with multiple video inputs, only the current input being analyzed can check for EDH
errors.

Cable Length
The Rx instrument measures the cable length connected to the SDI input BNC and the measurement
is only an approximate value. The cable type may be set to one of the following:lBelden: 8282, 1694A, 1505, 1855A.

l

Canare L-5CFBlImage 1000

The selected cable type will affect the cable length measurement.

Active Picture CRC
16-bit CCITT CRCs are calculated for the active picture data of the received signal. This can be used
to give a known value for known static picture content and allows the user to determine if the active
picture content is as expected.
CRCs are calculated independently upon each 10-bit stream (luminance and chrominance) of theinterface.
For example, the generated 1920x1080, 100% bars in YCC422-10 should always produce a luminance
CRC of 0x0AB4 and a chrominance CRC of 0xB88E, no matter what scanning mode (interlaced,segmented frame or progressive) or frame rate is used.
Note: When using 4:4:4, 4:4:4:4 or 12-bit video formats (in dual-link or 3Gbps) the CRCs arecalculated for each of the packed 10-bit virtual interfaces and will therefore generate different
values from those for YCC422-10.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-55

Misc Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display thecontent of any SMPTE 352 packets detected in the datastream.

The Misc Status window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Input Status. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.

Payload ID – SMPTE 352
If the Rx instrument has detected a SMPTE 352 ancillary packet, it will be displayed here in hex anddecoded format.
The display shows the transport media, frame rate and frame mode (interlaced, progressive, orsegmented) as well as color format, bit depth, dynamic range and channel number. See the SMPTE
352 specification for further details.
When analyzing a 3G-Level B signal, the SMPTE 352 status is displayed for each link or stream
present according to the input video format. On an RX instrument with Dual-Link with two video
inputs, only one 3G-Level B may be analyzed for SMPTE 352 status at a time.

Video Format
This displays the currently detected line length for both active video and full line including blanking aswell as the number of active lines for the inputs present.
Note: The video frequency displayed is only correct if the Rx instrument has been calibrated andfree running or has been connected to an accurate reference input.
If the input signal is not a known signal (i.e., the line count or pixel count is not recognized) the input
status on the top line will show Invalid but the values in this section will be updated every few
seconds.
The Re-sync counter displays the number of times the SDI data has been re-synchronized and canhelp detect intermittent SDI signal problems.

Page 3-56

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualVideo Timing
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display its
timing relationship with the locking reference.

The Input Timing window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Input Timing. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
The timing of SDI input signals is displayed relative to the external reference. If no reference ispresent then an error message is displayed. If the signal is timed to within +/− 2 samples the values
are displayed in black, in lines and samples (spl). If mistimed, then they will be displayed in red. A bar
graph also displays the timing value which may either be line timing (+/− 0.1 lines or +/− 0.5 lines) orframe timing (+/− 0.5 frame). The total timing value is also displayed in microseconds.
The red arrow on the bar shows the SDI input timing and the blue arrow shows the current target
timing point. The brown vertical line shows the timing of the reference signal.
To compare timings of different signals, connect the signal to be compared to the SDI input andselect the Offset button to make this the current offset. All future timings will be relative to this offset
value.
To clear the current offset, move the focus to the two offset fields, press OK to edit them and thenpress Default.
Note: All timing measurements are relative to Line 1 on the SDI signal and Line 1 on the reference
signal. This can lead to different values to other test and measurement instruments that include
an SD (PAL/NTSC) offset in their calculations. By comparing Line 1 timings, the Rx instrument canbe used to measure time delays accurately through up / down / cross converters.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-57

ANC Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input and display
details of any Ancillary packets within the SDI datastream.

The Ancillary Packet Status window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output
task bar and selecting ANC Status. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
The ANC status menu shows which ANC packets are present on the SDI input and whether they haveany errors.
Each field is color-coded according to whether the ANC packet is present (White), missing (Gray), haserrors (Red), or has previously had errors (yellow).
If the field has errors then a symbol beside the field shows which error type it is. The bottom of thepage shows the symbol for each type of error. The Reset button resets the Previous Errors state.

The Setup button and dialog allows user-defined ANC packets to be configured.
The packet name, data ID (DID) and SDID may be specified for up to three user-defined ancillary
packets. The stream field specifies whether the packet should be on the chroma stream, theluminance stream or both. The data packets that can be trapped by the ANC Status are as follows:
RP165-EDH:
The SMPTE RP165-EDH packet containing EDH (error data handling) and CRC (cyclic
redundancy counts). This only appears on SD-SDI signals.
S272-SD Audio:
The SMPTE 291M defined SD audio data in HANC space.
S272-SD Aux:
The SMPTE 291M defined SD auxiliary data in HANC space.

Page 3-58

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

S272-SD Ctrl:
The SMPTE 291M defined SD control data in HANC space.
S299-HD Audio:
The SMPTE 291M defined HD audio data in HANC space.
S299-HD Ctrl:
The SMPTE 291M defined HD control data in HANC space.
S315-Cam. Pos:
The SMPTE 291M defined camera position data in HANC and VANC space.
S353-MPEG Record:
The SMPTE 291M defined MPEG recoding data in HANC and VANC space.
S305-SDTI:The SMPTE 291M defined SDTI transport data packet in active frame space.
S348-HDTI:The SMPTE 291M defined HD-SDTI transport in active frame space.
S427-Lnk. Enc 1:
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S427-Lnk. Enc 2:
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S427-Link Enc:
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S352-Payload:
The SMPTE 291M defined Payload Identification data packet in VANC space.
OP47 Transport:
The Free TV Operational Practice OP-47 defined transport of Closed Caption/Subtitling
data in the VANC space.
OP47 Dist.:
The Free TV Operational Practice OP-47 defined distribution of Closed Caption/Subtitling
data in the VANC space.
ITU-R BT 1685:
The ITU-R BT 1685 defined Structure of inter-station control data packets.
RP214-KLV-V:
The SMPTE defined KLV Metadata transport in VANC space.
RP214-KLV-H:
The SMPTE defined KLV Metadata transport in HANC space.
RP233-UMID/ID:
The SMPTE defined UMID (Unique Material Identifier) in VANC space.
S2020-Audio:
The SMPTE S2020 defined standardized data packet defining the encoding for a Dolby
stereo or a multi-channel surround group of audio channels.
RP215 – Film:
The SMPTE defined recommended practice data packet for film codes in VANC space.
EIA-708 Caption:
The EIA standard defined closed caption data for HD-SDI in VANC space.
EIA-608 Caption:
The EIA standard defined closed caption data for SD SDI 525i (NTSC) in VANC space.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-59

RP207 Program:
The SMPTE RP207 defined program description data packet in VANC space.
RP208 – VBI:The SMPTE defined recommended practice VBI Data (vertical blanking interval data) in
VANC space.
S2010-SCTE MSGS:The SMPTE S2010 defined standardized API message data in VANC space.
S2016-3 AFD:The SMPTE S2016 defined standardized AFD (active format description) and Bar data
packet (defining active area of image).
ARIB-B.22:
The ARIB-defined Sub information data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.23-1:
The ARIB-defined user data 1 packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.23-2:
The ARIB-defined user data 2 packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.27 Capt.:
The ARIB-defined caption data in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.35:
The ARIB-defined trigger signal data packet for data broadcasting.
ARIB-B.39:
The ARIB-defined inter-stationary control data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37:
The ARIB-defined analog signal data in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37 HD:
The ARIB-defined HD data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37 Mob:
The ARIB defined closed captioning information data packet.
ARIB-B.37 SD:
The ARIB defined SD data packet in the VANC space.
S2031-SCTE VBI:The SCTE S2031 standard defined VBI (vertical blanking interval) data packet for closed
captioning.
S2016-4 PAN:
The SCTE S2016 standard defined pan and scan data packet.
RP196-HANC:
The SMPTE defined recommended practice Time Code data packet in HANC space.
RP196-VANC:
The SMPTE defined recommended practice Vertical Timecode data packet in VANC
space.
RDD8-WSS:
The SMPTE defined wide screen switching data packet in the VANC space.
S12M-2 V-Tcode:
The SMPTE S12M defined standardized frame timecode data packet in VANC space.
Mark Deleted:

Page 3-60

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualA user-defined data packet used to mark other data packets for deletion (ie to be ignoredby down-stream processes.
User-1:
A user-defined data packet.
User-2:A user-defined data packet.
User-3:A user-defined data packet.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-61

ANC Inspector (SDI Analysis Option)
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed and SDI analysis option can monitor theselected input and display the contents of selected Ancillary packets within the SDI data.

The Ancillary Inspector window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output
task bar and selecting ANC Inspector. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
The packet type can be selected using either the dropdown list of known packets or the DID/SDID(Data Identifier/ Secondary Data Identifier) number fields (for example RP165 – EDH, S272 – SD AudioGroup 1, S272 – SD Audio Group 2, etc.). If the DID/SDID values match a known type, then that typewill be selected in the dropdown list. This may be further filtered using the checkboxes on the Setup
dialog.
Note: The settings of the Setup dialog affect the currently displayed data. For example, if any
trigger parameters are set (such as DID or SubDID are set to specific values that do not appear in
the data) this may prevent data being displayed.
When searching for specific data events it is advisable first to deselect the Trigger parameters suchas DID, subDID, Checksum, DBN (Data Block Number), Parity and ANC Gaps to ensure that you are
actually seeing data for the selected ANC packet. Only when the ANC Inspector is displaying
streaming data, should you introduce the specific trigger parameters required to trap the data packet
that you are looking for.
The Line and sample number of the detected packet is displayed to facilitate debugging ofgeneration equipment. The complete data packet is displayed as a hexadecimal grid at the bottom of
the page and may also be decoded into text above the grid.
If an error occurs in the packet, the header and checksum are displayed in red.
The display of data may be frozen by pressing the Freeze checkbox.
The Found description shows in which stream the ANC packet was detected, Chroma or Luma andwhat kind of trigger was detected. This may be:l

C: Checksum Errorl

D: DBN (Data block number) Errorl

P: Parity Errorl

G: ANC Gap Error

Several of the above flags may be displayed at the same time.
Page 3-62

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The ANC packets detected may be filtered using the Setup dialog. This allows a great deal of
freedom in setting when the display will be triggered.
If the On Trigger checkbox is checked the data packet will cause the display to be frozen and theFreeze checkbox will turn red when a trigger condition is met. See the section ANC Inspector Setup
below. Un-checking the Freeze checkbox will restore normal operation.
The ->Cursor button will copy the Line and Sample numbers to the SDI data view cursors to simplify
navigation to the ANC packet under investigation.

ANC Inspector Setup

If the Setup button is pressed a dialog box is shown to allow the ANC packet trigger parameters to be
set. The trigger parameters allow only selected lines to be checked or excluded when checking forthe presence of packets.
Line Range Filter:
If either of the Line Range Filter checkboxes are checked then the range of lines that the
ANC inspector will check is limited to that range. If the HANC/ANC dropdown below therange is set to Inside then it will only check ANC packets inside the range (including thestart and end lines). If it is set to Outside then it will only check ANC packets outside thespecified range.
HANC/VANC Filter:
A filter for simpler selection of where to search for packets. It may be selected to search
the HANC (Horizontal Ancillary Data) area, the VANC (Vertical Ancillary Data) area or bothareas.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-63

Error Triggers
If any of the Errors checkboxes are checked, then the ANC packet data will only be displayed if anerror of that type occurs. The error states detected are:Checksum:
A checksum error in a packet was detected. ie Sum of data between DID and final UDW(User Data Words).
DBN:
A Data Block number error was detected in an audio packet. The DBN field (in the sameplace as the SDID) of an audio packet should either be 0 and never change OR incrementfrom 1...255 and then start at 1 again.
Parity:A parity error was detected for the DID, SDID and DataCount words in a packet. (Even Parity used and bit 9 is inverse of bit 8)
ANC Gaps:
The ANC packets were separated by a gap containing video blanking data. EDH (DIDD=0xf4) packets are ignored. Note that if an EDH packet is marked for deletion, this will result in an ANC GAP error.
The Setup dialog also shows when an ANC packet has been detected and where it was found. This
makes changing a filter simpler as the effect of the filter can be determined without closing the dialog.
This dialog also allows the user-defined ANC packets to be configured.

Page 3-64

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

SFP Info

The SFP Info menu displays details of the currently installed SFP module.
Along with the manufacturer’s details of the SFP parameters, this displays the transmitted andreceived power which can indicate optical losses in the infrastructure (optical fiber type, distance andconnection quality.)

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-65

Audio Metering
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input audio andgraphically display the audio level for each audio channel.

The Audio Metering window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Audio Meters. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
Note that where the Meters are displaying Dolby encoded audio data this will be labeled as such.
This window shows up to 16 audio channels. The source for each meter pair may be independently
set to allow simultaneous metering of eight different meter pairs associated with the Analyzer or all 16
channels in an embedded SDI stream. This is selected using the Setup menu at the right of thewindow.

Right-clicking on the individual meters or on the window will display context-sensitive menus that canbe used to control the functions of these instruments.

Audio Phase Meters
The signal amplitudes and the stereo pair phase meters are displayed at the bottom of each pair ofaudio PPMs.

Page 3-66

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualIf the phase indicator is green and aligned to the right then the stereo pair is fully in phase (i.e., thesignal on both left and right are exactly the same which usually occurs only when a mono signal is on
both channels.)
If the phase indicator is yellow and aligned in the center this indicates that the stereo pair is in phase(i.e., the normal position for a stereo pair.)If the phase indicator is red and aligned to the left then the stereo pair is fully out-of-phase, (i.e., thesignal on the left and right channels are 180 degrees out of phase.)

Metering Setup

The source for each pair of audio meters can be selected from the dropdown lists for each pair.
These choices can be SDI embedded audio channels, AES audio pairs or decoded Dolby audio
channels.
The scale and peak program meter ballistics can also be selected from the dropdown menus.
The scale used by the meters may be set to −18dB, −20dB, BBC, BBCM, DIN45406 or NordicN9
according to the standard operating level used. The graticule and audio levels displayed will change
to match the selected scale. The ballistics of the meter can be set to:
l

l

l

l

l

PPM I: emulating the performance of IEC 60268-10 Type I PPM style audio meters typicallyused by German broadcasters.
PPM II: emulating the performance of IEC 60268-10 Type II PPM style audio meters typicallyused by UK broadcasters.
Vu: emulating the performance of IEC 60268-17 style audio meters typically used by Americanand Australian broadcasters.
Vu-Fr: emulating the performance of ITU-R Rec. BS.645 style audio meters typically used by
French broadcasters.
Fast: displaying the meters without any ballistics applied. Primarily for automated measurement
purposes where readings can be taken without waiting for levels to settle.

These settings affect the response of the meter display to dynamic changes in audio level.
The Peak Hold bars can be displayed if the checkbox is selected and the decay time can be setup
using the dropdown list. The scale and peak program meter ballistics can also be selected from thedropdown menus.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-67

Audio Mix Mode

The Mix Mode function allows selected channels to be assigned to the left and right channels of the
Audio Monitoring output when Analyzer → Downmix is selected.
The dropdown menu allows Mix Mode to be set to User defined, 5.1A or 5.1B to use mappings
defined in the System - Surround Channel Setup.
The Mix Mode channel mappings can be saved as an audio preset using the Save button andrecalled using the front panel preset controls.

4AES Module
The Rx Instrument with an 4AES Module installed can monitor the selected AES input audio pairs andgraphically display the audio level for up to four pairs of AES audio channels.

Dolby Metadata Analysis
If the metadata Dolby analyzer option is installed, selecting Metadata from the dropdown list on themeter window will display the encoded Dolby metadata levels for up to eight Dolby channels within
the specified embedded audio pair or AES input.
If AES inputs are present then these may also be metered. At the bottom of each meter is the current
audio level for that channel in dBFs (decibels relative to 0 dB full-scale).
Note: Dolby audio cannot be heard on the speaker if the Dolby Decoder module is not present.

Dolby Decoder module
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the levels of the decoded baseband audio channel pairs
can be monitored using the Audio Meters. To do this, select either Dolby P1, Dolby P2, Dolby P3, etc.
using the Setup menu.
The Decoder 1 and Decoder 2 selections from the dropdown list on the meter window will display thelevels for the decoded Dolby audio channels. With Decoder 1 or 2 selected the meter display will turnblue to indicate that decoded Dolby audio is in use and channels can be selected as part of adownmix.

Page 3-68

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

SDI Audio Status
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed can monitor the selected input audio and detailits audio encoding details.

The SDI Audio Status window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Audio Status. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
The Audio Status menu shows the Channel Status for the selected audio channel is displayed in
decoded form as well as a hexadecimal dump of the bytes.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-69

Lissajous
The Lissajous window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task bar andselecting Lissajous. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.

Selecting the white arrow in the top corner of the window will show or hide the menu controls.
The stereo audio pair to be monitored can be selected from the dropdown list.
If a Dolby Decoder module is installed then a mixed-down version of the decoded Dolby digital audio
channels can be displayed.

Page 3-70

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualLoudness Meters
The tools provided in the Loudness window allow the loudness of the selected source stereo audio
pair, 5.1 surround sound audio group or decoded Dolby program (from the Dolby Decoder module) tobe monitored and measured. The Rx system provides up to four Loudness meters as standard,
allocated as one loudness channel per analyzer module. The Loudness meters are accessed fromthe Analyzer module menu on the HDMI® monitor output.

Loudness is measured in accordance with ITU 1770 and EBU Recommendation 128 which define themeasurement in terms of Loudness Units (UI), Loudness Units Full Scale (LUFS), or Loudness Kweighted Full Scale (LKFS) over different time periods.
The Loudness display allows the required mode (Integrated, Momentary or Short Term), input (SDI,
Fiber or AES) and (for a Dolby Decoder audio source) Dolby program to be selected.
The left-hand side of the window displays the actual audio values of the selected audio channels
numerically and graphically. The right-hand part of the window provides the current Integrated,
Momentary and Short Term loudness values, a loudness bar graphically displaying the selected
loudness mode value, input and source selection, and the loudness logging controls.
The right-hand part of the window also provides a True Peak Hold indicator showing the highest
perceived loudness level measured. The value will be displayed in red if it exceeds the True Peak
Alarm threshold level shown. The Alarm level is configurable in Options. The True Peak Hold
indicator can be reset as required.

Loudness Logging
If the Enable checkbox is selected in the Logging section, the system will log loudness continuously
and save CSV files every 30 minutes.
As defined in the EBU Recommendation 128, the Loudness Meter provides the following functions:lllStart: Starts the integrated loudness measurement.
Pause: Pauses the current integrated loudness logging process. Re-selecting this button will
resume the loudness logging process from the point at which it was paused.
Reset: Clears the current Infinitely integrated loudness session.

Loudness logs are stored automatically each time the pre-set duration is reached. The duration canbe defined in the Export Time setting of the Options, to be between 1 minute and 3 hours long,
although 30 minute intervals are more practical. These logs will be individual, time-stamped CSV
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-71

(comma separated value) files which are held in the loudness folder of the Rx operating system (Seethe section Rx File Structure for details).
Log files can be saved manually at any time by selecting the Save button in the Loudness Options
window; which can be accessed by selecting the Options button. Selecting the Save Name text box
will display an on-screen keyboard to allow the CSV file to be named appropriately. These logs canbe copied onto a USB pen drive if inserted into the front panel USB port and selected from theloudness folder.

Loudness Modes
The loudness is measured simultaneously with three different time periods:l

M (momentary) covering the shortest timescale of 400 msl

S (short term) covering the intermediate timescale of 3 secondsl

I (integrated) covering the duration of a program or segment.

The M, S and I values are displayed for the selected audio pair or 5.1 surround sound audio channels.

Input and Source
The SDI input with the embedded audio channels to be monitored is selected from the Input
dropdown list. The audio channels in the selected input are then selectable from the Source
dropdown list. The loudness meter can display and log the loudness of stereo pairs (for example G1P1), 5.1 surround sound audio channels.

Note that the channel mapping for the 5.1 surround sound channels is defined in the System →Surround Channel Setup window.
This allows the individual audio channels from the selected SDI input(s) to be mapped to the L (left), R(right), C (center), Lfe (low frequency effects), Ls (left surround), Rs (right surround), Bsl (back surroundleft) and Bsr (back surround right).

Page 3-72

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualLoudness Options

The Options menu allows the selection of meter scale (LU, LUFS or LKFS), measurement standard(EBU or ITU) and Meter Range as well as user-defined threshold values for Integrated, Momentaryand Short Term loudness. This menu also allows the manual or automatic deletion of Loudness logs.
The Mode dropdown allows the selection of the displayed scale of LU (Loudness Unit), LUFS
(Loudness Unit Full Scale) or LKFS (Loudness K-weighted Full Scale). These affect the loudness
values measured. Note that LUFS and LKFS have a −23 dB weighting to standardize broadcast
loudness measurement and prevent digital clipping. So if a −23 dB test tone is measured it will give 0
LUFS or 0 LKFS.
The Standard dropdown menu allows the EBU RP128 or ITU 1770 loudness measurement standard to
be selected. These affect the loudness values measured.
The Audio and dBFS dropdowns in the Scales section allow the scales of the audio channel meters
to be selected. The actual scale of the Loudness meter is defined by the loudness mode selection.
The Integrated (Infinity), Momentary and Short Term target values define the level, above which, aloudness error is logged as exceeding the defined upper limits. The errors count is displayed on the
Loudness window. If theTargets Enable checkbox is selected in the Local Options section, cursors
will be displayed on the meter bar and the loudness values will flash red when the target level isexceeded. The dB values next to the Integrated (Infinity), Momentary and Short Term values allow a
guard band to be set above the target value.
The True Peak Alarm threshold can be set in the True Peak section, .
Select the OK button to save the current changes or the Cancel button to discard any changes.
Loudness logs that have been manually or automatically saved can be deleted manually using the
Delete and Delete All buttons. When continuously logging program loudness, the Auto Delete
function can be used to delete log files older than 1 to 10 days. To narrow down the search whenlooking for existing log files, enable the Filter checkbox and then enter file name text in the Filter text
box.

GPIO Loudness Control
The loudness meters can be controlled by way of the GPIO interface using pins 0 and 1 or pins 2 and3. The control mechanism functions as follows:

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-73

Pin 0 / 2
Enable/Reset

Pin 1 / 3 Run/Pause

Loudness Operation

1

1

Reset

1

0

Reset

0

1

Paused00Running

Where:
l0 Represents Active LOW (grounded)l

1 Represents NOT 0 (HIGH)l

Pin 0 / 2 default (HIGH): Resetl

Pin 1 / 3 default (HIGH): Run

When using the Loudness GPIO Control, the default state is Reset.
This is equivalent to the default state of the Loudness user interface at power-on of the Rx. While
Enable / Reset is HIGH (Reset) the state of Run / Pause is ignored.
To start Loudness monitoring:
The Enable / Reset Pin is asserted LOW (Enable, leaving Run / Pause HIGH (Run).
To pause Loudness monitoring:
The Run / Pause Pin is asserted LOW (Pause) and it will remain paused until the Run /Pause pin goes HIGH (Run).
To reset Loudness monitoring:
The Enable / Reset Pin is asserted HIGH (RESET). Loudness will remain stopped (in RESET)
while the Enable / Reset Pin remains HIGH (RESET).
While Loudness GPIO Control is enabled, the two buttons which allow the user to start, stop, pause,
resume and reset Loudness in the GUI are hidden and replaced by the GPI Control state.

The Options menu has a new local configuration section for GPIO Control where the user can Enable/ Disable external control and select which two of the four GPI Pins to use (the choice is 0/1 or 2/3).
This enables the user to control two different loudness monitors independently via GPIO or control
multiple loudness monitors from the same GPIO control.
When Pins 2/3 are selected, Pin 2 is Enable / Reset and Pin 3 is Run / Pause
Page 3-74

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The following screen shows GPIO Control in the running state:

When the Loudness Meter(s) are under GPIO Control, the current GPI state is displayed in the bottomright corner of the window, for example:l

GPI State: Runningl

GPI State: Pausedl

GPI State: Reset

Configuration Conflict Handling for GPIO Preset and Loudness Control
The user can now select GPIO Input control from either the Presets screen or the Loudness Options
screen. It is possible to enable GPIO control for both Presets and Loudness at the same time but, on
experiencing a conflicting setting, the system displays an error dialog stating that the current
configuration is invalid:

Click Ok to close the error dialog and resolve the GPIO conflict between the Loudness and Preset
controls.
Logging with GPIO Loudness Control Enabled
The GPIO Loudness Control will begin a new log file on starting or resuming Loudness monitoring (ifconfigured in the Loudness options.) The GPIO pins can also be used to force a new log file while
Loudness is running by pulsing the Run/Pause control for 100 ms.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-75

Confidence Check
These different measure modes can give unpredictable results dependent on the type of program
and the combination of narrative, music and loud audio events such as explosions. The actual values
measured are also affected by the meter scale.
As a simple confidence check, use a stereo sine wave, 1000 Hz, −23.0 dBFS (per-channel peak level),in phase as the test tone applied to both channels simultaneously for 20 second duration. This should
give the following results:

Page 3-76l

M, S, I = −23.0 ±0.1 LUFS orl

M, S, I = 0.0 ±0.1 LU

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby Metadata (Dolby Analyzer Option)
The Rx Instrument with an Analyzer Module installed and Dolby Analyzer Option can monitor theselected input audio and provide details of its Dolby E , Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus audio
encoding.

The Dolby Metadata window is accessed by clicking on an Analyzer slot on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Dolby Metadata. This will create a new window panel for the selected input.
The Dolby Metadata window allows display of the Dolby metadata present in the selected audio
stream.
This window also allows the correct timing of the Dolby E packets within the SDI signal to be checked
at all stages in a broadcast chain. Checks can be made to see that the Dolby E has been createdcorrectly and transferred transparently through the broadcast chain unaffected by routers/switchers,
satellite links, etc.

Overview
Dolby E, Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus digital audio standards can be transported as audio dataover an SMPTE 337M AES carrier with a 48 kHz sample rate.
These standards can be used to transport mono, stereo, 5.1 and 7.1 audio programs:ll

Dolby 5.1 - involves five channels for normal-range speakers (20 Hz – 20,000 Hz) (right front,
center, left front, rear right, rear left) and one channel (20 Hz – 120 Hz allotted audio) for the subwoofer driven low-frequency effects.
Dolby 7.1 - uses six channels in the primary program (Independent Substream) for a standard
5.1 surround sound mix and then the remaining two channels in an ancillary program (Dependent Substream) to provide the additional down-mix.

Dolby E
Dolby E is a production audio encoding and decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories
that allows up to 8 channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1 or 7.1) that for a primary program (Programme
1) and optional ancillary programs. These 8 channels are compressed (low loss) into a digital streamthat can be transferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio
tracks.
This format is video frame based and allows switching a further processing/compression.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-77

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a ‘perceptual audio’ system for digital audio that allows the reduction of dataneeds to deliver high-quality sound. This system was developed primarily for DTV, DVD and HDTV.
This format allows up to six channels of sound (mono, stereo or 5.1) in the form of a single ‘program’that can be delivered at different bit rates. These 6 channels are compressed (lossy) into a digital
stream that can be broadcast. The most elaborate mode in common use is Dolby 5.1 with uses all six
channels to provide surround sound.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus (E-AC-3) is a more advanced version of Dolby Digital that provides a more efficientencoding algorithm with enough bandwidth to allow up to 20 channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1, 7.1
up to 13.1) for a primary program (Programme 1) and optional ancillary programs that can be delivered
at lower bit rates than Dolby Digital. These 20 channels are compressed (lossy) into an independent
digital datastream plus up to 8 dependent sub stream that can be transferred between compatible
devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Analyzer Reference
For the Dolby E data to be decoded correctly, the internal audio circuitry requires a reference that issynchronized to the input SDI signal for embedded audio and the external system reference for AES
audio. The Generator Reference must not be set to Free-Run or Dolby errors may be detected. Notethat the description field will display “Invalid Reference” if an incorrect reference is selected.

In this example, the SDI signal contains embedded audio with Dolby E, Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital
Plus present on one or more audio pairs. The Rx instrument needs to lock its internal audio clock to
the SDI signal and the Rx needs to be configured to select the specific audio channels containing the
Dolby audio.
In the example below, the AES signal contains a Dolby digital audio stream. The Rx instrument needs
to lock its internal audio clock to the external reference signal. This can be done from the Ref menu
on the HDMI task bar, the Dolby Metadata and the Generator → Genlock menus.

Page 3-78

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualIn the Dolby Metadata window, the Dolby Timing source should be set to Ext Ref.
The AES source must be locked to the same reference as the Rx.

Source Selection
The Dolby E may be monitored from any of the SDI input embedded audio channel pairs or the AES
input. The two dropdown lists in this section allow the module input and specific audio channels to be
selected.

Dolby E Framing Values
It is important for the Dolby E packet to be positioned well away from the video switching line so that
Dolby E packets are not corrupted by downstream switchers. At all places in the signal chain whereaudio can be delayed by a different value to the video, the Dolby E packet needs to be re-timed tomake sure that this timing specification is met. The position of the Dolby E packet in the video frame isdisplayed in lines and microseconds (μs).

Dolby E Timing source
Dolby E timing may be measured relative to the SDI input or the External reference. If the ‘Ideal’
checkbox is checked, the Dolby E Frame timing is relative to the normal position that it should be, ie itshould be as close to 0 as possible. Each video standard has a specified ‘Ideal’ line number that the
Dolby E packet should start on. If the Dolby E timing line is outside the valid range of lines it will be
displayed in red. If it is outside the ideal range it will be displayed in dark green – this is still a valid
Dolby E position but not recommended by Dolby. The timing measurement is always displayed interms of the SDI input lines and thus if an AES input is used as the Dolby E source, the line position will
not be displayed.
If you do not have the same reference as the SDI source, you will have to set the Reference Source
and Dolby Timing Source to be the SDI input.
Note: If Dolby E is present on a fast frame rate signal (50p, 59p or 60p) then it should always bereferenced to a interlaced reference at the same field rate as the packet length is longer than asingle frame and must start at the beginning of an even numbered frame.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-79

Dolby E Program Configuration

This displays the Program configuration (5.1 etc.), the number of program in the metadata, the frame
rates and bit depths and time-code if present.
CRC Errors:
This displays the number of CRC errors detected in the Dolby E metadata.
Begin Gain:
These fields indicate the gain to be applied to the specified channel at the beginning of
the audio frame when decoding.
End Gain:
These fields indicate the gain to be applied to the specified channel at the end of theaudio frame when decoding.
Program selection:
Selects which set of program metadata is shown. Up to 8 programs can be encoded in the
Dolby E packet dependent on the Program Configuration.
Program description:User-defined description for the selected program.

Dolby Digital Program Configuration

Page 3-80

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualWhen Dolby Digital metadata is analyzed this displays channel configuration and limited metadatathat is sent with Dolby Digital.

Dolby Digital Plus Program configuration

When Dolby Digital Plus metadata is analyzed this displays the Main, Dependent and Independent
program stream configuration and limited metadata that is sent with Dolby Digital Plus.

Program Metadata
Program metadata is created as part of Dolby authoring process. The following metadata is typicallyprovided with a Dolby E Program. Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus will use a subset of thismetadata:
Dialogue Norm:
The standard audio level for dialog.
BsMod:(Bitstream Mode) indicates the type of audio service that the bitstream contains. Complete
Main (CM) is the normal mode of operation and contains a complete audio program including dialog, music, and effects.
Ctr DnMix:(Center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Sur DnMix:(Surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LRoCtrDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LRoSurDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding anddecoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LR CtrDnMix:(Left, right, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LR SurDnMix:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-81

(Left, right, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Chan Mode:
Defines the channel configuration for Program 1 (i.e., mono, stereo, 5.1 channels).
Line Mode:
An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down¬mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
RFMode:An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
Room Type:
This informational parameter indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used forthe final audio mixing session.
MixLevel:
The Surround Down mix Level parameter indicates the nominal Lo/Ro down mix level ofthe Surround channel(s) with respect to the Left and Right channels
DolbySurnd:
The Dolby Surround Mode parameter indicates whether a two-channel Dolby Digital bitstream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program.
DownMixMod:
This controls the Down Mix Mode, used by the content creator, to optimize Center and Surround channel levels for use in stereo down mix mode for any two-channel programs.
D Sur Ex:This controls the Dolby Surround Ex channel that provides an extra audio channel for
Dolby 5.1. The extra surround channel of the Dolby Surround Ex system is matrix-encoded
onto the discrete left-surround and right-surround channels of the 5.1 mix.
The following control bits can also be set:
LFE:
The LFE Channel parameter enables or disables the Low-Frequency Effects (LFE) channel.
HPF:
This parameter can be used to activate the DC High pass filter for all input channels.
LPF:
The LFE Low Pass Filter parameter can be used to activate a 120 Hz low-pass filter applied
to the LFE input channel.
Sur 3dB Alt:
The Surround Channel 3 dB Attenuation function is used to apply a 3 dB attenuation to the
Surround channels of a multichannel soundtrack created in a room with film style calibration, when encoding it for consumer home theater playback.
Sur Ph+Filter:
The Surround Channel 90-Degree Phase-Shift feature is used for generating multichannel
Dolby Digital bitstreams that can be down-mixed in an external two channel decoder to create a true Dolby Surround compatible output.

Page 3-82

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualOrg Stream:
The Original Bitstream informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the
Dolby Digital bitstream. This bit has a value of 1 (box checked) if the bitstream is an original.
If it is a copy of an original bitstream, it has a value of 0.
Copyright:
The Copyright Bit informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the Dolby
Digital bitstream. If this bit has a value of 1 (box checked), the information in the bitstream isindicated as protected by copyright. If it has a value of 0, it is not copyright protected.
RF Ov Prot.:
The RF Over-modulation Protection parameter determines whether an RF pre-emphasis filter is used in the overload protection algorithm to prevent RF over-modulation in set-top
box decoders.

Peak Metering
The peak audio levels are included in the Dolby E metadata packet and may be displayed on the
Audio - Meters page. Select the appropriate set of meters to display Dolby levels and then they will
follow the selected Dolby E source.
Note: Note that audio cannot be decoded by the Rx range of products and so you will not beable to listen to the Dolby E signal. Note also that the LFE channel audio levels do not seem to bemetered by current Dolby encoding modules.
See the section Log Setup for details on which changes of Dolby E status may be logged.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-83

System Panels
Overview
Clicking on the System menu will allow the following window panels to be displayed.

Page 3-84

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualNetwork Setup
The Rx Instrument is fully network compatible and has a complete network interface to allow control
of any Rx instrument from any other unit. The Network menu allows the Rx instrument to be
configured as part of a network.

The Network Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Network Setup.

Network Setup
On all Rx instruments the network addressing can be setup using the HDMI® monitor output. On the
Rx 2000 instrument the IP Address can be setup using the Front Panel menus.
Note: If the Rx instrument is turned on without the network connected, you will have to select theRe-connect button to set networking up correctly. This is because the Ethernet connection autosenses whether it has to swap the cable over which means that you can use any Ethernet cablewith the Rx instrument but it also requires the Ethernet connection to be present when startingup.
The IP Address for the Rx instrument can be setup using the Network Setup window on the HDMI®
monitor output. A new Network Setup window can be opened by right-clicking in the display areaand selecting the Network Setup option.
If the DHCP checkbox is enabled, then the Rx instrument will attempt to request an IP Address
automatically from any network it is connected to. This will only work if a DHCP server is available on
the network.
If your network has static (non-changing) addresses, you will need to see your network administrator
to get an address assigned to your instrument and to get the Subnet mask and default gateway
address. These details can then be entered in the corresponding boxes in the menu. Select eachnumeric box in turn and use the up and down cursors to pick the required value.
When the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS Server values have been setup, use
the Apply button to attach the Rx instrument to the network.
On the Rx 2000 instrument, select the System → Network menu to access the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, Default Gateway and DNS Server values. Select the Setup button and edit the settings. Notethat if the DHCP checkbox is enabled, you will not be able to change these values. Once the network
addressing has been setup, select the Apply button to attach the Rx instrument to the network.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-85

Remote Control of the Rx Instrument
To allow remote control of an Rx instrument, you must have the TCP/IP address of the instrument set
and the Remote Control On checkbox must be checked.
The list box shows a list of current connections made to the instrument. This includes the webbrowser connection (127.0.0.1) which may be seen intermittently as the web browser connects every
few seconds and then disconnects again. See the remote control documentation available fordownload for more information on the protocol and method of control.
The Rx instrument uses a default Port Number of 2100 for remote control access (See the Remote
Control SDK documentation on the Download section of the PHABRIX website) This port number may
now be changed if it conflicts with other applications in your system.

Page 3-86

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Engineer Setup
The Engineer menu is used to manage the Rx instrument and allows user access to be setup and theinstallation of new versions of software.

The Engineer Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output task
bar and selecting Engineer Setup.

Clear Memories
This section of the menu allows the defined users who can access the Rx instrument to be cleared. To
use this function, select the Enable checkbox and press the Clear ALL button. This will clear all theuser memories.

Default Settings
This section of the menu allows you to reset the Rx instrument back to its default settings. To do this,select the Enable checkbox and press the Set Defaults button and the factory defaults will berecalled. This will not affect the system Security Code or Free Run frequency.

Rear Audio Calibration
The Cal value is use to calibrate the analog circuitry on the CPU Module to ensure that analog audio
signal level matches the digital audio level being produced by the Generator module.

Software UpgradeThis section of the menu allows new software versions to be installed. The Rx instrument may
download and install new versions of software when available. This process is a two-stage process:Download the software and then install it.
Note: Note that on the HDMI® monitor output this controlled from the System Info menu.
1. To download the latest software version, make sure that the network settings are correct andthat the Rx instrument is connected to the internet via the Ethernet connection.
Pressing the Download button will cause the current release of software to be
downloaded from the Phabrix website. This will take a short time depending on theconnection to the Internet. Once the download has completed, the software will bechecked for errors before being stored on the Rx instrument for future installation.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-87

If the latest software is already present on the Rx instrument, no software will be
downloaded and a message will be shown.
Note: Multiple releases of software may be stored on the Rx instrument, sothat you can re-install a previous release if required.
2. To install the downloaded software on the Rx instrument, select the release using the field withreleases listed. The largest number is the latest release. Select the Install button and a confirmation dialog is displayed. Press Yes and the installation will start. This process takes several
minutes to decompress the software, extract the files and then reprogram the hardware. If anerror is given during the installation, retry the installation and or download. Do not switch off the
Rx instrument until an installation has completed correctly.
Once the installation has competed, if Reboot after Install is checked the Rx
instrument will re-start with the new software installed. If not checked then the
instrument should be switched off and on again, manually.
Note: As part of the installation procedure, all memories are archived to a
backup file and then deleted. They can be restored from the SystemMemories page using the Restore button and selecting the _Before_
Upgrade archive.
The software release notes can be viewed by selecting the Changes button.

Page 3-88

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualHDMI/CPU SDI Setup / HDMI/SDI Output
HDMI Output
The Rx range of products provides a Monitor output in the form of an HDMI output that can display up
to 16 instrument windows at 1920 x 1080 resolution. This menu also controls the use of the SDI output
on the CPU board and allows the built-in generator to be used.

The HDMI/CPU SDI Output Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on themonitor output task bar and selecting HDMI/CPU SDI Output Setup.
The Monitor output display can display the presets selected by the Pre-set Buttons and can becontrolled by a USB mouse and keyboard connected to the Rx instrument.
Note: On the Rx 2000 instrument the Monitor output can be enable/disabled in the HDMI/SDI
Output menu that is available from the Instrument Display on the front of the instrument.
The HDMI® monitor output can only be in the following formats:l1080p, 50, 59.94 or 60l1080i, 50, 59.94 or 60

If the System Lock checkbox is selected the HDMI output will be locked to the system’s locking
reference input signal. See the section External Locking Reference.

CPU SDI Output
The built-in video signal Generator on the CPU board (standard on all Rx instruments) provides an SDI
test output. This is tied to the HDMI® monitor output and can only produce test signals in a range ofvideo formats matching those of the HDMI output. If an unrestricted range of test signal video formats
is needed, then either the HDMI out needs to be disabled or an additional Generator module isrequired.
With the HDMI output enabled ( configurable on the Rx 2000 instrument) then the frame rate of the
SDI output is limited to match the HDMI output. The HDMI standard and frame rate combo-boxes arelimited to 1080p 50/59/60. If the HDMI output is disabled (Rx 2000 only), the SDI output may be any
frame rate.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-89

Using SDI Output as Test Pattern Generator
The SDI output on the CPU module can be used as a test pattern and audio tone generator. This
output is limited to specific test patterns and can only provide audio tones for Audio Group 1.
Select the required video format, line rate and frame rate from the dropdown menus in the CPU SDI
Output section then select 100% Bars, 75% Bars of CheckField as the test pattern.
The audio source for each channel may be Silence, Fixed tone (a range of fixed frequencies), variable
tone (set in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz to 23.99 kHz) or white noise.
If the checkbox Lock to Ref is enabled, the test pattern will be locked to the system’s locking
reference input signal, see the section External Locking Reference.

Using HDMI Over SDI

Select the SDI checkbox in the Instrumentation Output section if you wish to route the HDMI®
monitor output over SDI. This will disable the on-board test pattern generator.

External Locking Reference
When using an external locking reference signal, the Rx system will provide the best possible locking
regardless of the locking reference frame rate and the generated frame rate.
lllPage 3-90

When the frame rate of the locking reference is exactly the same as the generated frame rate,
there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal between them.
When the frame rate of the locking reference and the generated frame rate are divisible (forexample 50/25, 60/30, 59.94/23.98) there will be an exact lock vertical and horizontal
between them.
When there is no relationship between the frame rate of the locking reference and that of thegenerated frame rate (for example a 625/50 locking reference and a 23.98 generated test pattern) then there will be a static lock between them but this will not be consistent.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSystem Info
The System Info window displays the system software status and options that are installed on the
HDMI® monitor output.

The System Info window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output task bar
and selecting System Info.

Setting the User Language
The language used to display the menus in may be changed to one of the supported languages.
(Currently only English is supported.)

Changing Options Security Code
When new options are purchased for the Rx instrument a new Security Code will be supplied. This isspecific to this instrument and cannot be used on other units. The security code is entered using theEdit field below the System Option list and is edited by pressing OK and using the menu function
keys. If an incorrect Security code is entered a dialog will be displayed. The new Security code will
only be saved if it is valid, the old code will be used until a valid code is entered. Once a valid newcode has been entered, the list of options provided by that code will be displayed. The options codeis stored independently to memories and system settings.

Software UpgradeThis section of the menu allows new software versions to be installed. The Rx instrument may
download and install new versions of software when available. This process is a two stage process:Download the software and then install it.
1. To download the latest software version, make sure that the network settings are correct andthat the Rx instrument is connected to the internet via the Ethernet connection.
Pressing the Download button will cause the current release of software to be
downloaded from the Phabrix website. This will take a short time dependent on theconnection to the Internet. Once the download has completed, the software will bechecked for errors before being stored on the Rx instrument for future installation.
If the latest software is already present on the Rx instrument, no software will be
downloaded and a message will be shown.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-91

Note: Multiple releases of software may be stored on the Rx instrument, sothat you can re-install a previous release if required.
2. To install the downloaded software on the Rx instrument, select the release using the field withreleases listed. The largest number is the latest release. Select the Install button and a confirmation dialog is displayed. Press Yes and the installation will start. This process takes several
minutes to decompress the software, extract the files and then reprogram the hardware. If anerror is given during the installation, retry the installation and or download. Do not switch off the
Rx instrument until an installation has completed correctly.
Once the installation has competed, if Reboot after Install is checked the Rx
instrument will re-start with the new software installed. If not checked then the
instrument should be switched off and on again manually.
Note: As part of the installation procedure, all memories are archived to a
backup file and then deleted. They can be restored from the SystemMemories page using the Restore button and selecting the archive_Before_
Upgrade.
The software release notes can be viewed by selecting the Changes button.

Page 3-92

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualBoard Status
The Board Status window displays the current status of the hardware modules on the HDMI® monitor
output. This can then be used to inspect which Modules have been installed in the Rx instrument.

The Board Status window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Board Status.

Board (Module)This section of the menu details the Modules that are currently installed in the Rx chassis.
Front:
Displays the hardware details of the front panel board.
CPU:
Displays the hardware details of the CPU Board.
Board 1:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 1.
Board 2:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 2.
Board 3:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 3.
Board 4:
Displays the hardware details of the Module fitted in chassis slot 4.

Hardware Status
This section of the menu shows any hardware errors that have been recorded by the Rx instrument. If
the error count is greater than 0, contact you local dealer for advice.

System TemperatureThis section of the menu displays the current Rx instrument temperature. This information is provided
for diagnostics purposes only.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-93

Voltages
This section of the menu displays the current voltages for the currently selected board in the Board
section of the menu. This information is provided for diagnostics purposes only.

SFP
This section of the menu displays the type of SFP (Small Form Factor Package) module is installed in
the board currently selected board in the Board section of the menu. This information is provided for
diagnostics purposes only.

Page 3-94

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDate and Time Setup
The Date and Time Setup window displays the current status of the hardware modules on the HDMI®
monitor output. This can then be used to set the date and time of the Rx instrument.

The Date and Time Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output
task bar and selecting Date & Time Setup.
This menu can also be displayed by clicking on the date displayed in the bottom right of the Monitor
Output display.

Changing the Date and Time
Check the Enable Change checkbox under the date and time fields and then use the cursor to movearound the date and time. Press OK to edit a field and again to complete the change. When all fields
have been edited, uncheck the Enable Change checkbox and the new date and time will be set.

Changing the Date Format
The date format used on logging screens etc may be set using the Format selection control. Threeformats are available: Date-Month-Year, Month-Date-Year and Year-Month-Date.

Daylight Saving Time
Daylight saving times can be implemented as well as the introduction of a fixed time offset withrespect to GMT. Select the Apply Daylight Saving Time checkbox and set daylight saving time startand end dates in the DST Start and DST End sections. If there is a fixed time offset between local
time and Greenwich Mean Time this can also be applied.
Uncheck the Change checkbox to action the Date and Time change.

Network Time Protocol
The Date and Time Setup window allows the selection of Network Time Protocol to control the Rx
system time. Select the checkbox Set TIme Automaticallyenter the primary and secondary
addresses for the network time, then select the Apply button to apply these changes.
The primary and secondary address fields can be populated with IP addresses or with a web address(for example: pool.ntp.org).
Note that if the Rx network is set to a static IP address, then the network Default Gateway address
and DNS Server address must have valid addresses.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-95

The system will automatically try and retry the primary and secondary addresses until local systemtime can be synchronized to network time. The system will check every 24 hours to ensure that thesystem time is synchronized.
Uncheck the Change checkbox to action the Date and Time change.

Page 3-96

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAudio Monitoring Setup
The Speaker menu controls which audio pair that can be heard on the loud speakers and headphone
output of the Rx instrument.

The Audio Monitoring Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor
output task bar and selecting Audio Monitor Setup.

Speaker / Headphone
The Rx 2000 instrument contains stereo loudspeakers and associated stereo headphone socket
which can be connected to any of the audio input or output channels or pairs.
The Mute checkbox allows both signals to be muted.
A volume control is provided to adjust the level to headphones and speaker together. The balance
control can be used to adjust the Left-Right balance for the source being monitored.
The monitored source can be set to the input or output of the Rx instrument and the input and output
sources can be set independently to either a stereo pair or single audio channel.
The Source dropdown is used to select Analyzer, AES Input or Dolby Decoder output as the audio
source. The Analyzer Source is used to select the specific channels of the source that is to be heard.
The speaker can be muted when headphones are plugged in by checking the Mute checkbox.
Note: When listening to an audio source, the Rx system needs to be locked to the samereference as the audio otherwise audio clicks may be heard on the speaker.

Rear Panel Audio
The controls in the Rear Panel Audio section of the menu are used to setup the audio levels of theunbalanced analog audio available on the D-type connector on the CPU module.
The Follows Speaker Gain checkbox, if enabled, will cause the audio level of the analog signal tofollow the level set by the volume control on the front panel of the Rx unit. If the checkbox is notenabled the analog audio level will remain the same regardless of the front panel volume control.
The Follow Speaker Source checkbox, if enabled, makes the rear panel audio the same as the
Speaker/Headphone selection.
The volume slider below the Follows Speaker Gain checkbox can be adjusted to set the nominal
output volume of the analog output signal.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-97

The Source dropdown is used to select Analyzer, AES Input or Dolby Decoder output as the audio
source. The Analyzer Source is used to select the specific channels to be routed through to the rear
panel and HDMI audio.
The HDMI/SDI 8ch Output checkbox, if enabled, allows eight audio channels to be routed to the rear
panel / HDMI audio instead of a stereo pair.

Page 3-98

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby Decoder Setup
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed in the Rx system, it can be configured to decode specific SDI
or AES inputs of Analyzer or 4AES modules.

The Dolby Decoder Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor
output task bar and selecting Dolby Decoder Setup.
Source:Defines the specific Analyzer input channel or 4AES module to use.
Input Pair:
Defines the specific SDI audio pair or 4AES module input to use.
ProgramDefines the specific Dolby program to decode.
Note: The two Dolby Decoders cannot be assigned to the same Analyzer or 4AES module.
Throughout the Rx system audio instruments, the decoded output of these two Dolby Decoders canbe selected so that the individual decoded Dolby channels, pairs of channels or a mixed-down
version can be selected.
Note: The Dolby Decoder settings are stored as part of the system configuration and cannot besaved in presets.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-99

Surround Channel Setup
Throughout the Rx instrument, wherever 5.1 surround sound audio is selected, the actual physicalaudio channel mapping that is used is defined in the Surround Channel Setup menu.

The Surround Channel Setup window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor
output task bar and selecting Surround Channel Setup.
This menu is used to route specific embedded SDI audio channels to the 5.1 channels these arestored as two different configurations, 5.1A and 5.1B which can be selected from the Configuration
dropdown menu.
The center section of the menu displays a table of meter channels against SDI input channel. Thesecan be setup to match the 5.1 channels of the SDI inputs to the corresponding meter labels so that
Loudness measurements can be made correctly.
The right-hand section of the menu show the routing of these meter channels. Typically the Dolby E
5.1 configuration is as follows:l

AES 1/2 - G1P1 - Front left / Front rightl

AES 3/4 - G1P2 - Center / LFE (low frequency effects)l

AES 5/6 - Rear left / Rear right.

Time Code Displays
The Time Code Displays window controls the display of time code information on the HDMI® monitor
output. Time code is available on the locking reference input and on each video input that isanalyzed.

The Time Code Displays window is accessed by clicking on the System menu on the monitor output
task bar and selecting Time Code Displays. This window is also displayed when selected from thePicture instrument.
The Time Code Displays window allows Vertical Interval Timecode (VITC) present on the analog(625i/50 and 525i/59.94) locking reference signal connected to the REF connection on the rear ofPage 3-100

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualthe Rx unit, and Longitudinal Timecode (LTC) present on the GPIO D-type connector, to be displayedon the Task Bar of the HDMI® monitor output.
The line number where the VITC is located on the analog locking reference signal can be selectedusing the Line Number field.
This window also allows the ANC Timecode from the video input to be displayed in three different
positions and three different sizes on the picture window.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-101

Default Window Size
The Default Window Sizes window controls how instrument windows are added to the HDMI® monitor
output and their starting size.

Instrument windows can be automatically assembled on screen either left to right or top to bottom.
The default size of Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope, Eye and Jitter windows can be set as Small (1/16
screen size) or Quad (1/4 screen size). The default size of the Picture and Waveform windows can also
be set to Large (3/4 screen size) or Full (full screen native video format display).

Page 3-102

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDolby Generator Setup (Dolby Generator Option)

The Dolby Metadata Generator software option allows generation of Dolby-E, Dolby Digital and Dolby
Digital Plus pre-encoded test signals to check that they are transferred transparently through thebroadcast chain unaffected by routers/switchers, satellite links, etc.
Warning: With this software version Dolby E can be embedded within 50, 59.94 and 60 frames
per second progressive video formats but this mode of working has not been supported by
Dolby since 2008. This mode of operation of Dolby Generator is only provided to support legacy
Dolby equipment produced prior to 2008.
For high progressive frame rates an external locking reference must be used.
Note: With this software version Non-keyed signals are generated which may be incompatible
with certain VTRs.

Overview
There are a number of Dolby broadcast digital audio standards that transport audio data over an
SMPTE 337M AES carrier with a 48 kHz sample rate. The type of Dolby to be generated can beselected from the dropdown list in the top-left corner of the menu:l

Dolby El

Dolby Digitall

Dolby Digital Plus

These standards can be used to transport mono, stereo, 5.1 and 7.1 audio programs:ll

Dolby 5.1 - involves five channels for normal-range speakers (20 Hz to 20,000 Hz) (right front,
center, left front, rear right, rear left) and one channel (20 Hz to 120 Hz allotted audio) for the
subwoofer driven low-frequency effects.
Dolby 7.1 - uses six channels in the primary program (Independent Substream) for a standard
5.1 surround sound mix and then the remaining two channels in an ancillary program (Dependent Substream) to provide the additional downmix.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-103

Dolby E
Dolby E is an audio encoding and decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that allows
up to eight channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1 or 7.1) that for a primary program (Programme 1) andoptional ancillary programs. These eight channels are compressed (lossless) into a digital stream thatcan be transferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a perceptual audio system for digital audio that allows the reduction of dataneeds to deliver high-quality sound. This system was developed primarily for DTV, DVD and HDTV.
This format allows up to six channels of sound (mono, stereo or 5.1) in the form of a single programthat can be delivered at different bit rates. These six channels are compressed (lossy) into a digital
stream that can be broadcast. The most elaborate mode in common use is Dolby 5.1 with uses all six
channels to provide surround sound.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus (E-AC-3) is a more advanced version of Dolby Digital that provides a more efficientencoding algorithm that provide enough bandwidth that allows up to 20 channels of audio (mono,
stereo, 5.1, 7.1 up to 13.1) that for a primary program (Programme 1) and optional ancillary programs thatcan be delivered at much lower bit rates than Dolby Digital. These 20 channels are compressed(lossy) into an independent digital datastream plus up to eight dependent sub-stream that can betransferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.

Dolby E Synchronization - Generator Reference
The Dolby audio test signal produced by the Rx instrument is common to all generator modules within
the system and is locked to either one of the generator video formats or to the System Reference(typically external reference).
If the Dolby Generator is locked to an external signal, the reference signal must have a compatible
frame rate. See the table below for examples.

Page 3-104

Video Output Format

Valid Reference Formats

1080i501080i50, 625i50(PAL)

1080i591080i59, 525i59(NTSC)

1080p251080p25, 1080i50, 625i50(PAL)

1080p291080p29, 1080i59, 525i59(NTSC)

720p501080p25, 720p25, 1080i50, 625i50(PAL) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

720p591080p29, 720p29, 1080i59, 525i59(NTSC) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

1080p501080p25, 720p25, 1080i50, 625i50(PAL) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

1080p591080p29, 720p29, 1080i59, 525i59(NTSC) – due to length of packet being
over one frame long

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualNote: For high frame rate, progressive video formats being generated the Rx chassis must havea compatible frame rate locking reference and the Dolby Generator must be set to External
Reference.

Editing Program Information
Stream type:
Dolby-E, Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus streams can be generated.
Config, Bit Depth:
The program configuration and Bit Depth can be changed to load the pre-encoded file.
Stream contents:
The tones generated are of a fixed predefined frequency. Four sets of pre-encoded
streams are provided:
Ramp Var:
Each channel has a different frequency to allow checking of channels. The
levels are ramped so that different channels have different levels.
−3dB Fixed:
All the tones are at −3dB co-phased / timed and are at the same frequency.
−18dB Fixed
All the tones are at −3dB co-phased / timed and are at the same frequency.
−20dB Fixed
All the tones are at −3dB co-phased / timed and are at the same frequency.
The following table lists fixed frequency values for the Fixed level streams above:

Frame Rate

Normal Frequency

LFE Frequency

23.98

4.8 kHz211 Hz24

6 kHz

240 Hz25 / 50

6 kHz

240 Hz29.97 / 59.84

6 kHz

133 Hz30 / 60

6 kHz

240 Hz

Dolby-E start line:
The start line can be used to set valid or invalid ranges to allow checking of the Dolby-E
guard band on downstream equipment. If the start line is set outside the valid range specified by Dolby, the line number will be displayed in red font.
Relative to Ideal:
If this checkbox is checked, the line number displayed is relative to the Dolby specified
ideal line. A value of 0, therefore, starts the Dolby-E packet on the Ideal Line for that video
format.
Frame Rate:
This is set by default to the currently generated frame rate but may be modified by the user
to test downstream equipment.
Original Rate:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-105

This is set by default to the currently generated frame rate but may be modified by the user
to test downstream equipment.
Note: When generating a progressive fast rate video standard such as 720p50, 720p59 or
720p60 etc. the Dolby-E signal will always be generated at the related slower rate. This is a
Dolby restriction as the packets are over one frame in length for these video formats.

Program Metadata Editing
Many of the metadata fields may be edited to test downstream equipment. The Channel Mode field
may be edited to invalid settings but they will be shown in red to show that they are invalid. The
settings currently being edited are for the selected program but multiple program metadata values
can be modified and the settings for all programs are stored in memories.
Metadata changes and line changes will happen cleanly so that no corruption to the Dolby signal will
occur.
A maximum of 30 characters may be used for program description text. If the text is longer than this,extra characters will be ignored.
The Generator → Dolby menu allows the metadata for a Dolby E datastream to be setup for testing
purposes. The main purpose of setting these metadata fields is to check that they are transferredtransparently through the broadcast chain unaffected by routers/switchers, satellite links, etc. For any
program this metadata would be created as part of Dolby E authoring process. Using the Dolby
generator, the following metadata can be setup for Program 1:
Dialogue Norm:
The standard audio level for dialog.
BsMod:(Bitstream Mode) indicates the type of audio service that the bitstream contains. Complete
Main (CM) is the normal mode of operation and contains a complete audio program including dialog, music, and effects.
Ctr DnMix:(Center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Sur DnMix:(Surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surroundsound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LRoCtrDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LRoSurDnMix:(Left, right, stereo, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding anddecoding of surround sound mixes for a Dolby 7.1 Dependent Substream.
LR CtrDnMix:(Left, right, center down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
LR SurDnMix:(Left, right, surround down-mix) is a weighting value used in the encoding and decoding ofsurround sound mixes for a Dolby 5.1 Independent Substream.
Chan Mode:

Page 3-106

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Defines the channel configuration for Program 1 (i.e., mono, stereo, 5.1 channels).
Line Mode
An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down¬mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
RFMode:An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Mode used by consumer and professional
decoder products that simplifies the implementation of Dialogue Normalization, Dynamic
Range Control, and down mixing functions, all of which are necessary in Dolby Digitalproducts.
Room Type:
This informational parameter indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used forthe final audio mixing session.
MixLevel:
The Surround Down mix Level parameter indicates the nominal Lo/Ro down mix level ofthe Surround channel(s) with respect to the Left and Right channels
DolbySurnd:
The Dolby Surround Mode parameter indicates whether a two-channel Dolby Digital bitstream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program.
DownMixMod:
This controls the Down Mix Mode, used by the content creator, to optimize Center and Surround channel levels for use in stereo down mix mode for any two-channel programs.
D Sur Ex:This controls the Dolby Surround Ex channel that provides an extra audio channel for
Dolby 5.1. The extra surround channel of the Dolby Surround Ex system is matrix-encoded
onto the discrete left-surround and right-surround channels of the 5.1 mix.
The following control bits can also be set:
LFE
The LFE Channel parameter enables or disables the Low-Frequency Effects (LFE) channel.
HPF
This parameter can be used to activate the DC High pass filter for all input channels.
LPF
The LFE Low Pass Filter parameter can be used to activate a 120 Hz low-pass filter applied
to the LFE input channel.
Sur 3dB Alt
The Surround Channel 3 dB Attenuation function is used to apply a 3 dB attenuation to the
Surround channels of a multichannel soundtrack created in a room with film style calibration, when encoding it for consumer home theater playback.
Sur Ph+Filter
The Surround Channel 90-Degree Phase-Shift feature is used for generating multichannel
Dolby Digital bitstreams that can be down-mixed in an external two channel decoder to create a true Dolby Surround compatible output.
Org Stream
The Original Bitstream informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the
Dolby Digital bitstream. This bit has a value of 1 (box checked) if the bitstream is an original.
If it is a copy of an original bitstream, it has a value of 0.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-107

Copyright
The Copyright Bit informational parameter sets the value of a single bit within the Dolby
Digital bitstream. If this bit has a value of 1 (box checked), the information in the bitstream isindicated as protected by copyright. If it has a value of 0, it is not copyright protected.
RF Ov Prot.
The RF Over-modulation Protection parameter determines whether an RF pre-emphasis filter is used in the overload protection algorithm to prevent RF over-modulation in set-top
box decoders.

Default Program Metadata
Pressing the Default button will return program metadata settings to their default values.

Embedding Dolby on SDI Stream
To embed Dolby signals on an SDI stream, the Audio source for that channel should be set to Dolby.
These source selections are found on the Generator – Audio Group 1, 2, 3, 4 pages. Selecting one
channel of an audio pair to DolbyGen will force the other channel in the pair to select DolbyGen also.
As the Dolby streams are data, the volume and phase controls are disabled. Changing a channel from
Dolby to another source will cause the other channel in the pair to select silence.

Embedding Dolby Signals on AES Stream
To embed Dolby signals on the AES output, the Audio source for the AES output should be set to
DolbyGen. This selection is found on the right-hand side of the Generator → Audio Group 1,2,3,4
pages.
Note: If DolbyGen is selected as the Source for any AES output, the Dolby Generator in the
System menu needs to be set to External reference otherwise the Dolby audio packet may not
be embedded into the AES stream in the correct place.

Page 3-108

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualLogging Panels
Overview
Clicking on the Logging menu will allow the following window panels to be displayed.

Logging allows events to be detected and recorded for future examination. The events to be logged
can be specified so that unwanted events do not appear in the event log. If a system has a problem
with intermittent signals, the Rx instrument can be connected to that source and can be left for several
days to log any errors. At the end of that period the log can be examined and the time and date ofeach error noted.

Event Log
The Event Log is where events, that have triggers setup in the Log Setup menu, are recorded.

The Event Log window is accessed by clicking on the Logging menu on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Event Log.
The event log may be cleared by pressing theClear Log button; a dialog is displayed asking the user
to confirm the action. A date stamped mark may be inserted into the event log to allow users to see
when a test started or when a significant event happened using the Add Mark in log button.
Note: The event log only shows changes in status, so if the input is always in error and nevergood, an event will not be shown. To get the full state of the instrument will require looking at thecurrent status as well as the event log.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-109

Event Log Setup - General
The Log Setup menu allows specific events to be tracked by the Rx instrument. The events to belogged are set up on this page by checking the appropriate Log checkboxes.

The Log Setup window is accessed by clicking on the Logging menu on the monitor output task bar
and selecting Log Setup.

Audio Thresholds
This section allows the thresholds for audio events to be set. If the audio level for a channel is higher
than that specified for the Clip or High fields for the number of seconds specified then an event will
be added to the event log. If the audio level for a channel is lower than that specified for the Quiet or
Muted fields, then an event will be added to the event log. Logging may be limited to specified audio
pairs.

Video Status
This section allows specific video status events to be logged:
Output Standard:
A log event will be added whenever the generator video standard changes.
Reference Status:
A log event will be added whenever the external reference standard changes or theexternal reference input is lost or re-appears.
Input Status:
A log event will be added whenever the input video standard changes or if the input is lostor re-appears.
EDH/CRC:
A log event will be added whenever a EDH/CRC error state changes. If the EDH/CRC stateis correct, the event will show OK, else it will show FAIL. Separate Luma and Chroma CRC
events may be shown. Note that EDH/CRC events may occur when an SDI signal is connected or removed.
TRS Errors:
If the number of lines changes or line length changes during a frame, the input video will
be detected as the TRS changing and an event logged. If the signal stays changing only asingle event will be logged. If the SDI signal has a static line count and line length for five

Page 3-110

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualseconds, a TRS OK event will be added to the log. This reduces the number of log events
for a bad SDI signal.
Picture CRC
This should only be used for static single frame test patterns (do not use for Zone Plate,
dynamic broadcast signals or CheckField / Pathological test patterns which are two frames
long at HD). This can be used to log changes in the CRC for the active picture (a value
which is unique for each test pattern). If the CRC changes and was previously OK an error
is added to the event log. If the CRC is the same as the last frame for five seconds an OK
event will be added to the event log. Thus, if the active picture CRC is continuously changing there will only be one event in the log until the picture remains static when an OK
event will be added.

AES Status
This section allows AES audio errors to be logged:
ErrorsA log event will be added whenever the embedded audio error status changes. This may
be due to a Data Block Number error, ECC error or phase error status change. The event
entry will detail which state has changed.
Input Status
A log event will be added if the AES signal disappears or appears.

Dolby E Status (Requires Dolby E Analysis Option)
This section allows Dolby E errors to be logged.
Errors:Adds an event to the event log when a Dolby E input stream is detected or lost. An event
will also be added if a CRC error is detected in the Dolby E metadata stream. If an error is
detected in the Dolby E stream, it may mean that the Dolby E stream has not been synchronized with the embedded audio clocks.
Timing:Will log if the Dolby E frame timing is outside the Dolby specified Ideal range. A Warning
event will be given if the signal is OK but slightly outside the range and an Error event if it ison an invalid line.
Common Metadata:
Will log any changes of the common metadata (Program Configuration, Bit Depth, Frame
Rates)
Program Metadata:
Will log any changed program metadata. This can be useful for following changes to a program stream over a long period of transmission.

Logging
This section controls all logging events:
Clear
Clears all entries in the event log.
EnableEnables the logging process. If this is not checked, no events will be added to the log. Thisis a simple method of turning off alllogging temporarily.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-111

Beep
Causes the Rx will emit a short tone when an Event is added to the log. Note that the beep
will happen even if the Speaker is set to Mute.
SYS Errors
Allows system errors to be displayed in the Event Log if they happen. If you are having
problems with your Rx, checking this box can add events that can help PHABRIX determine the nature of the problem.
System Info
Allows system to report additional internal messages in the Event Log if they happen. If you
are having problems with your Rx instrument, checking this box can add events that canhelp PHABRIX determine the nature of the problem.
Save
Saves the current event log to a text file in the currently specified language. The log file created, logfile.txt may be downloaded using a FTP connection.

Log Time Limit
The time when logging is enabled may be limited by time of day. Logging will start at the specified
start time and end at the specified end time. The specified times must be after the current time.
Uncheck the checkbox to log at all times. Logging must be enabled using the checkbox above forthis to work.

Page 3-112

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualEvent Log Setup - Eye / Jitter
The Eye Log Setup menu allows specific Eye and Jitter events to be tracked by the Rx instrument.
The events to be logged are set up on this page by checking the appropriate Log checkboxes.

The Eye / Jitter logging window is accessed by clicking on the Logging menu on the monitor output
task bar and selecting Eye Log Setup.

Jitter Thresholds
The jitter level at which an event is added may be set independently for each meter. (Note, only one
meter is provided as standard.) This allows you to set the maximum allowed jitter level and then test
for invalid values over a period of time.
A different jitter threshold may be set for each of the three SDI data rates (SD / HD / 3G) for both Jitter1
and Jitter2. The defaults are the maximum values specified by the SMPTE standard.
Jitter errors are detected within 200 ns and so intermittent peak errors can be detected.

Eye Timings
If checked, these controls will enable logging of invalid timing values. An event will be logged if thevalue exceeds the valid SMPTE range and an event will be logged when the signal becomes valid
again.
Eye measurements are performed using statistical calculations on the waveforms and are thus
performed at a slower rate than jitter measurements. Measurements can take a few seconds tostabilize and this should be taken into account.

Eye Amplitude
If checked, these controls will enable logging of invalid amplitude or overshoot / undershoot values.
An event will be logged if the value exceeds the valid SMPTE range and an event will be logged
when the signal becomes valid again.
Eye measurements are performed using statistical calculations on the waveforms and are thus
performed at a slower rate than jitter measurements. Measurements can take a few seconds tostabilize and this should be taken into account.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-113

Event Log Setup - ANC Packets
The Log ANC Status menu allows specific ANC data events to be tracked by the Rx instrument. The
events to be logged are set up on this page by checking the appropriate Log checkboxes.

The ANC Packets logging window is accessed from the Logging menu on the monitor output task bar
and selecting ANC Log Setup.
The Log ANC Status menu allows you to select which ANC packets to log when changes in status
occur (e.g., Present, Checksum Error, Missing, Parity Error). Individual checkboxes are provided todetermine which packet DID/SDID combinations are logged.
See the section ANC Status for definitions of these checkboxes.
Select All
Toggles the checkboxes for all packets on or off.
Select Active
Causes the checkboxes for all packets currently present to be checked.
Setup
Allows the user to define and name their own DID/SDID values for an ANC packet type.
Reset
Clears the state for all packet types; consequently a packet previously displayed as in error
is shown as OK.

Page 3-114

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualPreset Memories
Overview
The Rx Instrument settings for Generator, Analyzer and HDMI® monitor output can be saved andrecalled as required.
Selecting the Save Preset function will allow the current Analyzer, Generator and HDMI settings to be
saved using a named preset.

Selecting the System Presets function displays the System Presets window to allow presets to beedited.

The System Presets menu displays the current settings in the Rx instrument that may be saved for
future recall.

Defining Preset Content
The checkboxes on the right-hand side determine what is saved in the memory. Non-overlapping
presets may then be combined. For example, saving generator settings or HDMI setting separately
without affecting analyzer settings.

Generator Section
The Generator section controls the settings of all Generator modules installed in the system, but does
not include the on-board test pattern generator which is considered a system-wide function with only
its current state saved:lVideo - if this checkbox is selected then the Generator video format, line rate and frame ratesettings for all Generator modules will be saved as part of the preset.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-115

l

l

l

Audio - if this checkbox is selected then the Generator Audio tone settings for Group 1, 2, 3 and
4 for all Generator modules (including 4AES modules) will be saved as part of the preset. This
also covers any Dolby metadata settings.
ANC - not currently used.
Ref - if this checkbox is selected then the Generator Genlock settings for all Generator modules will be saved as part of the preset.

Analyzer Section
The Analyzer section controls the settings of all Analyzer modules installed in the system:
Video
When selected, the configuration of the Picture, Waveform, Vectorscope and Video Timing
instruments for all modules are saved as part of the preset. This also saves the System
Reference selection.
Audio
When selected, the configuration of the Audio Meters, Loudness Meters, Dolby Metadata
Analyzer, Lissajous display instruments are saved for all Analyzer modules (including 4AES
modules) as part of the preset.
ANC
When selected, the configuration of the ANC Inspector and ANC Logging setup for all Analyzer modules are saved as part of the preset.
Eye / Jitter
When selected, the configuration of the Eye and Jitter instruments and Eye Log Setup settings for all Eye modules are saved as part of the preset.

Misc Section
The Misc section, HDMI checkbox if selected will save the screen layout as part of the preset.

GPIO Section
The dropdown menu in the GPIO section allows one of fourteen different values to be allocated to
the Presets. The values are a decimal representation of the four GPIO inputs 0, 1, 2 and 3 (rear panel
26-way D-type connection) which if taken low (0 volts or logical zero) with automatically select anddisplay the corresponding preset.
l

GPIO 0 = 1

l

GPIO 1 = 2l

GPIO 2 = 4l

GPIO 3 = 8

Saving Presets
Select the memory to save settings to by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing
OK. Use the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next
to the memory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.
Specify which aspects of the Rx instrument are to be saved in the memory using the checkboxes on
the right-hand side. If you want to change the name of the memory, see the section Renaming Presets
below before saving.

Page 3-116

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualMove the cursor to the Save button and press OK. The text field under the Memory list will change toshow the last Saved or Recalled memory.

Recalling Presets
Presets can be recalled in a range of different ways depending on which part of the Rx control system
you are using:lUsing the System Presets menu:
1. Select the memory to be recalled by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list andpressing OK. Use the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK.
The name edit field next to the memory list will be updated with the name of the selected
memory.
2. Move the cursor to the Recall button and press OK. The text field under the Memory list
will change to show the last Saved or Recalled memory.

lUsing the Load Prst button in the bottom-left corner of the HDMI output display.

l

Using the preset buttons along the bottom of the HDMI output display.

l

Using the Rx front panel controls.

Renaming Presets
Select the memory to be renamed by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing OK.
Use the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next tothe memory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.
Move the cursor to the edit field and press OK. The menu keys at the bottom of the screen willchange to show text keys similar to a mobile phone. Pressing a key repeatedly will cycle through thecharacters for that key. Pressing a different key will move the cursor to the next position and insert thefirst key value for that key. The cursor left and right keys can be used to move the position of the text
cursor which is where the next character will be inserted. The Back Space key will delete the key tothe left of the cursor. The Cancel key will cancel edit mode and restore the original text. Once you
have finished editing the name, press OK to rename the memory.

Adding Additional Presets
To add a new memory, press the ADD button. This will use the current memory name and settings.

Clearing Presets
Select the memory to be cleared by moving the cursor to the Select Memory list and pressing OK.
Use the Up / Down cursor keys to select the memory and then press OK. The name edit field next tothe memory list will be updated with the name of the selected memory.
Move the cursor to the Clear button and press OK. The memory list will show the default name for thatmemory. A cleared memory cannot be recalled.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-117

Exporting Presets
Presets can be exported to a single file for backup purposes and re-imported into the internal format.
This allows different sets of memories to be used for different tasks, such as command scripts. In
addition, presets can be exported from one Rx instrument and imported onto another Rx, as
described below. Exported memories are in a text format and so may be edited on a PC anddownloaded to / from the backups directory on the Rx instrument using FTP or USB.

To export memories, select the Backup... button which will open a window to select the file to create.
Existing files are shown and a new filename may be selected using the File Name edit box. Select the
Save button to create the backup file. The filename created will have a .mem file extension.
To import memories, select the Restore... button which will open a window to select the file to import.
Existing files are shown and one should be selected before the Load button is pressed. Select the
Load button to import the backup file.
Note: When importing a backup file, all existing memories are deleted before the backup file isloaded so make sure that they are backed-up first.

Transferring Presets to a Different Rx
Warning: Before attempting to copy presets from one Rx to another, ensure that the target Rx
has an identical hardware configuration as the source Rx and is also running the same software
version. If there are any hardware or software differences between the source and target
devices, you may experience configuration issues.
1. Save your backed-up presets to a USB pen drive. Insert a USB pen drive into one of the USB
ports on the front or rear panel of the Rx. This opens the USB Disk Connected dialog box.
2. From the Types dropdown menu, select: Archives.

Page 3-118

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

3. With Archives selected, highlight the desired preset backup in the right-hand list under
backups System Files, for example: loudness. Click the button <− Copy to copy the backed-up
preset file to the USB device.
4. Click Eject and remove the USB device from the Rx.
5. Locate the next Rx instrument onto which to import the presets and insert the USB pen drive
into one of the available USB ports. Again the USB Disk Connected dialog is automatically displayed.
6. From the Types dropdown menu, select: Archives.

7. With Archives selected, highlight the desired preset backup in the left-hand list under USB
Files, for example: loudness. Click the button Copy −> to copy the backed-up preset file fromthe USB device to the new Rx system files.
8. Click Eject and remove the USB device from the Rx.
Once the presets file(s) are loaded onto the new Rx instrument, they can be used as previously
described in this section.

Disk Space Considerations
The disk space section shows total size of the internal flash disk, the ammount used as a percentage
and the amount free.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-119

System Reference Source
Selecting the System Reference
Pressing the “Ref” button on the HDMI monitor task bar allows the Rx System Reference source to be
selected.

The System Reference defines the video source to which the Rx system is synchronized and affects
all Rx outputs:lOn-board test pattern generator output from the CPU SDI connectorlGenerator module SDI outputsl

HDMI monitor outputl

AES audio outputs.

The System Reference can be set to one of the following depending on the type of modules installedin the Rx chassis:
l

l

l

l

l

l

Free Run - where the Rx system uses its own internal locking reference.
Ext. Ref - where the Rx system is locked to an analog studio reference signal connected to the
Ref input on the CPU module.
SDI1 - where the Rx system is locked to the SDI input on a single input Analyzer module fitted inmodule slot 1.
FIB1 - where the Rx system is locked to SFP optical input on a single input Analyzer module fitted in module slot 1.
SDI2a - where the Rx system is locked to the SDI A input on a dual input Analyzer module fitted in module slot 2.
SDI2a - where the Rx system is locked to the SDI B input on a dual input Analyzer module fitted
in module slot 2.

Note: System Reference selection can be saved as part of a preset. To do this ensure that theVideo checkbox is selected in the Analyzer section of the System Presets menu.
Ideally the Rx system should be locked to an external studio reference all analyzer inputs should beof the same frame rate as the locking reference and synchronous to the locking reference.
External Reference can be used in most applications where a studio locking reference is available
and is used to ensure that all outputs from the system are locked to the studio itself.
In applications where Dolby E, Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus is being analyzed or decoded, theSystem Reference should be set to external reference unless one is not available in which case the
System Reference should be set to the specific SDI input where the Dolby digital audio is embedded.
In situations where there is no studio reference or when the SDI input is asynchronous and when
decoding Dolby audio or routing embedded SDI audio channels to the AES output (4AES module)
Page 3-120

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manualthen the System Reference should be set to the SDI input containing the Dolby audio or embedded
audio channels.
Note: Note that the level of Generator jitter produced by the Rx is determined by the System
Reference being used. If the Rx is locked to an SDI or SFP Fiber input, while jitter measurements
are being made, then the measured jitter will include the input locking jitter from the Rx chassis
plus SDI output jitter. This mode of operation may produce out-of-specification jitter.
Free Run should be used when using Analyzer / Generator modules to perform closed loop testing
especially if Eye and Jitter measurements are being made.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-121

Admin Menus
USB Disk Connected Window

If a USB pen drive is plugged into the Rx unit, the USB Disk Connected window will be displayed.
This allows items to be copied between the USB root directory and specific Rx folders.
The left-hand pane shows the files in the root directory of the USB pen drive and the right-hand paneshows the files in the currently selected Rx folder.
The Types dropdown box allows the selection of the following Rx folders:lSoftware - System operating software (.GZ)

lScreen Captures - HDMI screen captures (.BMP)l

Archives - system archive files (.MEM)l

Loudness - program audio loudness logs (.CSV)l

Pattern NTSC - 720 x 525 test patterns (.PAT)lPattern PAL - 720 x 625 test patterns (.PAT)lPattern 720 YCC - 1280 x 720 YCrCb test patterns (.YC4)l

Pattern 720 RGB - 1280 x 720 RGB test patterns (.RGB)l

Pattern 1080 YCC - 1920 x 1080 YCrCb test patterns (.YC4)l

Pattern 1080 RGB - 1920 x 1080 RGB test patterns (.RGB)l

Pattern 1035 YCC - 1920 x 1035 YCrCb test patterns (.YC4)

lFonts - Generator Ident fonts (.TTF)l

Grabs - Video clips or frames captured using Frame Grab (.GRB)

Files can be deleted from either the USB root directory or the currently selected Rx folder using thetwo delete buttons:<− Delete
Permanently deletes the selected file in the USB root directory.
Delete −>Permanently deletes the selected file in the USB root directory.

Page 3-122

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Great care must be taken not to delete files use by the Rx operating system.
Files can be copied between the USB root directory or the currently selected Rx folder using the two
copy buttons:
Copy −>
Copies the currently selected file in the USB root directory to the currently selected Rx
folder.
<− Copy
Copies the currently selected file in the selected Rx folder to the USB root directory.
Before the USB pen drive is removed from the Rx unit, select the Eject button to close the session.
This will prevent accidental damage or corruption of the files on the USB pen drive.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 3-123

Browser Control

4

Browser Control Overview
The Rx 2000 instrument can be controlled using a web browser that accesses the built-in web server.
To connect to the Rx 2000 instrument, find out the IP address (displayed in the bottom-right corner ofthe Monitor output and in the System → Network menu from the front panel) and enter the address
into the search field of the web browser.

Browser operation has been tested using Firefox, Opera, Safari, Chrome and Internet Explorer but
should work with any browser which supports JavaScript.
Clicking on the buttons works exactly like the instrument that you are connected to (note that autorepeat does not work due to browser speed limitations). The menu screen on the browser image isupdated every 10 seconds but may be refreshed manually by clicking the screen area on thebrowser.

Using the Menus
The Menu buttons select which instrument is in use as well as selecting the options for the instrument.
The bottom of the LCD display shows the function of each Menu button.
When in a specific function (for example, Generator, Analyzer, etc.) use the cursor controls (← → ↑ ↓) on
the right-hand side of the instrument to select a field to edit. The current field has a red box around it.
Pressing the OK button starts or ends editing of that field. Checkboxes are always in edit mode andpressing the OK button inverts the current state.
When editing some types of fields, the menu buttons at the bottom take on different functionality toallow canceling edit mode or setting the value for the field. When lists of options are displayed themenu buttons allow selection of the first / last item in the list as well as paging through the available
options. If the list of items is small, the available items may be displayed on the menu buttons for
instant access.
The buttons along the bottom of the LCD display change the currently displayed page when notediting a data field. The left-hand button always selects the top level menu and system overview
page. So for example pressing the first button will select the Main Menu, selecting the second button
selects the Generator menu, etc.
The Main menu is the top level menu from which all other menus are selected on the Rx 2000
instrument. The main menus are:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 4-1

Generator(Present only if a Generator module is fitted) allows video test pattern selection to be madeand audio test tones to be selected.
Analyzer
Allows the selected input signal to be analyzed in the form of a Picture, Waveform monitor,
Vectorscope and Eye Pattern display (option).
Sig Info
Allows detailed signal information about the video and audio status for the analyzer source
to be displayed.
Audio
Gives access to the Audio Meters and Audio Status displays.
SystemAllows the setup of system wide settings including memories, date/time and software.
Logging
Selects the logging page to view and setup the error logging system.
Speaker
Selects the speaker / headphone setup page.
See the chapter Front Panel Controls for full details of each of the menus.

Log Link
The Log link may be selected to fetch the current Event Log from the Rx instrument.

Status Link
The Status link may be selected to fetch the current instrument status in XML format. It can be saved
to a local PC for further processing. The control IDs displayed in the XML file are determined by thefile /mnt/mmc/xmlformat.ini which may be edited by the user although note that it should be backed
up as it will be overwritten when software updates take place.

Downloads Link
The Downloads link displays a further page allowing screen dumps and report files (Command script
option) to be viewed.

Page 4-2

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualHDMI Link
The HDMI link displays a copy of the HDMI output in the browser window.
Clicking on the position where a menu box appears on the browser HDMI display will control thecorresponding menu on the actual Rx HDMI menu. This browser display will take a few seconds to
update.
See the Chapter HDMI Monitor Output for full details of each of the menus.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page 4-3

Glossary of Terms

A

The following terms are used in the Sx Series user manuals:
2K-SDI
2K digital cinema can be transmitted via SDI as defined in the SMPTE ST 2048-2:2011
standard (“2048 x 1080 Digital Cinematography Production Image FS/709 Formatting for
Serial Digital Interface”) and SMPTE 428-9 (D-Cinema Distribution Master - Image Pixel
Structure Level 3 - Serial Digital Interface Signal Formatting).
3G-SDIA single 2.970 Gbit/s serial link (standardized in SMPTE 424M) that will replace the dual link
HD-SDI (is standardized in SMPTE 372M).
AES
Audio Engineering Society
AES3-2003
Standard for digital audio — Digital input-output interfacing —Serial transmission format for
two channel, linearly represented digital audio data.
Alignment Jitter
Artefacts above the specified threshold frequencies of (1 kHz for SD-SDI signals and 100
kHz for HD-SDI signals). Typically, video equipment cannot tolerate Alignment Jitter whichcause decoding errors due to incorrect sampling of the data stream because the SDI
Clock transition occurs on the edge of the data sample instead of in the center of the data
sample.
ANC (Ancillary Data)
refers to a means by which non-video information (such as audio, EDH and other forms ofessence and metadata) are embedded within the serial digital interface. There are two
types of Ancillary Data, HANC (Horizontal Ancillary Data) and VANC (Vertical AncillaryData). See SMPTE 291M: Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting.
ARIB-B.22
The ARIB defined Sub information data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.23-1
The ARIB defined user data 1 packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.23-2
The ARIB defined user data 2 packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.27 Capt.
The ARIB defined caption data in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.35
The ARIB defined trigger signal data packet for data broadcasting.
ARIB-B.39
The ARIB defined inter-stationary control data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37
The ARIB defined analog signal data in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37 HD
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page A-1

The ARIB defined HD data packet in the VANC space.
ARIB-B.37 Mob
The ARIB defined closed captioning information data packet.
ARIB-B.37 SD
The ARIB defined SD data packet in the VANC space.
ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
A streaming data format which often carries an MPEG Transport Stream (MPEG-TS). An ASI
signal can carry one or multiple SD, HD or audio programs that are already compressed.
Audio Jack
The front panel ¼ inch headphone socket used for local audio monitoring.
Bar Data
Defines the extent of the image within the coded frame as part of the AFD (active format
description as defined by SMPTE S2016.
ChassisThe physical enclosure of the Rx range that is used to mount various hardware modules.
CPU
Central Processor Unit
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check is an error-detecting code commonly used in digital networks
and storage devices to detect accidental changes to raw data. Blocks of data entering
these systems get a short check value attached, based on the remainder of a polynomial
division of their contents; on retrieval the calculation is repeated, and corrective action canbe taken against presumed data corruption if the check values do not match.
DBN(Data Block Number) is a data word within the ANC Data. See DID for more information.
DID
Data ID is part of the Ancillary Data that is transmitted with the SDI data.
Dolby Digital(AC-3) is a perceptual audio system for digital audio that allows the reduction of data needs
to deliver high-quality sound. This system was developed primarily for DTV, DVD and
HDTV.
Dolby Digital Plus
(E-AC-3) is a more advanced version of Dolby Digital that provides a more efficient encoding algorithm that provides enough bandwidth that allows up to 20 channels of audio (for a
primary program (Program 1) and optional ancillary programs that can be delivered at much
lower bit rates than Dolby Digital.
Dolby EAn audio encoding and decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories thatallows up to 8 channels of audio to be compressed into a digital stream that can be transferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio tracks.
DVI
Digital visual interface.
EDH
Error Detection and Handling protocol is an optional but commonly used addition to theStandard Definition-Serial Digital Interface (SDI) standard. This protocol allows an SD-SDI
receiver to verify that each field of video is received correctly.

Page A-2

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

EIA-708 Caption
The EIA standard defined closed caption data for HD-SDI in VANC space.
EIA-608 Caption
The EIA standard defined closed caption data for SD SDI 525i (NTSC) in VANC space.
FPGA
A field-programmable gate array (FPGA) is an integrated circuit designed to be configuredby the customer or designer after manufacturing.
Function Buttons
The set of eight buttons below the Instrument Display on the Sx and Rx Ranges that areused to select the Instrument Display menu options.
GPI
General Purpose Input
Graticule
The scale displayed on an oscilloscope, vectorscope or waveform monitor that provides avisual indication of the signal amplitude, time base and phase relationship.
HANC (Horizontal Ancillary Data)
Non-video data that is transmitted within the horizontal blanking interval of the video data.
See ANC for further information.
HDMI® (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
A compact audio/video interface for transferring uncompressed digital audio/video datafrom a HDMI-compliant device (“the source” or “input”) to a compatible digital audio
device, computer monitor, video projector, and digital television.
IEC 60268-10
Defining Type I PPM style audio meters typically used by German broadcasters and Type II
PPM style audio meters typically used by UK broadcasters.
IEC 60268-17
Defining VU style audio meters typically used by American and Australian broadcasters.
Input Status Bar
The bottom part of the Monitor Output display that shows the format and status of the input
signals currently connected to the Rx chassis.
Instrument Display
The TFT monitor available on the Rx 2000.
Integrated Loudness
Covering the duration of a program or segment as defined in ITU-R Recommendations 128.
ITU-R Rec 128
Defining the measurement in terms of Loudness Units (UI) and Loudness Units Full Scale(LUFS) over different time periods.
ITU-R Rec. BS.645
Defining VU style audio meters typically used by French broadcasters.
ITU-R Rec. BS.645
Defining VU style audio meters typically used by French broadcasters.
ITU-R BT 1685
The ITU-R BT 1685 defined Structure of inter-station control data packets.
LTC / GPIO / Analog
Longitudinal Time Code/General Purpose Input Output

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page A-3

MADI (Multichannel Audio Digital Interface)
Or AES10 is an Audio Engineering Society (AES) standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface that carries
multiple channels of digital audio.
ModuleA factory fitted hardware component for the Rx series chassis.
Momentary Loudness
Covers the shortest timescale of 400 ms as defined in ITU-R Recommendations 128.
Integrated Loudness
Covering the duration of a program or segment as defined in ITU-R Recommendations 128.
ITU-R Rec 128
Defining the measurement in terms of Loudness Units (UI) and Loudness Units Full Scale(LUFS) over different time periods.
ITU-R Rec. BS.645
Defining VU style audio meters typically used by French broadcasters.
ITU-R Rec. BS.645
Defining VU style audio meters typically used by French broadcasters.
ITU-R BT 1685
The ITU-R BT 1685 defined Structure of inter-station control data packets.
LTC / GPIO / Analog
Longitudinal Time Code/General Purpose Input Output
MADI (Multichannel Audio Digital Interface)
Or AES10 is an Audio Engineering Society (AES) standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface that carries
multiple channels of digital audio.
ModuleA factory fitted hardware component for the Rx series chassis.
Momentary Loudness
Covers the shortest timescale of 400 ms as defined in ITU-R Recommendations 128.
Navigation Buttons
The up, down, left, right arrow buttons available on the Rx Range.
OP47 Transport
The Free TV Operational Practice OP-47 defined transport of Closed Caption/Subtitling
data in the VANC space.
OP47 Dist.
The Free TV Operational Practice OP-47 defined distribution of Closed Caption/Subtitling
data in the VANC space.
PHRXKT1
The rack mounting kit for the RX 1000 unit.
PHRXKT2
The rack mounting kit for the RX 2000 unit.
PHRXM-AThe Dual Input, single Analyzer module.
PHRXM-AEThe Dual Input, single Analyzer module with eye/jitter functionality.

Page A-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualPHRXM-AG
The single input Analyzer module plus Generator module.
PHRXM-AGE
The single input Analyzer module with eye/jitter functionality + Generator module.
PHRXM-DOLBYPHRXM-DD and PHRXO-BDA option bundle
PHRXM-DD
Dolby-E decode module
PHRXO-3G
3G-SDI software option providing support for SMPTE 424M
PHRXO-EA
Advanced eye pattern analyzer software option (now included with PHRXM-AE or PHRXMAGE)PHRXO-DATA
SDI Data viewer software option
PHRXO-BDA
Basic Dolby analysis software option
PHRXO-BDG
Dolby Generator software option
PHRXO-4LOU
Four channel loudness Monitor software option (now as standard)
PHABRIX Rx 500
A 1U height half rack mount Rasterizer which is small and light enough to fit a variety of
applications from camera shading in OB environments or studio editing suites as well as
manufacturing research and development departments. The Rx 500 has two input slots
with 4 simultaneous inputs. All inputs are switchable and each can be independently controlled as picture or analysis instruments on an HDMI Monitor Output.
PHABRIX Rx 1000
A 1U height 19” (482cm) rack mount Rasterizer with the ability to monitor up to 8 simultaneous inputs with loop through and is powerful enough to support simultaneous display of instruments across each module on HDMI Monitor Output. All inputs are switchable
and each can be independently controlled as picture or analysis instruments with central
control and report logging.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
A 2U height 19” (482cm) rack mount Rasterizer with 2 on-board displays and the ability tomonitor up to 8 simultaneous inputs with loop through and is powerful enough to support
simultaneous display of instruments across each module on HDMI Monitor Output. All
inputs are switchable and each can be independently controlled as picture or analysis
instruments with central control and report logging.
Pre-set Buttons
The set of eight buttons below the Video Confidence display on the Rx 2000 that are used
to select predefined inputs for display.
PSU
Power Supply Unit
Random Jitter

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page A-5

Refers to artefacts caused by random events or processes such as thermal or shot noisethat cause small amplitude variations in the clock edge position or could cause large signal
amplitude variations, though these typically would be infrequent.
Rasterizer
An electronic device used to display (either as picture or waveform) the video/audio data ina 3G-SDI, HD-SDI and SD-SDI stream. Typically, a Rasterizer will display multiple output
forms of the same input data stream.
RDD8-WSS
The SMPTE defined wide screen switching data packet in the VANC space.
RP165-EDH
The SMPTE RP165-EDH packet containing EDH (error data handling) and CRC (cyclic
redundancy counts). This only appears on SD-SDI signals.
RP196-HANC
The SMPTE defined recommended practice Time Code data packet in HANC space.
RP196-VANC
The SMPTE defined recommended practice Vertical Timecode data packet in VANC
space.
RP207 Program
The SMPTE RP207 defined program description data packet in VANC space.
RP208 – VBI
The SMPTE defined recommended practice VBI Data (vertical blanking interval data) in
VANC space.
RP214-KLV-V
The SMPTE defined KLV Metadata transport in VANC space.
RP214-KLV-H
The SMPTE defined KLV Metadata transport in HANC space.
RP215 – Film
The SMPTE defined recommended practice data pack for film codes in VANC space.
RP233-UMID/ID
The SMPTE defined UMID (Unique Material Identifier) in VANC space
S272-SD Audio
The SMPTE 291M defined SD audio data in HANC space.
S272-SD Aux
The SMPTE 291M defined SD auxiliary data in HANC space.
S272-SD Ctrl
The SMPTE 291M defined SD control data in HANC space.
S299-HD Audio
The SMPTE 291M defined HD audio data in HANC space.
S299-HD Ctrl
The SMPTE 291M defined HD control data in HANC space.
S305-SDTIThe SMPTE 291M defined SDTI transport data packet in active frame space.
S348-HDTIThe SMPTE 291M defined HD-SDTI transport
S315-Cam. Pos

Page A-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The SMPTE 291M defined camera position data in HANC and VANC space.
S353-MPEG Record
The SMPTE 291M defined MPEG recoding data in HANC and VANC space.
S427-Lnk. Enc 1
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S427-Lnk. Enc 2
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S427-Link Enc
The SMPTE S427 defined link encryption data packet.
S2010-SCTE MSGSThe SMPTE S2010 defined standardized API message data in VANC space.
S2016-3 AFD
The SMPTE S2016 defined standardized AFD (active format description) and Bar data
packet (defining active area of image).
S2016-4 PAN
The SCTE S2016 standard defined pan and scan data packet.
S2020-Audio
The SMPTE S2020 defined standardized data packet defining the encoding for a Dolby
stereo or a multi-channel surround group of audio channels.
S2031-SCTE VBI
The SCTE S2031 standard defined VBI (vertical blanking interval) data packet for closed
captioning.
SDI(Serial Digital Interface) capable of transferring SD or HD broadcast video and broadcast
audio between compatible devices.
SDID (Secondary Data Identifier)
A data word within the ANC Data packet. See DID for more details.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture & Television Engineers
SMPTE RP211
Implementation of 24P, 25P and 30P Segmented Frames for 1920 x 1080 Production
FormatSMPTE 259M
Implement a SMPTE 259M Serial Digital Interface Using SMPTE HOTLink™ andCY7C9235/9335
SMPTE 260M
Television - 1125/60 High-Definition Production System - Digital Representation and Bit-Parallel Interface
SMPTE 274M
High Definition (HD) Image Formats for Television Production
SMPTE-276M
Television - Transmission of AES-EBU Digital Audio Signals Over Coaxial Cable
SMPTE 292M
Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page A-7

SMPTE 296M
1280 × 720 Scanning, Analog and Digital Representation and Analog Interface
SMPTE 297
Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and
SMPTE 424M Signals
SMPTE 352
Payload Identification Codes for Serial Digital Interfaces —Amendment 1
SMPTE 424M
3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 425-B
Mapping of 2 x SMPTE 292M HD SDI interfaces. Level-B can carry a Dual Link 1.485 Gb/s
payload or two HD 1.485 Gb/s payloads.
SMPTE 425M-A
Direct mapping of source image formats
SMPTE 428-9
D-Cinema Distribution Master – Image Characteristics
TFT
Thin Film Transistor is a type of LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor.
Timing Jitter
A short-term time interval error above a low frequency threshold of 10 Hz (as defined in the
SMPTE standards for SDI signals).
UDW (User Data Words)
Contains the actual “payload” data of the ANC Data package. See DID for more information.
UI(Unit Interval) is time between consecutive clock cycles used to sample the SDI data
stream. The UI measurement is used for Eye Pattern measurement.
VANC (Vertical Ancillary Data)
Non-video data that is transmitted within the vertical blanking interval of the video data.
See ANC for further information.
Video Confidence Display
The TFT monitor available on the Rx 2000 that allows the picture to be displayed for theselected input.
Wander
A long-term time interval error, i.e., artifact below 10 Hz. Typically, all video equipment has
the tendency to cause wander over a long period; these artifacts are not easily displayed
in a meaningful way but are better logged as errors that exceed tolerances over a long
period.

Page A-8

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

B

Specifications
Rx Platform Overview

The Rx platform has been designed to serve the varied test and measurement needs of thebroadcast industry. PHABRIX has developed not a single product in the traditional sense but amodular system from which specific broadcast client requirements can be satisfied.

The Rx platform allows a flexible approach to test and measurement on a new technological platform
designed for longevity. The system has been created to allow broadcast engineers to specify
features according to the complexity of the required test and measurement application by simply
adding additional modules and software licenses to their chosen core chassis.
Adding modules is like adding independent new instruments, each module providing a dedicated setof instruments for the task required.
The Rx Platform is available in a choice of chassis types:l

Rx 2000 – a unique audio video monitoring solution combining front panel instrumentation, via
dual TFT screens, and integrated full range stereo speakers. Unique 2U tapered tilt-in-bay
engineering with four Rx module bays.
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-1

llPage B-2

Rx 1000 Rasterizer – a compact 1U, 19 inch rack-mount chassis with OLED display interface
with four Rx module bays.
Rx 500 Rasterizer – a compact 1U, half-rack width chassis with OLED display interface with two
Rx module bays.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualRx 2000
Description
The Rx 2000 is a 2U rack-mounted instrument that provides the following:
l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Two front panel TFT LCD screens, one with a full range of generator, analyzer and system control menus, and selected analyzer instrument panels such as Waveform monitor, Vectorscopeand Eye Pattern display; and the other to display the selected input image and other instruments, along with Input, Preset, and System Reference buttons.
Both TFT LCD screens can be used to display instruments at the same time.
Rasterized HDMI/SDI outputs to allow up to 16 individual instrument panels (windows) to be displayed on a single DVI 1920 x 1080 resolution monitor. Ideal for outside broadcast facilities andengineering bays where space is at a premium.
Individual input selection, for instant confidence and monitoring of feeds, using dedicatedsource selection buttons.
Control via front panel controls, for in-bay use and remotely via a network connection using a
web browser.
Front panel audio monitoring, provided by high quality speakers and/or a head phone socket,
to allow the monitoring of the selected Audio channel.
Four Module slots allowing the installation of Analyzer and Generator modules.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-3

Environmental Requirements
Operating Temperature:
0° to 40°C
Operating Humidity:< 85% RH (non-condensing)Power Requirements:
AC 90 to 250 V at 50/60 Hz 70 W (max)Height:2U, 88 mm (3.5 inch)
Width:
443 mm (17.4 inch)
Depth:
150 mm (5.9 inch)
Weight:
1.9 kg (4.19 Ib)

Page B-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualDimensions
Front Panel Dimensions

Back Panel Dimensions

Top Panel Dimensions

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-5

Side Panel Dimensions

Page B-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualFront Panel
The front panel provides access to the Video Confidence Display, the Instrument Display and menu
system.

Front Panel Display
Display Type:
4.3 inch TFT LCD color
Quantity:
Two
Display Format:
480 x 272 24 bits
Backlight:
Variable brightness
Screen Saver:Reduces brightness after user adjustable time operation.

Loudspeakers
Output Power:
5 W RMS per channel (THD 0.5%)
Frequency Response:
120 Hz to 20 kHz

Headphone Output
Connector:
1/4 Inch Stereo Jack
Level:
Adjustable
Quantity:
One (front mounted)
Purpose:
Local monitoring of audio

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-7

Rx 2000 Rear Panel
The rear panel provides the Rx instrument’s connections via the CPU module and the installed
Analyzer or Generator modules. See the Section Rx Module Descriptions for details of the different
modules.

Power Connection
Connector:
4-pin XLR, Male
Voltage:
12 V +/− 5% AC. DC Power Adapter supplied

External Locking Reference
Label:REF
Input Signal:
Tri-level or Bi-Level (black burst) syncs 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedInput Return Loss:> 40 dB to 6 MHz (typical)
Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2 V
Specification:
Tri-level syncs (SMPTE 274M and SMPTE 296M) 600 mV pk-pk,
PAL Black Burst (ITU624-4/SMPTE318) 1 V pk-pk,
Composite NTSC (SMPTE 170M) 1 V pk-pk

AES Input
Label:AES IN
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminated

Page B-8

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2 V
Sample Rates:
The input has a sample rate converter and so will accept any sample rate from 32 kHz to
192 kHz.
Specification:
Conforming to AES3-2003 and SMPTE-276M

SDI Out
Label:SDI OUT
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedOutput Level:+/− 400 mV
Purpose:A basic SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal generator output that provides test signals generated by
the on-board Generator. This output can also be used to provide an SDI monitor output
tied to the HDMI® monitor output.
Test Signals:
100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars. or Check Field Pathological

HDMI
Connector:
Type A
Video Format:
1920 x 1080 RGB 4:4:4
Audio Format:
4 x PCM stereo audio at 48 kHz
Purpose:Monitor output that allows up to 16 individual instrument panels (or windows) to be displayed.

Local Control
USB Connector:
USB 2 Type A
Quantity:Three (1 x front mounted, 2 x rear mounted)
Purpose:Keyboard and mouse control for HDMI® monitor output of instrument and software installation.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-9

Networking
Ethernet:
IEEE 802.3 10/100Mb/s (10/100-base-T connection)
Ethernet Connector:
RJ-45
Purpose:Browser control of instrument and FTP access to system files and allowing the Rx instrument to be connected into a network and accessed over TCP/IP so that it can be controlled remotely.

GPIO
Connector:
26-way D-type
Purpose:
Provides a GPI (general purpose input), LTC control and analog audio connections.

Pin Number
1

Data Terminal Equipment - Transmit (TX) (RS-232 compatible)

2

Data Terminal Equipment - Receive (RX) (RS-232 compatible)

3

Data Terminal Equipment - Request to Send (RTS)

4

Data Terminal Equipment - Clear to Send (CTS)

5

Longitudinal Timecode (LTC) - Receive (RX) P(RS-422 compatible)

6

Longitudinal Timecode (LTC) - Receive (RX) N(RS-422 compatible)

7

Audio Line Out - Right(1 V peak-to-peak analog, full scale 0 dBFS)

8

Audio Line Out - Left
(1 V peak-to-peak analog, full scale 0 dBFS)

95 Volt, current-limited GPIO supply for open drain
input/outputs.

10 - 18

Page B-10

Function

Signal ground / 0 Volt

19

GPIO - 0 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

20

GPIO - 1 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualPin Number

Function

21

GPIO - 2 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

22

GPIO - 3 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

23

GPIO - 4 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

24

GPIO - 5 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

25

GPIO - 6 (open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

26

GPIO - 7 (open drain with 10K ohm pull-up to +5 Volts)

GPIO pins 0, 1, 2 and 3 can be used to select specific system memory presets, for example toremotely control the Rx unit using contact closure or logic levels. See the Chapter Preset Memories
for details.
GPIO Pin 0

GPIO Pin 1

GPIO Pin 2

GPIO Pin 3

Preset Controlled

Low

High

High

High

Preset 1

High

Low

High

High

Preset 2

Low

Low

High

High

Preset 3

High

High

Low

High

Preset 4

Low

High

Low

High

Preset 5

High

Low

Low

High

Preset 6

Low

Low

Low

High

Preset 7

High

High

High

Low

Preset 8

Low

High

High

Low

Preset 9

High

Low

High

Low

Preset 10

GPIO pins 0 and 1 (or pins 2 and 3) can also be used to control the loudness function as follows:

GPIO Pin 0 / 2
Enable/Reset

GPIO Pin 1 / 3
Run/Pause

Loudness Operation

High

High

Reset

High

Low

Reset

Low

High

PausedLow

Low

Running

Note also that the GPIO 4, 5, 6 and 7 output tally is set low when an error state occurs on an analyzer:l

Pin 4 = Analyzer 1l

Pin 5 = Analyzer 2
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-11

Page B-12l

Pin 6 = Analyzer 3l

Pin 7 = Analyzer 4

GPIO Pin 4

GPIO Pin 5

GPIO Pin 6

GPIO Pin 7

Analyzer Slot

Low

High

High

High

Analyzer Slot 1

High

Low

High

High

Analyzer Slot 2

High

High

Low

High

Analyzer Slot 3

High

High

High

Low

Analyzer Slot 4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Rx Modules
Single Analyzer, Dual Input
The PHRXM-A module allows two connected
SDI or Optical video signals to be present continuously and switched for analysis or display
by the single analyzer channel.

Analyzer SDI Inputs
Label:
IN1 and IN2
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedInput Return Loss:
Better than 15 dB (5 MHz to 1485 MHz) and 10 dB (1485 MHz to 2970 MHz)
Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2 V

Analyzer SDI Outputs
Label:
LP1 and LP2
Purpose:Loop through of IN1 and IN2Connector:
BNC
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedAnalyzer Optical Inputs
Label:OPTICAL A and B
Purpose:To provide two optical video/audio inputs
Type:
SFP Optical Dual Receiver Module (option PHSFP-2R30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-13

Analyzer Functionality
With the module installed the Analyzer menu allows the follow monitoring to be displayed:

The Picture viewer is provided to allow you to monitor the selected input to give confidence that thesignal is present, is the correct subject (or feed), it is moving and looks OK.

The Vectorscope allows you to check the hue, saturation and phase of the selected input. Controls
are provided to allow you to select the line (s) to be monitored (ideal for checking any embedded test
pattern in the selected feed), the field to be checked and the graticule scale.

The Waveform Monitor allows you to check the levels of the video content are correct. Controls areprovided to allow you to select the waveform (YCbCr, Y, Cb, Cr, GBR, Red, Green or Blue), thehorizontal and vertical scale and the line(s) to be monitored.

The Audio monitor (16 embedded audio channels, 48 kHz, 20-bit (SD-SDI) 24-bit (HD-SDI)) allows you
to check the audio levels of the selected input. In addition to the visual display, the selected audio
channel can be monitored via the front panel loudspeakers or headphone jack.

Page B-14

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSingle Analyzer, Dual Input, Physical Layer Measurement
The PHRXM-AE module allows two connected
SDI or Optical video signals to be present continuously and selected for analysis or display by
the single analyzer channel as required.

The PHRXM-AE module provides the following connections:

Analyzer SDI Inputs
Label:
IN1 and IN2
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedInput Return Loss:
Better than 15 dB (5 MHz to 1485 MHz) and 10 dB (1485 MHz to 2970 MHz)
Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2 V
Purpose:Analyzer Inputs

Analyzer SDI Outputs
Label:
LP1 and LP2
Connector:
BNC
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedPurpose:Loop through of IN1 and IN2

Analyzer Optical Inputs
Label:OPTICAL A and B
Type:
SFP Optical Dual Receiver Module (Option PHSFP-2R30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M
Purpose:To provide two optical video / audio inputs

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-15

Analyzer Functionality
The PHRXM-AE module provides analyzer functionality for two concurrently connected SD-SDI, HDSDI or Optical inputs. With the module installed the Analyzer menu allows the follow monitoring to be
displayed:

The Picture viewer is provided to allow you to monitor the selected input to give confidence that thesignal is present, is the correct subject (or feed), it is moving and looks OK.

The Vectorscope allows you to check the hue, saturation and phase of the selected input. Controls
are provided to allow you to select the line (s) to be monitored (ideal for checking any embedded test
pattern in the selected feed), the field to be checked and the graticule scale.

The Waveform Monitor allows you to check the levels of the video content are correct. Controls areprovided to allow you to select the waveform (YCbCr, Y, Cb, Cr, GBR, Red, Green or Blue), thehorizontal and vertical scale and the line(s) to be monitored.

The Audio monitor (16 embedded audio channels, 48 kHz, 20-bit (SD-SDI) 24-bit (HD-SDI)) allows you
to check the audio levels of the selected input. In addition to the visual display, the selected audio
channel can be monitored via the front panel loud speakers or head phone jack.

Page B-16

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Eye Pattern monitor allows you to check the level of jitter present in the selected source. Controls
are provided to allow you to isolate specific frequencies of jitter to ensure that they are within
acceptable tolerances.

The Jitter monitor allows you to measure the amplitude of jitter present in the selected source against
time. Controls are provided for scaling and filtering to isolate specific jitter types.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-17

Single Analyzer, Single Generator
The PHRXM-AG module allows a single connected SDI or Optical video signal to be monitored continuously and allows the generationof a single SDI or Optical video test signal.

The PHRXM-AG module provides the following connections:

Analyzer SDI Input
Label:SDI ANA IN
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedInput Return Loss:
Better than 15 dB (5 MHz to 1485 MHz) and 10 dB (1485 MHz to 2970 MHz)
Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2 V
Purpose:Analyzer Input

Analyzer SDI Output
Label:SDI ANA OUT
Connector:
BNC
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedPurpose:Loop through of SDI ANA IN

Analyzer Optical Input
Label:OPTICAL ANAType:SFP Optical Single Receiver Module/Single Transmitter (Option PHSFP-RT30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M
Purpose:To provide a single optical video/audio input

Page B-18

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGenerator SDI Outputs
Label:SDI GEN OUT
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC x 2
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedOutput Level:+/− 400 mV
Purpose:Generator Output

Generator Optical Ouput
Label:OPTICAL GEN
Type:
SFP Optical Single Receiver Module/Single Transmitter (option PHSFP-RT30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M
Purpose:To provide a single optical video/audio output

Analyzer Functionality
The PHRXM-AG module provides analyzer functionality for two concurrently connected SD-SDI, HDSDI or Optical inputs. With the module installed the Analyzer menu allows the follow monitoring to be
displayed:

The Picture viewer is provided to allow you to monitor the selected input to give confidence that thesignal is present, is the correct subject (or feed), it is moving and looks OK.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-19

The Vectorscope allows you to check the hue, saturation and phase of the selected input. Controls
are provided to allow you to select the line (s) to be monitored (ideal for checking any embedded test
pattern in the selected feed), the field to be checked and the graticule scale.

The Waveform Monitor allows you to check the levels of the video content are correct. Controls areprovided to allow you to select the waveform (YCbCr, Y, Cb, Cr, GBR, Red, Green or Blue), thehorizontal and vertical scale and the line(s) to be monitored.

The Audio monitor (16 embedded audio channels, 48 kHz, 20-bit (SD-SDI) 24-bit (HD-SDI)) allows you
to check the audio levels of the selected input. In addition to the visual display, the selected audio
channel can be monitored via the front panel loudspeakers or headphone jack.

Generator Functionality
The PHRXM-AG module provides a single video/audio signal generator functionality. The Generator
menu allows the following test signals to be generated. The Generator provides:

32, 10-bit Line-based video test patterns such as color bars, ramp, color plate, multiburst and user
defined (DPX, YUV, TGA, BMP ) that can be used to check video levels, linearity, saturation, hue, color
phase and frequency response.

Pathogenic video test patterns such as Bars+Red, SMPTE Bars, Check Field that can be used tocheck that decoding, encoding and transmission processes are correct.

Zone Plate generator test patterns are provided and allow the selection of several predeterminedzone plates as well as 3 user customizable zone plates.
Page B-20

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

17 fixed Audio test tones (fixed 100 Hz to 20 kHz ), variable tones (1 Hz to 24 kHz in 1 Hz steps),intermittent tone, white noise or silence on audio pairs and audio groups. Audio level variable (0 to−100 dB in 1 dB steps).

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-21

Single Analyzer, Single Generator, Physical Layer Measurement
The PHRXM-AGE module allows a single connected SDI or Optical video signal to be monitored continuously and allows the generationof a single SDI or Optical video test signal.

The PHRXM-AGE module provides the following connections:

Analyzer SDI Input
Label:SDI ANA IN
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedInput Return Loss:
Better than 15 dB (5 MHz to 1485 MHz) and 10 dB (1485 MHz to 2970 MHz)
Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2V
Purpose:Analyzer Input

Analyzer SDI Output
Label:SDI ANA OUT
Connector:
BNC
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedPurpose:Loopthrough of SDI ANA IN

Analyzer Optical Input
Label:OPTICAL ANAType:SFP Optical Single Receiver Module/Single Transmitter (option PHSFP-RT30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M
Purpose:To provide a single optical video/audio input

Page B-22

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGenerator SDI Outputs
Label:SDI GEN OUT
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC x 2
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedOutput Level:+/− 400 mV
Purpose:Generator Output

Generator Optical Output
Label:OPTICAL GEN
Type:
SFP Optical Single Receiver Module/Single Transmitter (option PHSFP-RT30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M
Purpose:To provide a single optical video/audio output

Generator Functionality
The PHRXM-AGE module provides a single video/audio signal generator functionality. The Generator
menu allows the following test signals to be generated. The Generator provides:

32, 10-bit Line-based video test patterns such as color bars, ramp, color plate, multiburst and user
defined (DPX, YUV, TGA, BMP ) that can be used to check video levels, linearity, saturation, hue, color
phase and frequency response.

Pathogenic video test patterns such as Bars+Red, SMPTE Bars, Check Field that can be used tocheck that decoding, encoding and transmission processes are correct.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-23

Zone Plate generator test patterns are provided and allow the selection of several predeterminedzone plates as well as 3 user customizable zone plates.

17 fixed Audio test tones (fixed 100 Hz to 20 kHz ), variable tones (1 Hz to 24 kHz in 1 Hz steps),intermittent tone, white noise or silence on audio pairs and audio groups. Audio level variable (0 to−100 dB in 1 dB steps).

Analyzer Functionality
The PHRXM-AGE module provides analyzer functionality for two concurrently connected SD-SDI, HDSDI or Optical inputs. With the module installed the Analyzer menu allows the follow monitoring to be
displayed:

The Picture viewer is provided to allow you to monitor the selected input to give confidence that thesignal is present, is the correct subject (or feed), it is moving and looks OK.

The Vectorscope allows you to check the hue, saturation and phase of the selected input. Controls
are provided to allow you to select the line (s) to be monitored (ideal for checking any embedded test
pattern in the selected feed), the field to be checked and the graticule scale.

Page B-24

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Waveform Monitor allows you to check the levels of the video content are correct. Controls areprovided to allow you to select the waveform (YCbCr, Y, Cb, Cr, GBR, Red, Green or Blue), thehorizontal and vertical scale and the line(s) to be monitored.

The Audio monitor (16 embedded audio channels, 48 kHz, 20-bit (SD-SDI) 24-bit (HD-SDI)) allows you
to check the audio levels of the selected input. In addition to the visual display, the selected audio
channel can be monitored via the front panel loud speakers or head phone jack.

The Eye Pattern monitor allows you to check the level of jitter present in the selected source. Controls
are provided to allow you to isolate specific frequencies of jitter to ensure that they are within
acceptable tolerances.

The Jitter monitor allows you to measure the amplitude of jitter present in the selected source against
time. Controls are provided for scaling and filtering to isolate specific jitter types.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-25

Dual Output Generator Module
The PHRXM-GDL module allows the generation of a two independent SDI or Optical
video test signals with the same video format,
color space and frame rate for Dual link use.

The PHRXM-GDL module provides the following connections:

Generator SDI Outputs
Label:SDI GEN-A OUT and SDI GEN-B OUT
Supported standards:
SD-SDI or HD-SDI. See Supported formats
Connector:
BNC x 4
Output Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedOutput Level:+/− 400 mV
Purpose:Generator Outputs

Generator Optical Outputs
Label:OPTICAL GEN-A and OPTICAL GEN-B
Type:
SFP Optical Dual Transmitter Module (option PHSFP-2T30-1310)
Specifications:
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M
Purpose:To provide 2 optical video / audio outputs

Generator Functionality
The PHRXM-GDL module provides a dual video/audio signal generator functionality. The Generator
menu allows the following test signals to be generated. The Generator provides:

32, 10-bit Line-based video test patterns such as color bars, ramp, color plate, multiburst and user
defined (DPX, YUV, TGA, BMP ) that can be used to check video levels, linearity, saturation, hue, color
phase and frequency response.

Page B-26

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualPathogenic video test patterns such as Bars+Red, SMPTE Bars, Check Field that can be used tocheck that decoding, encoding and transmission processes are correct.

Zone Plate generator test patterns are provided and allow the selection of several predeterminedzone plates as well as 3 user customizable zone plates.

17 fixed Audio test tones (fixed 100 Hz to 20 kHz ), variable tones (1 Hz to 24 kHz in 1 Hz steps),intermittent tone, white noise or silence on audio pairs and audio groups. Audio level variable (0 to−100 dB in 1 dB steps).

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-27

AES Digital Audio Input / Output
The PHRXM-4AES module allows 4 x AES
digital audio pairs to be routed to the Audio
Meter and Loudness instruments.

Label:AES IO_1 to AES IO_4
Connector:
BNC x4Standard:
AES3-4-2009 Annex D Coaxial transmission
Input Impedance:
75 ohm terminatedInput Return Loss:
Better than 15 dB (5 MHz to 1485 MHz)
Maximum Input Voltage:+/− 2 V
Input Sample Rate:
32 kHz to 192 kHz
Output Sample Rate:
48 kHzInput Bit Depth:
20 bit or 24 bit
Output Bit Depth:
24 bitPurpose:AES digital audio pair Input and Output

Page B-28

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualSupported Video Formats
SD 270 Mb/s
Standard

Resolution

Color SpaceRate

EBU Tech. 3267-E

720 x 576

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10-bit

I 50.00

SMPTE 259M

720 x 483

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10-bit

I 59.94

HD 1.485 Gb/s (SMPTE 292M)
Standard

Resolution

Color Space

Rate

SMPTE 296M

1280 x 720

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 23.98, P 24.00,
P 25.00,P 29.97,
P 30.00, P 50.00,
P 59.94, P 60.00

SMPTE 260M

1920 x 1035

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

I 59.94, I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’ )/ 10 bit

P 23.98, P 24.00,
P 25.00, P 29.97,
P 30.00

SMPTE RP211

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’ )/ 10 bit

sF 23.98, sF 24.00,
sF 25.00, sF 29.97,
sF 30.00

SMPTE 2048-2

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 23.98, P 24.00,
P 25.00, P 29.97,
P 30.00

Dual Link 1.485 Gb/s (SMPTE 327M)
Standard

Resolution

Color Space

Rate

SMPTE274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 50.00, P 59.94,
P 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (R’G’B’),
4:4:4:4 (R’G’B’+A) / 10-bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (R’G’B’) / 12-bit

P or sF 23.00,

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-29

Standard

Resolution

Color Space

Rate
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’),
4:4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’+A) / 10-bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 428-9

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (X’Y’Z’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.98,
P or sF 24.00

3G Level-A 2.97 Gb/s (SMPTE 425M-A)
Standard

Resolution

Color Space

Rate

SMPTE274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 50.00, P 59.94,
P 60.00

SMPTE 296M

1280 x 720

4:4:4 (R’G’B’),
4:4:4:4 (R’G’B’+A) / 10 bit

P 23.00, P 24.00,
P 25.00, P 29.97,
P 30.00, P 50.00,
P 59.94, P 60.00

SMPTE 296M

1280 x 720

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’),
4:4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’+A) / 10 bit

P 23.00 *, P 24.00 *,P 25.00 *, P 29.97 *,P 30.00 *, P 50.00 *,P 59.94 *, P 60.00 *SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (R’G’B’),
4:4:4:4 (R’G’B’+A) / 10-bit

P or sF 23.00 *,P or sF 24.00 *,Page B-30

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualStandard

Resolution

Color Space

Rate
P or sF 25.00 *,P or sF 29.97 *,P or sF 30.00 *,I 50.00 *, I 59.94 *,I 60.00 *SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’),
4:4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’+A) / 10-bit

P or sF 23.00 *,P or sF 24.00 *,P or sF 25.00 *,P or sF 29.97 *,P or sF 30.00 *,I 50.00 *, I 59.94 *,I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (R’G’B’) / 12-bit

P 23.00 *, P 24.00 *,P 25.00 *, P 29.97 *,P 30.00 *, I 50.00 *,I 59.94 *, I 60.00 *SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 12 bit

P 23.00 *, P 24.00 *,P 25.00 *, P 29.97 *,P 30.00 *, I 50.00 *,I 59.94 *, I 60.00 *SMPTE 428-9

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (X’Y’Z’)/12 bit

P or sF 23.98 *,P or sF 24.00 *SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (R’G’B’) / 12-bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’),
4:4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’+A) / 10-bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.00,
P or sF 24.00,
P or sF 25.00,
P or sF 29.97,

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-31

Standard

Resolution

Color Space

Rate
P or sF 30.00,
I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 428-9

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (X’Y’Z’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.98,
P or sF 24.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 12 bit

P or sF 23.98 *,P or sF 24.00 *,P or sF 25.00 *,P or sF 29.97 *,P or sF 30.00 *,I 50.00 *, I 59.94 *,I 60.00 *Note: * Advanced Format Option required

3G Level-B 2.97 Gb/s (SMPTE 425-B)
Payload Yype:Page B-32

l

1 x SMPTE 372M dual-link payloadl

2 x SMPTE 292M HD 720 payloads

l

2 x SMPTE 292M HD 1080 payloads

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualBuilt-in Generator Formats (CPU Module)
The following test patterns are available:l

100% Color Barsl

75% Color Barsl

Check Field

Standard

Resolution

Color SpaceRate

EBU Tech. 3267-E

720 x 576

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

I 50.00

SMPTE 259M

720 x 483

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’)/10-bit

I 59.94

SMPTE 296M

1280 x 720

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 23.98, P 24.00,
P 25.00, P 29.97,
P 30.00, P 50.00,
P 59.94, P 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

I 50.00, I 59.94,
I 60.00

SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 23.98, P 24.00,
P 25.00, P 29.97,
P 30.00

3G-A SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 50.00, P 59.94,
P 60.00

3G-B SMPTE 274M

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (Y’C’BC’R’) / 10 bit

P 50.00, P 59.94,
P 60.00

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page B-33

C

MaintenanceWarranty
Overview

The Rx range benefits from a one-year warranty including telephone and email support. Each Rx
leaves our UK factory with its own unique list of quality-controlled settings which are recorded by our
manufacturing department. Should the unit require calibration, these settings are compared with its
pre- calibration state to ensure consistency and traceability.
The product has been designed and manufactured to be of the highest quality. However, should the
instrument develop a fault during the warranty period, please return to your local PHABRIX agent for
repair.
Calibration services are available throughout the PHABRIX network of distributors, see:https://www.phabrix.com

Warranty Exceptions
PHABRIX is not responsible for free service during the warranty period under the following
conditions:l

Incorrect voltage applied to instrument.

lIncorrect power adaptor used.

lFire, natural disaster.

lRepair of instrument by non-PHABRIX approved agentlRepair of damage caused by third party products.

lRepair of damage caused by improper use.

l

Repair without proof of purchase.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page C-1

Product Registration
Please register your product online at: https://www.phabrix.com
Registering your product with PHABRIX ensures that you receive free email and telephone technicalsupport, plus free software updates during your product’s warranty lifetime.
.

Maintenance
General Maintenance
The Rx 2000, Rx 1000 and Rx 500instruments have been designed to need minimum maintenance.
The use of low power components means that there is no need for large amounts of cooling andtherefore there is no need to clean fan filters.
The case can be cleaned by wiping gently with a soft cloth, lightly dampened with a neutral cleaning
agent. A screen cleaning cloth may be used to clean the LCD. Do not apply force to the LCD whencleaning or it may be damaged.
Warning: Always remove the power supply from the instrument and turn OFF before cleaning.
Do not allow any water or other liquid to enter the instrument while cleaning.

Preventative MaintenanceFor long reliable use of the Rx instrument please take the following precautions:
l

l

l

l

Install the Rx instrument in a position which has adequate air flow and is not in direct sunlight.
Ensure that connecting cables are tied back so that they do not put strain on the rack mounts
and that they do not obstruct air flow.
Ensure that the fan grilles are not obstructed.
Avoid installations where there are dramatic changes in temperature, high humidity and areas
contaminated by dust, smoke or construction debris.

l

Avoid installations that may be affected by vibration.

l

Do not exceed the rated operation of the Rx instrument, i.e., temperature and signal levels.

Warning: The instrument should only be operated between 0 and 40° Celsius. If the instrument is
operated at a higher temperature, there is a possibility of a fire hazard. If the temperature ischanged rapidly from a cold environment to a hot environment, moisture can be createdinternally which can cause malfunction or damage the instrument. Allow the instrument to sit for
30 minutes without power applied to reduce any possibility of condensation. If the temperaturerises above 60° Celsius a warning dialog will be given. If the temperature rises above 65° Celsius
the instrument will be switched off. Under both conditions, an event will be added to the event
log to show what happened.

Page C-2

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Software MaintenanceInstalling New Software
New software can be installed on the Rx instrument using any of three different methods, dependingon the location of the instrument, the type of network access and your company’s IT policy.
Note that during the installation process the instrument will not be available for use.
Note: Any existing Presets stored will be archived and will need to be restored if they are
required. See the section Recalling Presets for details on restoring presets archived by the
installation of a new version of software.

Software Download Using a USB Pen Drive
If you have direct access to the equipment bay where the Rx instrument is housed, place a newversion of software into the root directory of a USB pen drive and then simply plug the pen drive into
the front USB port of the Rx instrument. Install the software as follows:
1. Download the latest Rx software version from the PHABRIX website and place the un-zipped
software file(s) in the root directory of a USB pen drive. Makes sure the files are in the root directory and not still in their unzipped folder.
2. Plug the USB pen drive into the USB socket on the front panel of the Rx instrument.

After about 30 seconds a copy utility is displayed on the Rx 2000 front panel and on the HDMI
output monitor.
3. Using the Copy −> utility, copy the new software release file (e.g., release 0.09.0018) displayed in the left panel to the Rx System Files. (You will be given the option to overwrite thedolby, dolby_dec, and patterns files in a confirmatation dialog window. Select Yes.)
Note: If the file copy process fails, restart the unit and try again. If the copy process fails asecond time, contact PHABRIX Support.
4. Once the copy process has completed, select Eject and then remove the USB pen drive fromthe front of the Rx instrument.
5. To install the new software on the unit, select it from the dropdown list in the System Info menu
on the HDMI output monitor. The highest number is the latest release. Select the Install button
and a confirmation dialog is displayed. Press Yes and the installation will start. You will see thefollowing progress messages displayed:
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page C-3

lLoading new software if foundlProgram CPU FPGAl

Program FPGA Slot 1

lProgram FPGA Slot 2

lProgram FPGA Slot 3

lProgram FPGA Slot 4

During this time the software is decompressed, files are extracted and the hardware (FPGAs)
are reprogrammed. If an error is given during installation, retry the installation and or download.
Do not switch the instrument off until an installation has completed correctly.
Wait for the new software to be installed (this can take up to 10 minutes depending on thenumber and type of Rx Modules installed). The progress will be indicated on the front panel
screen and on the Monitor output:
Warning: Do not use a USB hard drive as the Rx instrument cannot support this and it will
damage the Rx instrument.

Software Download from the Internet
If you have access to the Monitor output of the Rx instrument (or can access the unit remotely using a
web browser) and the unit has Internet network access, you can download and install software
directly to the Rx instrument from the browser:
This is a two-stage process, first the new software needs to be downloaded then the new softwareneeds to be installed on the unit.
1. In the System - Network menu (Network window on Monitor Output) check that the network
settings are correct and that the instrument is connected to the internet through the Ethernet
connection.
2. From the System Info menu, select the Download button to download the current release ofsoftware from the PHABRIX website.
Note: Multiple releases of software may be stored on the Rx instrument so that a previous
release can be re-installed if required.
This will take about 5 minutes depending on the connection to the Internet. Once thedownload has completed, the software will be checked for errors before being stored on the
instrument for future installation. If the latest software is already present on the Rx instrument,
no software will be downloaded and a message will be displayed.
3. To install the downloaded software on the instrument, select it from the dropdown list in the
System Info menu on the HDMI output monitor. The highest number is the latest release.
Select the Install button and a confirmation dialog is displayed. Press Yes to start the installation.
During this time the software is decompressed, files are extracted and the hardware (FPGAs)
are reprogrammed. If an error is given during installation, retry the installation and or download.
Do not switch the instrument off until an installation has completed correctly.
Once the installation has competed, if Reboot after Install is checked the instrument will restart with the new software installed. If unchecked, switch the instrument off and on again
manually.

Page C-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualNote: As part of the installation procedure, all memories are archived to a backup file andthen deleted. They can be restored from the System Memories page using the Restore
button and selecting the archive _Before_Upgrade.
You can view the software release notes by selecting the Changes button.

Reverting to an Earlier Version of Software
If you need to revert to an earlier version of software:
1. Use the System Info menu to find the version of software you require in the Software Upgrade
section of the menu then select Install.
2. Wait for the old software to be installed (this may take up to 10 minutes depending on the number and type of Rx Modules that are installed.) The progress will be indicated on the front panel
screen and on the Monitor output.
During this time the software will be decompressed, files will be extracted and the hardware(FPGAs) will be reprogrammed. If an error is given during the installation, retry the installationand or download. Do NOT turn the instrument off until an installation has completed correctly.

FTP Connection
Files may be uploaded or downloaded from/to the PHABRIX Sx by a remote PC using the Ethernet
connection.
To connect to the instrument you will need to use a FTP client which may be a GUI based one such as
FileZilla or that built into windows. Other FTP applications are available for other computer platforms.
lHostname: This is the IP address that the Rx instrument is using.

lUsername: sxuserlPassword: phabrixsx

Once you have connected to the instrument, you should be able to see the instrument file structure,described below. When downloading software revisions to the Rx instrument you must ensure thatyour FTP application is set to transfer binary files without corrupting them.
With some FTP clients, such as FileZilla, this requires you to go to the Edit - Settings menu and selectthe Transfers – File Types page. Make sure that the checkbox Treat files without extension as
ASCII file is NOT checked or corruption will occur.

Rx File Structure
The Rx instrument uses Linux as its operating system and a number of directories in the file system
are provided for user-specific files.

Backups Directory
The memory / presets that are backed-up using the System Presets - Backup function are saved as.mem files in the Backups folder. These can be copied to other Rx units and restored to copy presets
from one Rx unit to another.

Patterns Directory
The Patterns directory contains several subdirectories for the related video standards. Test pattern
files should be placed in the correct directory for the video standard in use, for example, if a 720p
video standard is being used, only the test patterns in the 720yuv directory will be available. You may
PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page C-5

have a test pattern with the same name in different pattern directories but they should have thecorrect size and color type (RGB/YUV) for the directory that they are in or they will be converted andmay lose color accuracy.
Patterns that are too large for the current standard will be clipped to fit; patterns that are too small will
gain a black border and will be centered on the output image.
Test patterns are .pat files for the standard line-based pattern files or user files. Supported user fileformats are:l

Windows bitmap files (.bmp). We support 24 bit uncompressed bitmap formats only.

l

10 bit video files (.dpx) We support 10 bit RGB/YUV formats only in Left to Right orientation.

l

Yuv and qnt files (8/10 bit packed yuv only)lTarga (.tga) files which are compressed or uncompressed 8 bit RGB files. We support Left to
Right orientation only.

Phabrix specific .pat, .rgb, .yc4 files generated by the Phabrix pattern editor/convertor.
Note: Note that bitmap files which are RGB will be converted to YUV internally as appropriate tothe output standard. This will mean that not all valid YUV values can be output. If dpx YUV files
are used then all valid values may be output.

Scripts Directory
Command scripts may be downloaded into this directory.

Setup Directory
The Setup directory contains the installer files for different releases of the software. Each release iscomprised of a .tar.gz file and is self-contained. If a release of software is copied onto the instrument,
the list of available releases will be updated within a minute.

Idents Directory
The Idents directory contains bitmap idents as used by the generator. Supported user file formats are:l.bmp (Windows bitmap files: 24 bit only)l.dpx files (10 bit video files)l.yuv files (8/10 bit packed yuv)l.tga (targa files)

Note: Bitmap files are RGB and are converted to YUV internally as appropriate to the output
standard. This will mean that not all valid YUV values can be output. If YUV files are used(.dpx),
then all valid values may be output.

Fonts
The fonts available for use by the generator to add text idents may be enhanced by downloading
new True Type fonts (.ttf) into this directory.

Loudness
The loudness logs recorded by the system are saved as CSV (comma separated value) files that canbe used to plot loudness graphs over time. These CSV files have the following columns:
Page C-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualIntegrated:
Contains the integrated loudness values.
Integrated Threshold:
The level above which alarms are logged in the Integrated Alarm column.
Integrated Alarm:
Contains the integrated loudness values above the Integrated Threshold value.
Momentary:
Contains the momentary loudness values.
Momentary Threshold
The level above which alarms are logged in the Momentary Alarms column.
Momentary Alarm:
Contains the integrated loudness values above the Momentary Threshold value.
Short Term:
Contains the Short-term loudness values.
Short Term Threshold:
The level above which alarms are logged in the Short Term Alarms column.
Short Term Alarm
Contains the integrated loudness values above the Short Term Threshold value.

FCAP
Frame Grab video clips with the extension .GRB are saved into this directory.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page C-7

D

Applications
Audio Configuration
Overview

The Rx instruments use a module-wide, high speed data bus to transfer video, audio and control data
between the installed modules and the CPU module. The bidirectional audio data bus allows audio
data (originating as SDI embedded audio or AES audio) to be processed by the system. This bus also
allows the routing of audio data to output as embedded SDI audio, AES audio and HDMI audio.
The following graphic shows a simplified audio block diagram of the Rx instrument (the numbering isreferenced in the subsequent sections:

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page D-1

Audio Channel Selection for Measurement and Analysis
Embedded Audio Input
The Analyzer module to which the SDI signal is connected will predetermine which instruments that
can have access to the embedded audio channels of the SDI signal. Audio channel selection is madeon each instrument.
The levels of the embedded audio channels for the selected input can be viewed using the Audio
Meters for that specific Analyzer module. The Meters window can displays the levels all 16 embedded
audio channels at the same time. The actual channel pairs to be displayed can be selected using the
Setup menu.
The Lissajous display allows the phase relationship of a selected stereo audio pair from theembedded audio channels to be seen.
The loudness levels of the embedded audio channels can be monitored and logged using the
Loudness window. The Loudness window allows a stereo pair, a 5.1 channel group to be selected(defined in the Surround Meters Setup window) or the Decoded Dolby audio channels from the Dolby
Decoder module to be used.
The Audio Status and Dolby Meta-Data (Dolby Metadata Analysis option) windows allow the selectionof an individual stereo pair from the embedded audio for analysis.

AES Audio Input
The 4AES module provides audio-only analysis tools and audio-only generation tools.

The 4AES module provides four configurable input (analyzer) /output (generator) pairs(see number ② ).

The Generator - Output Audio window of the 4AES module is used to assign the connectors as inputs
or outputs. The inputs (A In, B In, C In and D In) can be monitored using the instruments available withthe module.

Page D-2

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

The Audio Meters display allows the levels of the AES audio channels to be viewed. The Meters
window can display a maximum of 8 AES audio channels at the same time. The actual channel pairs to
be displayed can be selected using the Setup menu.
The Lissajous display allows the phase relationship of a selected stereo AES audio pair (A In, B In, C In
or D In) to be seen.
The loudness levels of the selected AES audio pair (A In, B In, C In or D In) can be monitored andlogged using the Loudness window.
The Audio Status and Dolby Meta-Data (Dolby Metadata Analysis option) windows allow the selectionof an individual AES audio pair for analysis.

Decoded Dolby Audio (Dolby Decoder Module)
The Dolby audio source to be decoded into baseband audio channels can be selected from a pair ofaudio channels from an Analyzer module SDI input, from the AES input on the CPU module or from apair of AES audio channels from the 4AES module (see number ④ ).

The selection of which audio pair that is decoded is made in the System - Dolby Decoder Setup
window. The Source dropdown allows the selection of either Analyzer (ie Analyzer module) or AES In(CPU module).
The Analyzer Source allows the selection of the SDI input holding the Dolby audio data or the 4AES
module. The discrete audio pair can then be selected from the dropdown list (for example G1P1 forSDI input or A In for AES input). Where the Dolby digital audio contains more than one program, therequire one can be selected.
Note: To ensure that the Dolby audio is decoded correctly, the System Reference locking frame
rate must be the same as the SDI input video being decoded.
The levels of the decoded Dolby audio channels can be viewed using the Audio Meters of thecorresponding Analyzer module. The Meters window can displays the levels all 8 of the decoded
audio channels at the same time. The actual channel pairs to be displayed can be selected using the
Setup menu.
The Loudness of the decoded Dolby audio can be measured using the Decoder 1 or Decoder 2
selection in the Loudness window of the corresponding analyzer module configured in the Dolby
Decoder menu. For example if Decoder 1 is configured to use SDI1 then Loudness window on
analyzer 1 can monitor decoded audio.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page D-3

The Lissajous display allows the phase relationship of a selected stereo audio pair from the decoded
Dolby audio channels to be viewed on the corresponding Analyzer module.

Page D-4

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualAudio Monitoring
The Audio Monitoring window allows the selection of any Analyzer input any audio group and any
audio pair from the selected embedded audio group (see number ⑨ ).

The Audio Monitoring window allows the selection of the headphone / speaker audio and theseparate selection of the rear connection audio.
The audio level and source for the rear panel can be made to follow the headphone / speaker source(see number ③ ).

The Source dropdown list allows the selection of the audio channels from an Analyzer module, theCPU AES In audio stereo pair or the Dolby Decoder module output (see number ④ ).

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page D-5

If the Dolby Decoder module is installed, the embedded Dolby audio pair to be decoded is also
selected as a Source.
The Audio Mode / Dolby Decode section controls whether PCM audio or a Dolby Down mix is output.
Where the Dolby audio contains multiple programs, the specific program to be decoded can beselected here.

Speaker / Headphone Audio monitoring
The Rx range provides a headphone socket on the front panel. In addition to this the Rx 2000
provides front panel loudspeakers. The audio to be monitored on the Speakers / Headphones iscontrolled by the Speaker / Headphone section of the Audio Monitoring window.

Rear Panel Monitoring
The Rx range provides an unbalanced audio pair on the CPU module GPIO connector. This can beused to monitor the pair of audio channels selected in the Rear Panel Audio section of the Audio
Monitoring window (see number ⑨ ).

HDMI Output Monitoring
The currently selected Rear Panel Audio pair in the Speaker/Headphone section of the Audio
Monitoring window is routed via the HDMI output when the DVI Monitor checkbox is disabled (seenumber ⑦ ).

Page D-6

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualThis is done using the HDMI/CPU SDI Setup window.
Note: The audio level of the SDI audio output is the same level as the currently selected audio
pair in the Audio Monitoring window.

HDMI Over SDI monitoring
If the HDMI Monitor output is routed over the CPU SDI output then the currently selected
Speaker/Headphone audio pair is output as Group 1, Pair 1 of the embedded SDI audio(see number ⑧ ).

This is done using the HDMI/CPU SDI Setup window.
Note: The audio level of the SDI audio output is the same level as the currently selected audio
pair in the Audio Monitoring window.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page D-7

Audio Routing
The Rx system allows SDI embedded audio and AES audio to be routed from input connection to
output connection.

AES Audio Output
Individual embedded audio channels from and SDI Analyzer input can be output as AES audio via the
4AES module (option) using the Output Audio window (see number ⑥ ).

This can be setup in the Output Audio window for the 4AES module.
When outputting SDI as AES audio it may be necessary to adjust the levels. This can be done using
the Master level or the individual channel levels.
To ensure that the SDI audio is synchronous with the AES output, the System reference locking frame
rate must be the same as the SDI output video being generated. This can be done from the “Ref”
menu on the HDMI task bar.

Page D-8

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User ManualGenerator SDI Audio Output
Discrete AES audio channels, from the CPU AES input or 4AES module input, can be embedded into
the Generator SDI output signal instead of audio test tones (see number ⑤ ).

This is done using the Generator Audio Output window.
When embedding AES sourced audio into the SDI signal it may be necessary to adjust the levels. Thiscan be done using the Master level or the individual channel levels.
If the Dolby Decoder module is installed Decoded Dolby audio channels can also be embedded into
the Generator SDI output signal.

PHABRIX Rx 2000
User Manual

Page D-9

www.phabrix.com

PHABRIX products are continuously being updated.
Please visit www.phabrix.com for latest product information